JP2018075482A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: Lottery means executes a lottery on the basis of the entry of a game ball into a first ball entry port or a second ball entry port, and privilege game giving means gives an advantageous privilege game to a player on the basis of a prescribed lottery result of a lottery result by the lottery means. Suppression means makes a lottery result of a lottery executed by the lottery means difficult to appear by making the game ball flow down to a second flow channel at least during a prescribed period. This allows the player to feel that the game ball is desired to flow down through the first flow channel more than flowing down in the second flow channel in which a lottery result is difficult to appear during the prescribed period. Thus, enjoyment for allowing the player to differently shoot a game ball in a shooting direction can be given because flow channels for making the game ball flow down can be changed to the player in accordance with a period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by making different game values that can be acquired.

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

  However, since the conventional gaming machine described above cannot enjoy the winning game as long as it continues to be out of the lottery, there is a risk that the motivation for the player's game will decrease as the player continues to be out of the lottery.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in games.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided in a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first flow path. A first entrance through which a game ball can enter, a second entrance through which the game ball can enter and provided in the second flow path, the first entrance, or the second entrance. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on a game ball entering a ball opening, and a privilege for giving a special game advantageous to a player based on a lottery result obtained by the lottery means being a predetermined lottery result This is executed by the lottery means in comparison with the case where the game ball is caused to flow down to the first flow path by flowing the game ball down to the second flow path at least during a predetermined period. Suppression means for making it difficult for a lottery result to be obtained.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a first position at which a gaming ball can enter the second entrance and the second entrance than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter, a passing means through which a game ball can pass, and a specific lottery that executes a lottery based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means And changing the variable means from the second position to the first position based on a specific lottery result by the means and the specific lottery means, and then changing from the first position to the second position. Variable control means for executing the control to be performed once or a plurality of times, and when the variable control means changes the variable means to the first position in the predetermined period, the variable means is controlled during the first period. Control to be the first position, outside the predetermined period And when the variable means is varied to the first position, the variable means is controlled to be in the first position for a second period longer than the first period, and the suppression means And a flow delay means for making a period until the game ball flowed down to the second flow path reaches the second entrance is longer than the first period.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the bonus game given by the bonus game granting means includes a first bonus game and a player than the first bonus game. A bonus game selection means capable of selecting at least a second bonus game that is easy to obtain a lot of game value, wherein the bonus game selection means is based on a game ball entering the second entrance. When the predetermined lottery result is obtained by the lottery executed, the second award game is more effective than the predetermined lottery result obtained by the lottery executed based on entering the first entrance. It is easy to select.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first entrance is provided in the first flow path, and the second entrance is provided in the second flow path different from the first flow path. A lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance, and the game is based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a predetermined lottery result. A privilege game advantageous to the user is granted by the privilege game giving means. The lottery result of the lottery executed by the lottery means as compared with the case where the game ball is caused to flow down to the first flow path by the suppression means by flowing the game ball down to the second flow path at least during a predetermined period Is hard to come out.

  Thereby, it can be made to feel that the 1st flow path wants to flow down rather than letting a game ball flow down with respect to the 2nd flow path where a lottery result is hard to come out at least for a predetermined period. Therefore, since the flow path through which the game ball flows down can be changed with respect to the player according to the period, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of striking the direction in which the game ball is launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the lottery is executed by the specific lottery means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and the game ball is unlikely to enter the variable means based on the specific lottery result obtained by the specific lottery means. The variable control means executes control one or more times by changing from the first position to the second position after changing the position from the position to the first position where the game ball can enter. When changing the variable means to the first position during the predetermined period, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is in the first position during the first period. On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the first position outside the predetermined period, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is in the first position for a second period longer than the first period. In the suppression means, the period until the game ball that has flowed down to the second flow path reaches the second entrance is longer than the first period by the flow-down delay means.

  As a result, when the player launches a game ball into the second flow path after confirming that the variable means has been changed to the first position during the predetermined period, the game ball enters the second entrance. , So that the player can aim the first flow path for a predetermined period. Therefore, since the flow path through which the game ball flows down can be changed with respect to the player according to the period, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of striking the direction in which the game ball is launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the player can easily obtain more game value than the first privilege game are selected by the privilege game selection device as the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means. The Here, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained by a lottery executed based on the game ball entering the second entrance, the game ball enters the first entrance. It becomes easier for the bonus game selection means to select the second bonus game than when the lottery executed based on the lottery results in a predetermined lottery result.

  Thereby, it can control that a game is aimed at the 2nd entrance during a predetermined period, and only the 2nd privilege game continues. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the detouring part of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first random number table, (c) is FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the specified contents of a first hit type selection table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the classification selection table for special figure 1, and (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the classification selection table for special figure 2 typically. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between probability variation jackpots A1 to A64 and a short time period, and (b) schematically shows short-term and short-term allocation when probability variation jackpot A is reached. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the probability variation jackpots C1 to C6 and the short time period, and (b) schematically shows the short and short time allocation when the probability variation jackpot C is reached. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd per random number table, (b) is the block diagram which showed the content of the special figure fluctuation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the selection table for common probability variation non-shortening. (A) is a block diagram showing the contents of a general map variation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general map normal / probability change time selection table, (c) These are the schematic diagrams which showed typically the content of the selection table for common figure change non-shortening. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the state setting table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the method of the state transfer of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the contents of the back setting table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the back A setting table, and (c) is the back B setting table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of this. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the back C time setting table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the notification time switching table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the setting table at the time of ceiling reset, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the notification back side setting table, (c) These are the schematic diagrams which showed typically the content of the continuous notice determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surfaces BG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the actual display screen when the back surface A is set, (b) is a schematic diagram of the actual display screen when the back surface A is set. It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the actual display screen in case the back surface C is set, (b) is the continuous notice effect started in the state where the back surface C is set. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the actual display screen in the case. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an actual display screen during a continuous notice effect, and (b) shows a hold ball corresponding to the number of fluctuations until the end of the continuous notice effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the alerting | reporting image displayed in a case. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the actual display screen in the 4th variation | change effect of a continuous notice effect, (b) is the actual display screen in the last variation effect of a continuous notice effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the actual display screen when the back surface D is set, (b) is the actual case when it becomes a big hit in the state where the back surface D is set. It is the schematic diagram which showed the display screen typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the back and back setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the back side setting process at the time of a removal performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the ceiling alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the contents of the super reach effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later.

  When the normal reach production is started in the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach is developed from the super reach, the selection screen for the super reach production mode is displayed during the normal reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. It is done. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and the ball passes through the normal entrance 67. In this case, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and either the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time and released. Is repeated a number of times (1 round or 4 rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. Special jackpot types include “normal jackpot A”, “normal jackpot B”, “probable jackpot A1” to “probable jackpot A64”, “probable jackpot B”, “probable jackpot C1” to “probability jackpot C6”, 74 types of “probable jackpot D” are provided, and after the end of the special gaming state, game value (game value) according to these jackpot types is given to the player as added value after the jackpot ends The

  Whether the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is determined according to the jackpot type. Specifically, when winning “probability jackpot A1” to “probability jackpot A64” and “probability jackpot B”, the first specific winning a prize slot 65a is set for a predetermined time (0.2 seconds have passed) in each jackpot round. Or until 5 balls are won). Since it is difficult for the player to win the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a during the open period of 0.2 seconds, in most cases where the player wins the above-mentioned jackpot, the special game state is obtained without the player getting a prize ball. Is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type other than the above, in each jackpot round, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapses or five balls are won). For this reason, in many cases, when the second specific winning opening 650a is a jackpot that is opened, it is possible to win five balls in each jackpot round.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that when 12 balls are entered into the first specific winning port 65 and the second specific winning port 650a, 12 prize balls are paid out. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for one round (one time) ("normal jackpot A", "normal jackpot B", "probability jackpot C"), There is a jackpot ("jackpot D") that is opened four rounds (four times). In the jackpot where the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for one round (one time), a maximum of 60 (5 × 12 × 1 round) prize balls will be paid out. Considering the number of balls launched, the player can increase the number of possessed balls by about 50 before and after the jackpot. In other words, the difference between the number of prize balls that are paid out during the jackpot and the ball that the player hits during the jackpot is about 50 balls. Similarly, in the jackpot where the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for four rounds (four times), a maximum of 240 award balls are paid out. Therefore, considering the number of balls that the player has launched to obtain the award balls, Before and after the big hit, the player can increase the holding ball by about 200 balls. That is, the difference between the number of award balls that are paid out during the jackpot and the ball that the player hits during the jackpot is about 200 balls.

  When the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. On the other hand, if a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball is discarded without being held. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the special symbol lottery performed based on entering the first entrance 64 will be referred to as the special symbol 1 lottery (the special drawing 1 lottery). The special symbol lottery performed on the basis of having entered 640 is referred to as the special symbol 2 lottery (the special symbol 2 lottery).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. Easy state. That is, when the normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol 2 is easily drawn. In the following description, the term “the period in which the electric accessory 640a is opened” includes the opening period based on the normal symbol winning and the ending period (ball throwing period). In other words, in the case of “the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second”, an opening period is set based on the normal symbol hit, and after the opening period ends, the electric accessory 640a is opened and the second input Meaning that the ball is set in a state where the ball can enter the ball opening 640, and then the electric accessory 640a is closed and an ending period is set, and the period until the ending period ends is 1 second. doing. Therefore, the period during which the electric accessory 640a is actually opened is configured to be slightly shorter than 1 second.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, after the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83 and a predetermined time (for example, 1 second or 300 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, the special symbol jackpot types include “normal jackpot A”, “normal jackpot B”, “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64”, “probability variation jackpot B”, “probability variation jackpot C1” to “ There are 74 types of “probable big hit C6” and “probable big hit D”.

  When “ordinary jackpot A” or “ordinary jackpot B” is reached, a special gaming state (one round jackpot) in which the number of rounds is one round, and no added value is given after the jackpot ends. In addition, when “probability jackpot A1” to “probability jackpot A64” and “probability jackpot B” are all set to a special game state with four rounds (four round jackpot), and then the added value after the jackpot ends , Shift to a high probability state of the special symbol (while the special symbol is being changed). In addition, in “probability jackpot A1” to “probability jackpot A64”, as an added value after the jackpot end, the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases for a period determined for each jackpot type. For example, “probability jackpot A5” increases the probability of winning a normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery five times. Until the end of 73 times, the normal symbol hit probability increases (see FIG. 9A). The correspondence relationship between the jackpot type and the period in which the probability of winning a normal symbol increases will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  From “Probable jackpot C1” to “Probable jackpot C6”, the number of rounds becomes a special game state with one round (one round jackpot), and then, as a value added after the jackpot ends, a high probability state (special) Moves to (during symbol change). In addition, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases only during the period determined for each jackpot type. For example, “probability jackpot C1” increases the probability of winning a normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 10 times, and “probability jackpot C5” draws the special symbol after the jackpot ends. Until the end of 80 times, the normal symbol hit probability increases (see FIG. 10A).

  Furthermore, when “probability jackpot A” is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 4 rounds (4 round jackpot), and then, as a value added after the jackpot ends, to a high probability state of special symbols (during special symbol probabilities) It moves, but the probability of hitting a normal symbol does not increase.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, a transition to a special gaming state. It is an easy game state. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). In addition, “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) is more advantageous than the “normal symbol time-short state” state (normal symbol normal state) when the normal symbol lottery condition is satisfied. It refers to the state. Specifically, the “normal symbol time-short state” is configured such that the normal symbol hit probability is higher than the “normal symbol normal state”.

  Note that the method of making the “normal symbol time-short state” more advantageous than the “normal symbol normal state” is not limited to increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol. For example, when the normal symbol lottery condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) executed in the second symbol display device 83 may be shortened. In “Normal symbol short-time state”, the normal symbol time-varying state is shorter than “Normal symbol normal state”, so that “Normal symbol short-time state” draws more regular symbols at the same time. Can be made. Therefore, since the number of times that the normal symbol is hit increases, it can be advantageous for the player. Further, in the “ordinary symbol time-short state”, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a that is released when the normal symbol is hit may be longer than that in the “normal symbol normal state”. As a result, when the normal symbol is hit in the “normal symbol time-short state”, a larger number of balls can enter the second entrance 640.

  Further, in the “normal symbol time-short state”, a plurality of the above conditions may be combined. For example, in the “normal symbol short-time state”, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be increased, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a opened when the normal symbol hits may be increased. . Further, if at least one advantageous condition is set in the “normal symbol time-short state”, the other conditions may be disadvantageous compared to the “normal symbol normal state”. For example, in the “normal symbol short-time state”, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher (advantageous) compared to the “normal symbol normal state”, but compared to the “normal symbol normal state”. The variation time may be long. That is, although the number of times of normal symbol drawing is reduced, it may be easy to win when the normal symbol lottery is performed.

  Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol is referred to as a special symbol probability variation period. Further, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a normal symbol short time period. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, a short time period of a normal symbol is indicated by using the number of times of drawing a special symbol. For example, if “C5 Probability Bonus C5” is won, it is described that the short time period of the normal symbol is 80 times.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the special symbol has a low probability state, the normal symbol has a normal state, the special symbol has a high probability state, and the normal symbol has a short time state. The variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes extremely long (3 to 5 minutes) and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is shortened (0.2 seconds × 1 time). Yes. On the other hand, when the short time period of the normal symbol ends (the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the fluctuation time becomes short (becomes 1 second) and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is reduced. It is configured to be long (1 second × 3 times).

  This increases the probability of hitting the normal symbol during the short time period of the normal symbol, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes longer (3 to 5 minutes), so the direction of the normal entrance 67 (the game board 13 Even if the ball is continuously launched in the right direction), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened only every few minutes, and the opening time is shortened. That is, even if a ball is launched to the normal entrance 67, the possibility of drawing the special symbol 2 is reduced. If the special symbol 2 is not drawn, the game will not shift to the special game state (hit state), so the number of balls will decrease so that the ball is launched in the direction of the second entrance 640 during the short period of the normal symbol. End up.

  On the other hand, when the short time period of the normal symbol is completed as described above, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is lengthened, so that it is easy to make the ball enter the second entrance 640. . By configuring in this way, in order to receive the lottery of the special symbol 1 during the short time period of the normal symbol, the ball is launched aiming at the first entrance 64, and after the short time period of the normal symbol has passed, In order to receive the lottery of the special symbol 2, the ball can be launched aiming at the second entrance 640.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the big symbol is won by a lottery of the special symbol 1, a big hit that hardly obtains a prize ball (a big hit that opens the first specific winning port 65a) is made. It is structured to be easy to win. On the other hand, when the big symbol is won by lottery of the special symbol 2, it is easy to win a big hit (a big hit that opens the second specific winning port 650a) that makes it easy to obtain a lot of prize balls. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the aim of ending the short time period by repeating the lottery of the special symbol 1 during the short time period of the normal symbol. Then, after the short period of normal symbols is over, a game can be played aiming at the second entrance 640 in order to obtain a prize ball.

  In general gaming machines, players play games aiming to win big games, so discouragement that they didn't win big enough to keep out of the special symbol lottery will accumulate, There is a risk of reducing motivation. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the short-term period ends, the player shifts to a state where the special symbol 2 advantageous for the player can be easily drawn. Therefore, during the short-term period of the normal symbol, the player It is possible to request that the special symbols come off continuously. Therefore, even if the special symbol continues to be lost, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed with respect to the fact that the player did not win a big hit, so that novel gaming characteristics can be provided.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a big hit is made by lottery of the special symbol 2, it is easy to make the ball enter the second entrance 640 again after the big hit (the special symbol high). (Probability state and normal state of normal symbol). In other words, when a special symbol 2 is won by lottery, the short time period of the normal symbol is hardly given. As a result, once the short time period of the normal symbol can be ended, the state where it is easy to receive the special symbol 2 lottery and the big hit (probability big hit D) from which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained are likely to continue. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more strongly wish that the special symbol lottery continues to be missed during the normal symbol time. Therefore, even if the special symbol is not a big hit, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Hereinafter, the state in which the above-described special symbol 2 is likely to be drawn will be referred to as a “long villa state”.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed based on the power-on (when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the power is turned on), the “special symbol low probability state and , "Normal state of normal symbol" (normal state). In the “special symbol low probability state and normal symbol normal state” (normal state), as described above, the normal symbol fluctuation time becomes longer (3 to 5 minutes) and hits the normal symbol. In this case, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is also shortened (0.2 seconds × 1 time). That is, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 (the special symbol 2 is difficult to be drawn), which is disadvantageous for the player.

  Thereby, for example, when there is a pachinko machine 10 in the “continuous state” when the hall is closed, the pachinko machine 10 can be brought into the “normal state” only by initial setting of the pachinko machine 10. That is, when the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, an advantageous state (“continuous state”) does not occur. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 that was in the “ream villa state” at the closing time of the hall is prevented (suppressed) from remaining in the “ream villa state” even when the store is opened the next day regardless of whether there is an initial setting. As a result, it is possible to suppress the “continuous state” from continuing across business days and causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

  Furthermore, since the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the “normal state”, the hall clerk can easily put the pachinko machine 10 in a disadvantageous state when preparing for opening a store. In other words, in order to end the “ream villa state”, the clerk of the hall plays the game until the “ream villa state” ends on the pachinko machine 10 between the closing time of the hall and the opening time of the next business day. There is no need to carry out any major work. Therefore, the time and labor of the hall clerk can be reduced.

  In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a “ream villa state” due to the initial setting, for example, in the hall where the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed before opening the store, inequalities occur due to the time the player visits the store. End up. In other words, players who cannot come to the store at the opening time of the hall cannot basically shift to the “rensou state” unless a short period of time elapses, whereas players who can visit the store at the opening time of the hall Since the game can be started from the “ream” state without any trouble, inequality occurs between the players. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, even if the initial setting is performed, the state does not shift to the “renzo state”. A game can be performed. Therefore, a sense of equality can be given to the players.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball is discarded without being held. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, purple, and white) of the respective LEDs are different, and various games of the pachinko machine 10 with fewer LEDs depending on the combination of the emission colors. The state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a short time during normal symbols, etc.) can be displayed. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a big win, a special symbol corresponding to the jackpot type (first symbol) Is shown.

  Further, on the right side of the game area when viewed from the front (the right side in FIG. 2), a detour accessory 700 is provided in which a ball launched to the right side of the game board 13 can enter the inside. This detour accessory 700 is provided to lengthen the time until the ball launched to the right side of the game board 13 reaches the second entrance 640 (more than 7 seconds after being launched). ing. By increasing the arrival time at the second entrance 640, a state other than the “ream state” (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, or a high probability state of a special symbol, and When the normal symbol is hit in the normal symbol time-short state), the ball reaches the second entrance 640 during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640. Can be suppressed. That is, even if the player hits the ball after recognizing that the electric accessory 640a is opened, the electric accessory 640a is closed while the ball is flowing down the detour accessory 700, It is configured so that the ball cannot enter the 2 entrance 640.

  As described above, in the “rensou state”, it is easy to win a big hit (probability big hit D) that allows a large amount of winning balls to be obtained by entering the ball into the second entrance 640. That is, it is configured to be advantageous to the player by winning a big win by drawing the special symbol 2. Therefore, even in a state other than the “rengo state” (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, or a high probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol), the “probability big hit D There is a possibility that the player hits the ball in an attempt to enter the second entrance 640 with the aim of winning. In order to suppress such a gaming method, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, by providing the detouring accessory 700, the player can play the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state. It is configured so that it is difficult to intentionally enter the ball.

  Details of the detour accessory 700 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detour accessory 700. As shown in FIG. 3, the detour accessory 700 is provided with an opening 710 at the top thereof. The ball can enter the inside of the detouring accessory 700 through the opening 710. In addition, an opening 720 for discharging the sphere that has flowed down in the detour bonus 700 to the outside of the detour bonus 700 is provided at the lower part of the detour bonus 700. Further, in the detouring accessory 700, the frontal front side, the rear side, and the left-right direction are prevented by the peripheral edge portion 730 in order to prevent the sphere that has progressed inside from being discharged outside without passing through the opening 720. The four directions are enclosed. Since the peripheral edge portion 730 is made of a translucent member (for example, PS material), the player can easily see how the ball flows down.

  Moreover, since the plane on the back side in the front view of the peripheral edge portion 730 can be assembled so as to be substantially the same plane as the base plate 60, a gap is generated between the peripheral edge portion 730 and the base plate 60. It is possible to prevent the sphere from being caught in the gap. Furthermore, since the front plane front side of the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are configured to contact each other without a gap when the front frame 14 is closed, the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are in contact with each other. It is possible to prevent the sphere from being caught in the gap.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of flow paths (guide flow paths 740 to 790) that are inclined toward the lower side of the detour combination 700 are provided inside the detour combination 700. In each of the guide channels 740 to 790, the surface with which the sphere contacts has a substantially flat plate shape, and the width is the width of the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 (the inner wall on the back side in front view and the inner wall on the front side in front view). The distance between the two is substantially the same. That is, a gap is formed between the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 and each of the guide passages 740 to 790, so that a sphere can be prevented from passing through the gap.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the guide channels 740, 760, and 780 are inclined in a direction downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction. In addition, the guide channels 750, 770, and 790 are inclined in a direction downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction. In addition, guide channels 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, and 790 are arranged in order from the upper side of the detouring accessory 700. That is, a flow path that is inclined in a downward direction from the upper right direction in the front view to a lower left direction and a flow path that is inclined in a downward direction from the upper left direction in the front view are alternately provided.

  The ball that has entered the opening 710 first travels to the guide channel 740 and flows down in the lower left direction when viewed from the front along the inclination formed by the guide channel 740. When the sphere reaches the lower end of the guide channel 740, the sphere falls from the guide channel 740 toward the guide channel 750. Then, the dropped sphere flows down along the guide channel 750 in the lower right direction in front view. When the sphere that has flowed down reaches the lower end of the guide channel 750, the sphere falls into the guide channel 760 and flows down in the lower left direction when viewed from the front along the inclination formed by the guide channel 760.

  Thereafter, the sphere alternately repeats the action of flowing down along the flow path and the action of dropping into the lower flow path. Finally, the sphere reaches the lower end of the guide channel 790 and falls from the lower end of the guide channel 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the ball that has entered the detouring accessory 700 is discharged to the outside of the detouring accessory 700 through the opening 720. Each time the flow path of the sphere changes, the direction of the flow of the sphere changes (that is, from the lower right direction to the lower left direction or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction). You can reduce the momentum to do. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time until the ball that has entered the detouring accessory 700 through the opening 710 is discharged to the outside through the opening 720. Thus, when the ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13 as compared with the case where the ball is launched to the left side of the game board 13, the ball is placed below the game board 13 (the first entrance 64 and the second entry). It is possible to lengthen the time to reach (the area where the ball port 640 is disposed) (7 seconds or more). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to intentionally enter the ball into the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream state” (that is, the state where the electric accessory 640a is difficult to be opened). Can do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the guide channels 740 to 790 are pivotally supported by the channel support shafts 741 to 791, respectively, and clockwise or counterclockwise around the channel support shafts as rotation axes. It is comprised so that rotation is possible. Further, the rotation operation is performed by rotating the lower surfaces of the guide channels 740 to 790 relative to the rotation stop members 742 a to 792 a or the rotation stop members 742 b to 792 b provided below the guide channels 740 to 790. Stop by touching. This rotation operation will be described using the guide channel 740 as an example.

  As described above, the guide channel 740 is configured to be rotatable about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This turning operation is performed based on the weight of the sphere flowing down the guide channel 740. Specifically, when the sphere flows down the upper half of the guide channel 740, the load due to the weight of the sphere is applied to the upper half of the guide channel 740, so that the upper half of the guide channel 740 is rotated downward. Force to move is generated. That is, a force is applied to rotate the guide channel 740 clockwise in front view, so that the guide channel 740 rotates clockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation operation stops when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742b. The rotation stop member 742b can prevent the guide channel 740 from rotating too much clockwise and the guide channel 740 from tilting in the opposite direction.

  Here, the rotation stop member 742b is a substantially cylindrical member, and is joined to the inner wall on the near side and the inner wall on the far side of the peripheral edge 730, respectively. That is, the position is not shifted by an impact when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 comes into contact. The other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and the rotation stop members 752b to 792b have the same structure as the rotation stop member 742b.

  On the other hand, when the sphere flows down the lower half of the guide channel 740, the load due to the weight of the sphere is applied to the lower half of the guide channel 740, and therefore the direction in which the lower half of the guide channel 740 is rotated downward The power of is generated. That is, since a force is applied to rotate the guide channel 740 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation operation stops when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742a. The rotation stop member 742a can prevent the guide channel 740 from rotating too much counterclockwise. That is, it is possible to suppress the inclination of the guide channel 740 from becoming too large to remove the momentum of the sphere. Therefore, the sphere can be surely flowed down over 7 seconds. In addition, when the sphere flows down in a state where the inclination of each of the guide passages 740 to 790 is maximized, the guide passages 740 to 740 so that it takes 7 seconds until the sphere reaches the second entrance 640. A path length of 790 and a maximum inclination angle are set. Since it is rare that the spheres flow down with all the guide channels 740 to 790 maintaining the maximum inclination angle, the time for the spheres to reach the second entrance 640 can be surely set to 7 seconds or more. it can.

  In this way, by configuring the guide passages 740 to 790 to change in inclination based on the load due to the weight of the sphere, the flow speed of the sphere flowing down the guide passages 740 to 790 can be varied. it can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the time until the ball finishes passing through the detouring accessory 700. In the above description, the case where one sphere travels on the guide channel 740 has been described. However, a state in which a plurality of spheres travel on the same guide channel may occur during an actual game. In this case, since it becomes more difficult to predict the rotation operation of each guide channel 740 to 790, it is difficult for the player to predict the time until the ball has passed through the detour accessory 700. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from driving the ball into the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state. In other words, in a state other than the “rensou state”, it is possible to prevent the winning of a large amount of prize balls by becoming a “probable big hit D” by winning a big win by drawing the special symbol 2.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is processed so that the left and right corners of the lower surface are rounded compared to the left and right corners of the upper surface. By comprising in this way, when each guide flow path 740-790 rotates, it can make it difficult to contact the corner | angular part of a lower surface, and the inner wall part of the peripheral part 730. FIG. Therefore, since each guide channel 740-790 can be brought closer to the peripheral portion 730, a gap is formed between each guide channel 740-790 and the peripheral portion 730, and a sphere is sandwiched in the clearance. Or the passage of the sphere through the gap can be suppressed. In addition, each guide flow path 740-790 is comprised so that it may return to the arrangement | positioning with the largest inclination by dead weight in the state where the ball | bowl is not flowing down. For example, in a state in which the sphere does not flow down the guide channel 740, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise with the channel support shaft 741 as the rotation axis due to its own weight. This rotation operation is performed until the lower surface of the guide channel comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a, and stops when it contacts the rotation stop member 742a. Similarly, the guide flow paths 750 to 790 are configured to perform a rotation operation until they come into contact with the rotation stop members 752 a to 792 a by their own weight in a state where the sphere is not flowing down. As a result, depending on whether the sphere flows down while each guide channel 750-790 is rotating, or the sphere flows down when the guide channels 750-790 are turned. The flow velocity of the sphere can be varied. Therefore, it can be made difficult for the player to aim at the second entrance 640.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each induction | guidance | derivation flow path 740-790 may not rotate with dead weight, but may rotate only by passage of a ball | bowl. When each guide channel 740 to 790 rotates under its own weight, the speed at which the ball flows down the detour device 700 by waiting until the rotation of each guide channel 740 to 790 is completed each time one ball is launched. Can be made substantially the same. On the other hand, if each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is configured so as not to rotate due to its own weight, even if it is launched one by one, the randomness of the flow-down speed can be improved. It is possible to make it difficult to aim at the mouth 640.

  In the detour accessory 700 according to the present embodiment, each of the guide passages 740 to 790 is configured to perform a rotation operation based on a load due to the weight of the sphere. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each guide channel 740 to 790 may be configured to be rotated by a motor or the like. This makes it difficult to predict the movement of each of the guide channels 740 to 790, so that the player can drive the ball into the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a shield, sword, cloak, etc. almost full of the front of the wooden box. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery result performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, easily obtains a winning ball (normal jackpot A to C, probability variation jackpot). In the case of C1 to C6, a probable variation jackpot D), a variation display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a jackpot is generated after the variation display is finished.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is out of place, or if it is a big jackpot of a type that is difficult to win a prize ball (probable big jackpot A1-A64, probable big jackpot B), the variable display that the same main symbols are not aligned Is done. This is because if the variable display with the main symbols aligned is performed in the type of jackpot where it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the player may be discouraged if the prize ball cannot be obtained. In addition, when the jackpot type is any one of the probabilistic jackpots A1 to A64, the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to each jackpot type is newly set. In other words, the short time period of the normal symbol that has been digested until the big hit is reset, which may cause the player to feel as if the "ream state" is far away. That is, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for the game is reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, when one of the jackpots A1 to A64 is won, the player notices that the short time period of the normal symbols has been reset by executing a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned. It is hard to be configured. Thereby, even if it wins jackpot A1-A64, it can suppress that a player will reduce the motivation with respect to a game.

  The change display in which the same main symbols are arranged will be described more specifically. For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “normal jackpot A”, the variable display in which any of the main symbols to which “0, 2, 4, 6, 8”, which is an even number, is added, is performed. If “ordinary jackpot B”, “probable variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6”, the main symbol to which the even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added, and “7” All the numbers including the odd number “7” are displayed if the main symbol to which any one of the main symbols to which the odd numbers except “1, 3, 5, 9” are added is “probable big hit D”. Fluctuation display in which any of the main symbols to which is added is arranged is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, or if it is a big hit of a type that is difficult to win a prize ball, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is a main display for displaying the 3rd symbol when the 3rd symbol is variably displayed or when the 3rd symbol is stopped. An area Dm, a small area Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls, and a small area Ds2 for reducing and displaying a variable effect are configured.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 is When the display effect different from the change effect is executed in the main display area, the change effect is reduced and displayed. By reducing and displaying the variation effect, it is possible to prevent the display effect different from the variation effect from being obstructed by the third symbol and becoming difficult to see.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display showing the expected degree of jackpot in the background of the third symbol Production and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, the state in which the main symbol of the third symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 5B) is limited to the period when the symbol variation starts and when the variation stops. During the change, the changing symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2. Thereby, the player can confirm the effect displayed in the main display area Dm without being blocked by the third symbol.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol and the symbol “×” are alternately lit. Display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is only for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64, but is limited to 4 times or less, or 5 times or more ( For example, it may be set to 8 times. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  A first entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80, and a second entrance 640 is disposed at the lower right of the first entrance 64. Has been. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the first entrance switch. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol (a special symbol 1 lottery). On the other hand, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. Accordingly, a special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is performed by the main controller 110. When the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed, a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are also one of the entrances for paying out 5 balls as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed in the lower left direction of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In addition, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed in the upper right direction of the second ball opening 640, and a horizontally long second specific winning port (large opening) 650a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls can be obtained than usual. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time.

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, when the jackpot round remains, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific prize opening 65a is configured to be performed once (1 round) or 4 times (4 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and by winning a ball to the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a being opened. A lot of prize balls are paid out.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 include a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate. And a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening / closing driving forward. The first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a are in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win in normal times. In the case of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. Then, it operates to alternately repeat the open state and the normal closed state.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the period during which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened is 0.2 seconds at the maximum. That is, even if the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, it is difficult to enter the ball. On the other hand, the period during which the second specific prize winning opening 650a is opened is configured to be 30 seconds at the maximum. That is, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained at the jackpot where the second specific winning opening 650a is opened.

  The first specific winning opening 65a is configured so that the opening / closing operation is difficult to be seen by the player by the cover body 800 provided on the front surface thereof. As described above, in order to make it difficult to distinguish the special symbol from being out of order when the first specific winning opening 65a is a jackpot that is opened (probable big jackpot A1 to A64, probable big jackpot B), the third symbol display device In 81, it is configured such that a fluctuating effect in which the main symbols are not aligned is executed. Despite this configuration, if the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is made easily visible, the big hit (probability big hit A1 to A64, It can be easily determined whether or not the probability variation big hit B) has been reached. That is, there is no point in executing a variation effect in which main symbols are not aligned. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the cover body 800 makes it difficult to confirm the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a, and the player is hard to obtain a winning ball (probable big hit A1 to A64, probable big hit B). It is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether or not. Although omitted in FIG. 2, the actual cover body 800 is configured to be difficult to see the first specific winning opening 65 a by applying a pattern, color, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot is configured so that the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a is opened according to the jackpot type, but is not limited to the above-described form. . When the game area has a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37, the first specific winning port is displayed. The opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time, and the first specific winning opening 65a is triggered by a ball being won while the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened. In addition, a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the second specific winning port 650a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time may be formed as a special game state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. A special figure variation pattern selection table 202d, a common figure variation pattern selection table 202e, and a state setting table 202f are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 7B) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (at the time of starting winning) is defined in the first per-random number table 202a. If it matches one of the determination values, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

  In the first random number table 202a, a determination value for a low probability state of a special symbol and a determination value for a high probability state of a special symbol are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the low probability state of the special symbol, 8 of “5, 52, 78, 119, 138, 201, 262, 291” as the judgment value that is a big hit of the special symbol. Individual determination values are defined (see FIG. 7B). The first random number counter C1 includes a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 299. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 8 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 37.5”.

  On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, ten determination values “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 249, and 270” are defined as the determination values that are jackpots of the special symbol. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/30”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the number of determination values that are jackpots of special symbols is changed only by two. For this reason, the probability that the special symbol is a big hit does not change greatly between the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol. This is because even if the special symbol is a big chance in the low probability state, most of the prize balls are hardly obtained, and after the jackpot ends, a short time period of the normal symbol is set from “probable big jackpot A1” to “probable big jackpot” It is because it will become A64 ". In other words, even if a special symbol is a big hit in the normal state of the special symbol, there is almost no merit for the player, so the longer the normal state of the special symbol lasts, the less the player's interest in the game There is.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is basically necessary to end the short time period of the normal symbol in order to shift to the “long villa state” which is the most advantageous state for the player. In other words, it is necessary to continuously remove the special symbol during a short time period of the normal symbol. Therefore, during the normal symbol time reduction, the special symbol can be removed continuously, so that the player can feel as if he is approaching the “renzo state” step by step. Interest can be improved. On the other hand, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the short time period of the normal symbol is not set in the first place. Therefore, no matter how long the special symbol is deviated, it does not approach the “spanning state”. That is, as the special symbols are continuously removed, the player's discouragement accumulates, and the player may lose motivation for the game.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability that the special symbol jackpot is not significantly different from the high probability state of the special symbol is low. It is difficult to stay in the probability state. Thereby, it can suppress that a player loses the motivation with respect to a game because the low probability state of a special symbol continues for a long time.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7C) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each jackpot type. It is defined in association with. As shown in FIG. 7 (c), this first hit type selection table 202b is for special figure 1 in which a judgment value for determining the big hit type is determined when the special symbol 1 is won by lottery. A hit type selection table 202b1 and a special type 2 hit type selection table 202b2 in which a determination value for determining a big hit type when a big win is won by lottery of special symbol 2 is configured. Has been. Details of these data tables will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 8A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the type selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 described above, and FIG. 8B shows the specified contents of the type selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 described above. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), “normal jackpot A”, “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64”, and “probability variation jackpot B” are selected in the special figure 1 hit type selection table 202b1. In this case, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. In other words, if the special symbol 1 is won in the lottery, the jackpot type is determined as any one of “normal jackpot A”, “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64”, and “probability variation jackpot B”.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, “normal jackpot A” is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C <b> 2 is “0 to 9”. The first hit type counter C2 includes a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of “0 to 199”. Among the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “ordinary jackpot A” is ten. Is 5% (10/200).

  Normally, the jackpot A is one round, and the second specific prize opening 650a is a jackpot that is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or five balls are won). A player can receive a maximum of 60 (5 × 12 × 1 round) prize balls (the number of possession balls can be increased by about 50). In addition, after the jackpot is over, the special symbol shifts to a low probability state, and the normal symbol is not given a short time period (the normal symbol shifts to the normal state). As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes longer (3 to 5 minutes) and the normal symbol In the case of winning, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also shortened (0.2 seconds × 1 time). Therefore, even if a ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is difficult to cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the “normal jackpot A” is over, it is necessary to aim for a big jackpot by drawing the special symbol 1. If the special symbol 1 lottery results in a “probable jackpot A”, the short time period of the normal symbol is set, so that the “shortage state” that is most advantageous to the player by passing the set short time period is achieved. Can be migrated. Further, if the “successful big hit B” is obtained through the lottery of the special symbol 1, it is possible to shift directly to the “long villa state” after the big win ends.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 189”, “probability big hit A” is associated and defined. Among the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are “probable big hit A” is 180. Therefore, when the special symbol 1 draws a big hit, “normal big hit A” Is 90% (180/200). In other words, the majority of cases where the special symbol 1 is won in the lottery is the “probable big hit A”.

  “Probability variation jackpot A” is a collective term for “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64” which are different for a short period of time after the jackpot is ended. In the range of ˜189 ”, determination values corresponding to the 64 types of jackpots are further defined. The correspondence relationship between the 64 types of jackpots and the first hit type counter C2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  This “probable big hit A” has four rounds and is the big hit that the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapses or five balls are won). , It becomes difficult for the player to win the prize ball. In addition, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol shifts to a high probability state, and a short time period (1 to 100 times) of the normal symbol according to the jackpot type is given. As described above, in the short time state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes longer (becomes 3 to 5 minutes), and when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is The opening time is also shortened (0.2 seconds × 1 time). Therefore, even if a ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is difficult to cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the “probability change big hit A” is completed, it is necessary to pass the set short time period by continuously losing by the special symbol 1 lottery. When the set short time period elapses, it becomes a “rensou state” where the special symbol 2 is likely to be drawn. If the special symbol 2 is won by lottery, it becomes easy to win the “probability big hit D” that can acquire a large amount of prize balls, so that it becomes an advantageous state for the player by entering the “ream” state. Note that, as described above, even if the set short time period has not elapsed, if it is “probable big hit B” by the lottery of the special symbol 1, it is possible to shift directly to the “long villa state”.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “190 to 199”, “probability big hit B” is associated and defined. Among the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “probable big hit B” is 10, so when the big symbol is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, “probable big hit B” Is 5% (10/200).

  This probability variation jackpot B has four rounds, and the first specific winning opening 65a is a jackpot that is opened for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapses or five balls are won). It is difficult for a person to obtain a prize ball. In addition, after the jackpot is over, the state shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol, but the short time period of the normal symbol is not given. In other words, when winning the promising jackpot B, the system shifts directly to the “rensou state” after the jackpot ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8B, the special type 2 type selection table 202b2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 8 (b), “normal jackpot B”, “probability variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6”, and “probability variation jackpot D” are selected in the special figure 2 hit type selection table 202b2. In this case, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. In other words, if the special symbol 1 is won by a lottery, the jackpot type is determined as any one of “normal jackpot B”, “probable variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6”, and “probability variation jackpot D”.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, “normal jackpot B” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C <b> 2 is “0 to 9”. Among the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “ordinary big hit B” is ten. Is 5% (10/200).

  This “ordinary jackpot B” has one round, and the second specific winning slot 650a is a jackpot that is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or five balls are won). As described above, the player can receive a maximum of 60 (5 × 12 × 1 round) prize balls (the number of possession balls can be increased by about 50 balls). In addition, after the jackpot is over, the special symbol shifts to a low probability state, and the normal symbol is not given a short time period (the normal symbol shifts to the normal state).

  As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes longer (3 to 5 minutes) and the normal symbol In the case of winning, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also shortened (0.2 seconds × 1 time). Therefore, even if a ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is difficult to cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the “normal jackpot B” is over, it is necessary to aim for a big jackpot by drawing the special symbol 1. If the special symbol 1 lottery results in a “probable jackpot A”, the short time period of the normal symbol is set, so that the “shortage state” that is most advantageous to the player by passing the set short time period is achieved. Can be migrated. Further, if the “successful big hit B” is obtained through the lottery of the special symbol 1, it is possible to shift directly to the “long villa state” after the big win ends.

  On the other hand, “probability big hit C” is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 19”. Of the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are “probable big hit C” is ten. Is 5% (10/200).

  The “probable variation jackpot C” is a generic name of “probability variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6” which are given after the jackpot is ended, and is actually a determination value “10 which becomes“ probability variation jackpot C ”. In the range of “˜19”, determination values corresponding to each of the six types of jackpots are further defined (see FIG. 10A).

  Further, the number of time reductions given also varies depending on whether or not it is in the “ream” state (that is, the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). As shown in FIG. 8 (b), states other than the “ream state” (ie, a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state (normal state) of a normal symbol, or a high probability state of a special symbol, and In the normal symbol time-short state (probability variation short-time state), even if any of the “probability variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6” is won, 100 time-shortening periods are set as the regular symbol time-shortening period. By configuring so that only the shortest time period (100 times) is set, the player launches a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state (a large number of award balls) (Playing a game aiming to become a probable big hit D) that can be acquired) can be suppressed. This is because the longer the time-short period, the more difficult it is for the player to shift to the “long-run state”.

  On the other hand, when the “big hit state” (high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) becomes “big hit C”, a different number of short-term periods are given depending on the big hit type. The correspondence between “big hit C1” to “big hit C6” and the first hit type counter C2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The “probable big hit C” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is one round and the second specific winning slot 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or five balls are won). As a result, the player can receive a maximum of 60 (5 × 12 × 1 round) prize balls (the number of possession balls can be increased by about 50). Also, after the jackpot is over, the special symbol shifts to a high probability state, and the short time period of the normal symbol is given (10 to 100 times) according to the jackpot type and the state of winning the jackpot. As described above, in the short time state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes longer (becomes 3 to 5 minutes), and when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is The opening time is also shortened (0.2 seconds × 1 time). Therefore, even if a ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is difficult to cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the “probability big hit C” is over, it is necessary to elapse the set short time period by continuing the losing by the lottery of the special symbol 1. When the set short time period elapses, it becomes a “rensou state” where the special symbol 2 is likely to be drawn. If the special symbol 2 is won by lottery, it becomes easy to win the “probability big hit D” that can acquire a large amount of prize balls, so that it becomes an advantageous state for the player by entering the “ream” state. Note that, as described above, even if the set short time period has not elapsed, if it is “probable big hit B” by the lottery of the special symbol 1, it is possible to shift directly to the “long villa state”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, “probability big hit D” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C <b> 2 is “20 to 199”. Among the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are “probable variation big hit D” is 180. Therefore, when the special symbol 2 draws a big hit, “probability big hit D” Is 90% (180/200).

  Since this probability variation jackpot D is a round of 4 rounds and the second specific winning opening 65a is a jackpot that is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed or 5 balls have been won), as described above. The player can receive a maximum of 240 prize balls (5 × 12 × 4 rounds) (the handball can be increased by about 200 balls). When “probability big hit D” ends, the state shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol. Further, depending on whether or not the “probable big hit D” is the “long-run state”, a different time saving period is given after the jackpot ends.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8B, a state other than the “ream state” (that is, a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a special symbol, and a short time state of a normal symbol) Then, 100 short time periods are set as the short time period of normal symbols. By configuring so that only the shortest time period (100 times) is set, the player launches a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state (a large number of award balls) (Playing a game aiming to become a probable big hit D) that can be acquired) can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if “probable jackpot D” in the “renso” state, the short time period of the normal symbol is not given after the jackpot ends. In other words, in the “renso state”, if the probable jackpot D is obtained by drawing the special symbol 2, the transition to the “renso state” (the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) is resumed after the big jackpot ends. To do. As described above, in the “renso” state, it becomes easy for the special symbol 2 to be drawn. And 90% of the cases where the special symbol 2 is won in the lottery is the “probable big hit D”. Therefore, since it becomes easy to repeatedly win “probability big hit D”, the player can obtain a large amount of prize balls by entering the “ream” state. This “Renso state” is terminated by winning “normal jackpot B” or “probable bonus jackpot C” when a special jackpot is won by lottery. In addition, when the special symbol 1 is drawn in the “Renso state” and “normal jackpot A” or “probable bonus jackpot A” is won, the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, or the normal symbol In order to shift to the short-time state, the “long villa state” ends.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol has a low probability state, and the normal symbol shifts to the normal state (normal state) ("normal jackpot A", "normal jackpot B"), the special symbol has a high probability state, And the big jackpot ("probability big hit A", "probability big hit C") that shifts to the short time state (probability change short state) of the normal symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol, and the normal state of the normal symbol (continuous state) There are three types of jackpots ("probable variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot D") that are shifted to (). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot type that shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol (non-probability short time state) may be provided. As a result, it becomes more difficult to predict the state from the probability of hitting the normal symbol, so even if the special symbol is repeatedly deviated, it is detected that the state is a low probability state of the special symbol that does not shift to the `` village state ''. Thus, the player can be prevented from quitting the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, a description will be given of the correspondence relationship between the above-mentioned “probable variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64” and the first hit type counter C2, and the short time period given after each jackpot.

  As described above, “probability jackpot A1” to “probability jackpot A64” shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol after the end of each jackpot, and shortens the number of times of ordinary symbols according to each jackpot type A jackpot type to which a period is given. In addition, the given time saving period increases in the order of “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64”, and is a minimum of once (in the case of probability variation jackpot A1) and a maximum of 100 times (in the case of probability variation jackpot A64). A period is granted.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, “probability big hit A1” is associated with two determination values “10” and “11” as the value of the first hit type counter C2. Similarly, two determination values are associated with “probability big hit A2” as the value of the first hit type counter C2, and the values are “12” and “13”. Similarly, “probability variation jackpot A3” to “probability variation jackpot A9” are associated with two values of the first hit type counter C2. In addition, when “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A9” is reached, after the completion of each jackpot, 1 to 9 times of the normal symbol time-short state is given.

  In addition, “decision big hit A10” is associated with one determination value “28” as the value of the first hit type counter C2. When this “probability big hit A10” is completed, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 19 times. That is, there is no jackpot that is given 10 to 18 times as a short time period of a normal symbol in “probability jackpot A”. "Probability variation jackpot A11" to "probability variation jackpot A36" are also associated with one value of the first hit type counter C2, and the values are "29" to "54", respectively. That is, determination values having different values by 1 are associated with “probability variation jackpot A10” to “probability variation jackpot A36”. Further, when “probability variation jackpot A11” to “probability variation jackpot A36” are completed, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 20 to 45 times, respectively. That is, it is configured such that a short time period with a different number of times is given from “probability variation jackpot A10” to “probability variation jackpot A36”.

  Three determination values “55, 56, 57” are associated with the “probability big hit A37” as the value of the first hit type counter C2. When this “probability big hit A37” is finished, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 64 times. That is, there is no jackpot type that is given 46 to 63 times as a short time period of normal symbols in “probability jackpot A”. “Probability variation jackpot A38” to “Probability variation jackpot A45” are also associated with three values of the first category counter C2, each of which corresponds to “55, 56, 57” to “79, 80, 81”. Is. That is, determination values having different values by 3 are associated with “probability variation jackpot A38” to “probability variation jackpot A45”. When “probability variation jackpot A38” to “probability variation jackpot A45” are completed, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 65 to 72 times, respectively. That is, it is configured such that a short time period with a different number of times is given from “probability variation jackpot A37” to “probability variation jackpot A45”.

  “82” is associated with “probable big hit A46” as the value of the first hit type counter C2. When this “probability big hit A46” is completed, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 73 times. Further, “probability variation jackpot A47” to “probability variation jackpot A63” are also associated with one value of the first hit type counter C2, and the values are “83” to “99”, respectively. That is, determination values having different values by 1 are associated with “probability variation jackpot A47” to “probability variation jackpot A63”. In addition, when “probability variation jackpot A47” to “probability variation jackpot A63” are completed, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 74 times to 99 times, respectively. That is, it is configured such that “short-term periods with different number of times” are given from “probability variation jackpot A46” to “probability variation jackpot A63”.

  Ninety determination values “100 to 189” are associated with “probability big hit A64” as the value of the first hit type counter C2. In addition, when “probability big hit A64” is completed, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 100 times. There are 180 judgment values of “10 to 189”, of which 90 judgment values are assigned to “probability jackpot A64”, so that “probability jackpot A” 50% (90/180) is “probable big hit A64”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9 (b), a description will be given of the short-time and short-term allocation of the normal symbols given when the “probability jackpot A” is won. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the range of the short time period (number of rotations) of the normal symbol and the ratio (distribution) at which the range is selected when “probability big hit A”.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the ratio in which the range of 1 to 9 times is selected as the short time period of the normal symbol (that is, the ratio in which “probability big hit A1” to “probability big hit A9” is selected) is: 10%. As described above, since the number of determination values associated with “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A9” is 18 from “10 to 27”, out of 180 determination values that are “probability variation jackpot A”. This is because it corresponds to 10% (18/180).

  If the short time period of a normal symbol is within nine times, the short time period can be passed with a high probability, and the state can be shifted to the “long villa state”. For example, if the short time period of the normal symbol is three times, the special symbol is removed three times in succession, so that the state shifts to the “long villa state”. As described above, since the probability of winning a special symbol is 1/30, the probability of losing three consecutive times is approximately 90% (29/30 to the third power). Even if the short-term period is nine times, the probability that the special symbol will be lost nine times in a row is about 74% (29/30 to the 9th power), and the majority shifts to the “ream” state. Therefore, even if the player recognizes that there is a possibility that the player has become “probability big hit A” by gazing at the first specific winning opening 65a, it can be expected that a short time period is selected. . In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the short period of time spent before reaching the “probable big hit A” has been wasted (the “ream” state has been distant). Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, there is no case where 10 to 18 times are selected as the short time period of the normal symbol. Moreover, the ratio by which 19 times-27 times, 28 times-36 times, 37 times-45 times is selected as a short time period of a normal symbol is 5% each. That is, the ratios of “probable variation jackpot A10” to “probability variation jackpot A18”, “probability variation jackpot A19” to “probability variation jackpot A27”, and “probability variation jackpot A28” to “probability variation jackpot A36” are 5% each. . This is because the number of judgment values associated with these is nine each, which corresponds to 5% (9/180) of the 180 judgment values that are each “probability big hit A”.

  Thus, after the end of “probability big hit A”, even if the special symbol detachment continues nine times, if it does not shift to the “rengo state”, until the special symbol detachment continues at least 10 times ( In other words, there is no possibility of shifting to the “ream state” (from the end of “probable big hit A” until the detachment of the special symbol 19 times continues). Hereinafter, the range of the number of times in which there is no short-term / short-term distribution is referred to as “zone without distribution”. On the other hand, the range of the number of times of short- and short-term distribution (for example, 1 to 9 times) is called a “zone with distribution”.

  If the “no distribution zone” continues for a long time, the player may reduce motivation for the game at the stage when the player determines that the “zone with distribution” has shifted to the “zone without distribution”. is there. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the “zone without distribution” is limited to 17 times at the maximum (the zone of 46 times to 63 times described later). Therefore, even when entering the “no-assignment zone” when digesting the short time period of normal symbols, it will prevent the player's motivation for the game from being reduced, and the next “zone with the assignment” The game can be continued aiming at. In addition, even if a player quits the game due to the “no-assignment zone”, it makes other players try to play until the next “assigned zone”. be able to. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, there is no case where 46 to 63 times are selected as the short time period of the normal symbol (the “zone without distribution”). In addition, the ratio of 64 times to 72 times selected as the short time period of normal symbols is 15%. That is, the ratio of “probability variation jackpot A37” to “probability variation jackpot A45” is 15%. Since the determination values associated with “probability variation jackpot A37” to “probability variation jackpot A45” are in the range of “55 to 81” and the number of the determination values is 27, 180 determination values that become “probability variation jackpot A”. This is because it corresponds to 15% (27/180).

  This zone has a higher selected ratio than other “sorted zones”. By setting the zone immediately after the longest 46 to 63 times out of each “non-assigned zone” to a zone with a high ratio selected as a short-term period, until the player survives the “no-assigned zone” It is easy to keep the motivation to continue playing.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the ratio of selecting 73 times to 81 times and 82 times to 90 times as the short time period of the normal symbol is 5%, respectively. That is, the ratio of “probability variation jackpot A46” to “probability variation jackpot A54” and “probability variation jackpot A55” to “probability variation jackpot A63” is 5%, respectively. This is because the number of judgment values associated with these is nine each, which corresponds to 5% (9/180) of the 180 judgment values that are each “probability big hit A”.

  Moreover, there is no case where 91 times to 99 times are selected as a short time period of normal symbols (a zone without distribution). The fact that the zone has not been shifted to the “continuous state” means that 100 times is selected as the short time period of the normal symbol. In other words, it means that there are less than 10 remaining special symbols for shifting to the “renso” state. "The game is continued aiming at 100 times, which is a short period set later." That is, even if the rate at which this zone is selected is 0%, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is not affected. In addition, since the rate at which the short time period is allocated to the other zones can be increased, it is possible to add sharpness to each zone. Therefore, since it is possible for the player to play the game by taking into account the characteristics of each zone, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Further, as described above, the rate at which 100 times is selected as the short time period of the normal symbol is 50% when “probable big hit A”. In order to shift to the “rengo state” when 100 times are selected as the short-term period, it is necessary to repeat the special symbol detachment 100 times continuously, but the probability of this event occurring is about 3% (29/29). 30 to the 100th power), which is a very low probability. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an excessive shift to the “long-run state” by increasing the rate at which 100 short-term periods are selected (the probability variation big hit A64 is selected). Therefore, it can suppress producing a disadvantage with respect to a hall | hole.

  In this embodiment, when the special symbol is out of place and when it is “probable big hit A”, the variation effect mode is the same (a variation effect in which the same main symbol is not aligned is executed) You may comprise so that display effects, such as a change effect, may be performed in the aspect which can be easily recognized by the player that "probability big hit A". This allows the player to count the number of misses after becoming “probable big hit A”, and whether or not there is a high possibility of becoming a “spanning state” based on the number of misses and the proportion of zones with each distribution Can be predicted. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Further, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display the number of fluctuations after the big hit ends. Thereby, the player who is going to start a game can determine the number of detachment to the zone with the next distribution based on the number of fluctuations, and can be used as a material for determining whether to start the game. In addition, displaying the number of fluctuations is not limited to the 3rd symbol display device 81. For example, a signal indicating the start of the fluctuation effect or a signal indicating the big hit is output to the outside and provided outside the pachinko machine 10. The display device may be configured to display the number of changes from the end of jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not the player starts the game based on the number of times, in the same manner as displaying the number of times of variation on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the short time period is set by the distribution shown in FIG. 9B, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the time-short period from 1 time to 100 times may be selected equally. Thereby, since the zone without distribution can be abolished, it is possible to easily maintain the player's motivation for the game. Further, for example, after the “probability big hit A” is completed, it may be configured such that 100 short time periods are always set. Thereby, since it can suppress that it becomes "a consecutive resort state" excessively, it can suppress producing a disadvantage with respect to a hall | hole. Moreover, the upper limit for time and short-term is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily determined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the correspondence relationship between “probability variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6” and the first hit type counter C2 and the short time period given after each jackpot will be described.

  As described above, “probable jackpot C1” to “probable jackpot C6” are jackpot types that can be determined when a special symbol 2 lottery is made in the “Landou State”, and after each jackpot ends, the special symbols In addition to shifting to a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time period of regular symbols is given as many times as each jackpot type. Also, the given time saving period increases in the order of “probable variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6”, and is a minimum of 10 times (in the case of the probability variation jackpot C1) and a maximum of 100 times (in the case of the probability variation jackpot C6). A period is granted.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), “probability variation jackpot C1”, “probability variation jackpot C2”, “probability variation jackpot C3”, “probability variation jackpot C4”, and “probability variation jackpot C5” are respectively set to the first per category counter C2. “10”, “11”, “12”, “13”, “14” are associated as values. When each jackpot is completed, 10 times, 30 times, 50 times, 70 times, and 80 times are given as short time periods for normal symbols.

  Further, “15-19” is associated with “probability large hit C6” as the value of the first hit type counter C2. When this “probable big hit C6” is completed, 100 short time periods are given.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 (b), the ratio at which the short time period is selected for each number of fluctuations will be described. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the ratio of selecting the short time period of 10 times, 30 times, 50 times, 70 times, and 80 times is 10%. On the other hand, the rate at which 100 short time periods are selected is 50%. And it is comprised so that time-short periods other than the above may not be selected. As is clear from a comparison between FIG. 9B and FIG. 10B, when “probability big hit A” is reached, the ratio of selecting a short time period of 50 times or less is 25%. On the other hand, when “probability big hit C” is reached, the ratio of selecting the short time period of 50 times or less is 30%. In other words, when the jackpot that triggers the end of the “ream” state, a short time period is easily selected. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to shift to the “renzo state” again by passing a short period of time after the “renzo state” has ended. The game can be continued. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Note that time-to-short-term distribution is not limited to this mode. The same distribution as when the probability variation jackpot A is reached may be used. In other words, the probability variation jackpot C1 to the probability variation jackpot C64 may be provided, and each jackpot may be configured to be given the same number of times as the probability variation jackpots A1 to A64.

  Returning to FIG. 7A, the description will be continued. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11A) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored, and is acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal entrance 67. If the random number counter 2 per 2 matches the determination value defined in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. Details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 11A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 11A, the second random number table 202c defines a table for a low probability (ordinary symbol normal state) and a table for a high probability (normal symbol time short state). Has been.

  In the second random number table for the low probability (ordinary symbol normal state), 218 values of “5 to 222” are defined as the determination values for the normal symbol (FIG. 11A). )reference). Here, the second random number counter C4 is configured by a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 239. Of the 240 values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, there are 218 determination values that are winning, so in the normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol (second symbol) is about 91% (approximately 1 / 1.1).

  Further, “0 to 239” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 11A). That is, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit by all the values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 (the ball is determined to be 100% normal symbol by passing through the normal entrance 67).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by winning the special symbol 2 in the “renso” state. It becomes easier to win the “probability jackpot D” set in the “state”. This “ream state” is basically a state in which the normal symbol shifts after a short period of time has elapsed, and is specifically a special symbol probabilistic state and a normal symbol normal state. In this “ream” state, the player launches a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in order to make a special symbol 2 lottery. May be frustrated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol is in a normal state, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is a high probability of 90% or higher. This makes it easier for the player to enter the second entrance 640 because the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is easily opened in the “ream” state, It is possible to suppress frustration. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol (second symbol) changes in time when it is in the “ream” state (1 second) and the electric accessory 640a. Is configured to be long (1 second × 3 times). Accordingly, since it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 in the “rengo state”, it is possible for the player to play the game without stress during the “renja state”. .

  Returning to FIG. 7A, the description will be continued. The special figure variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11B) displays the determination value of the first variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation effect (variation pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. It is a data table prescribed | regulated for every aspect. Details of the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 11B and FIG.

  FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an outline of the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 11B, the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d is composed of three types of data tables. That is, it is composed of a special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1, a special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2, and a common probability change non-short time selection table 202d3.

  The special symbol 1 normal / probability change time selection table 202d1 includes the special symbol 1 in the low probability state (normal) of the special symbol, or the high probability state (probability change) of the special symbol, and the short time state (short time) of the normal symbol. It is a data table referred when lottery is performed. The special symbol 2 normal / probability change time selection table 202d2 is a special symbol in a low probability state (normal) of a special symbol, or a high probability state (probability change) of a special symbol, and in a short time state (short time) of a normal symbol. It is a data table referred when the lottery of 2 is performed. Further, the common probability variable non-short time selection table 202d3 is a lottery of the special symbol 1 in the high probability state (probability variation) of the special symbol and in the normal state (non-short time) of the normal symbol (that is, in the “continuous state”). Or a data table that is referred to when either of the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed. Details of the three types of data tables will be described with reference to FIG.

  12A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-described special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1, and FIG. 12B is the specified contents of the special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2. FIG. 12 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the common probability variation non-short-time selection table 202d3. As shown in FIG. 12, the three types of tables are data tables that define the types of variation patterns that can be selected for each stop type in association with the value of the first variation type counter CS1.

  First, with reference to FIG. 12A, the specified contents of the special figure 1 normal / probability changing time selection table 202d1 will be described. In the special figure 1 normal / probability changing time selection table 202d1, the variation pattern type and the value of the first variation type counter CS1 are defined in association with each stop type that is completely out of reach, out of reach, or jackpot. Yes. Specifically, when the stop type is completely out of the range, if the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98”, “short out” having a variation time of 7 seconds is selected. On the other hand, if the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “99 to 198”, “out of long” with a variation time of 10 seconds is selected.

  When the stop type is out of reach and the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, “normal reach” with a variation time of 15 seconds is selected. If the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “150 to 198”, “super reach” with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected. That is, “normal reach” having a short variation time is more easily selected than “super reach” having a long variation time. This is because, if only a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected, the player's discouragement will increase due to the deviation, and the player's interest may be impaired. It is.

  If the stop type is “probable big hit A” or “probable big hit B”, and if the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98”, the “normal reach for probability variation” is 7 seconds. Is selected. If the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “99 to 198”, “super-reach for probability variation” with a variation time of 10 seconds is selected. That is, when “probable big hit A” or “probable big hit B” is selected, the variation pattern type for which the variation effect of the same variation time is executed as when the stop type is completely out of the selection is selected.

  Although details will be described later, the variation pattern type selected by the main control device 110 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command. Based on the variation pattern command, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 performs the same display effect as “short deviation” having the same variation time when the variation pattern type is “normal reach for probability variation big hit A”. To control. In addition, when the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is “probable big hit super reach”, control is performed such that the same display effect as “out of long” having the same variation time is executed. This makes it difficult for the player to determine from the display effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 that it has become “probable big hit A” or “probable big hit B” for which it is difficult to obtain a winning ball. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed without obtaining a prize ball even though the jackpot is notified by the display effect. In addition, when “probable big hit A” or “probable big hit B” is reached, an effect as if the variable effect continues is executed as the display effect during the big hit. That is, the appearance of the display effect is configured so as not to be different from the normal time. Thereby, by winning “probability big hit A”, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the short time period has been reset. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player feels that the short period of time that the player has consumed is wasted, and that the player's motivation for the game is reduced.

  When the stop type is “ordinary big hit A” and the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98”, “normal reach for normal hit” with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is selected. Further, if the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “99 to 198”, “normal hit super reach” with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected. As described above, when selecting a variation pattern corresponding to “normal jackpot A” in which a winning ball can be easily obtained, a variation pattern type having a long variation time is easily selected as compared with a case where the stop type is “out of reach”. Thereby, when the player recognizes that the variation pattern type has a long variation time, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for obtaining a prize ball. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12B, the specified contents of the special figure 2 normal / probability changing time selection table 202d2 will be described. In the special figure 2 normal / probability changing time selection table 202d2, the variation pattern type that can be selected when the stop type is “completely out” is only “extra-long out” with a variation time of 300 seconds (5 minutes). That is, in the range where the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 198” (that is, all the values that the first variation type counter CS1 can take), “extra-long deviation” is selected.

  Further, when the stop type is “reach out”, the only variation pattern that can be selected is “out super long reach” with a variation time of 300 seconds. Further, when the stop type is “various jackpots”, only “hit super long reach” with a variation time of 300 seconds is selected. That is, if the special symbol 2 is executed in the low probability state (normal) of the special symbol, the high probability state (probability variation) of the special symbol, and the short time state (short time) of the normal symbol, the lottery result Regardless, the variation pattern type with a variation time of 300 seconds is selected.

  In this way, by configuring such that an extremely long variation pattern type is selected, once variation starts, it is disadvantageous that a special symbol lottery cannot be received for a long time until the variation ends. Since it can be in a state, the player can enter the second in a state other than the “ream state” (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a special symbol, and a short time state of a normal symbol). It is possible to make the user feel that the ball should not be hit at the ball opening 640. Therefore, the player is aimed at the first entrance 64 in a state other than the “ream state”, and the player aims at the second entrance 640 in the “ream state”. Can be launched. Since this pachinko machine 10 is designed assuming that only a special symbol 1 lottery is performed in a state other than the “renso state”, and only a special symbol 2 lottery is performed in the “renso state”. By preventing (suppressing) the player from aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state, the exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be brought close to the design value. Therefore, when a hall | hole performs sales prediction etc. from the design value of a payout rate, it can calculate more correctly.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the second entrance 640 from aiming and launching a ball in a state other than the “continuous state”, there are a plurality of other configurations. Is provided. For example, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the variation time of the normal symbol becomes extremely long (3 to 5 minutes) in a state other than the “continuous state”. Further, the opening period in which the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit is set to a short time (0.2 seconds × 1 time). As a result, even if it is possible to enter the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a is hardly opened (released at a frequency of 0.2 seconds in a few minutes). It is possible to prevent the player from launching a ball toward the second entrance 640 provided on the downstream side thereof.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the detour accessory 700 is provided on the upstream side of the second entrance 640, the ball reaches the second entrance 640 after launching the ball. It takes 7 or more hours to complete. Therefore, even if a ball is launched after recognizing that the electric accessory 640a is opened, the electric accessory 640a is closed before the ball reaches the second entrance 640 (0.2 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream state”.

  In addition, as described above, even if a ball can be entered into the second entrance 640, if the special symbol is changing, entering the second entrance 640 will hold the entrance. It is destroyed without That is, in a state other than the “ream” state, the fluctuation time becomes extremely long, and even if a ball is entered into the second entrance 640 during the fluctuation, a special symbol is based on the entry. No 2 lottery will be held. Therefore, in order to receive the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is necessary to make the ball enter the second entrance 640 again after the variation effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 is completed. In a state other than the “rengo” state, the variation pattern type of the variation time of 300 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol 2, so that the lottery can be received only every 300 seconds at the shortest. Accordingly, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated, so that it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “rendezvous state”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with various configurations that are disadvantageous to the player when the player enters the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state. As a result, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed even if it is not in the “ream” state, and it is prevented (suppressed) that a lot of prize balls are won by the player by winning the “probable big hit D”. it can.

  When a special symbol 2 lottery is performed in a state other than the “renso” state, a ball is launched aiming at the first entrance 64 in a 300-second variation effect performed based on the lottery. An effect of warning may be performed. This allows a player who is aiming at the second entrance 640 to quit the game method aimed at the second entrance 640 even though it is not in the “ream” state. . Also, by displaying a warning effect, the hall clerk is playing a game method different from normal (the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state). A player can be easily identified. Therefore, even if the player ignores the warning effect and continues the game method different from the normal one, the clerk of the hall who has confirmed the warning effect can directly pay attention. Therefore, it is possible to more surely suppress the gaming method of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream state”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12C, the specified contents of the common probability variation non-short time selection table 202d3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 12C, the variation pattern type that can be selected when the stop type is “completely out” is only “out” with a variation time of 1 second. That is, “out” is selected in the range where the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 198” (that is, all the values that the first variation type counter CS1 can take). Also, the variation pattern type that can be selected when the stop type is “reach out” is only “probability non-short-time use out normal reach” with a variation time of 2 seconds.

  Further, when the stop type is “various jackpots”, “normal reach per probability variation non-shortening use” with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected in the range of the value of the first variation type counter CS1 from “0 to 179”. On the other hand, in the range where the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is “180 to 198”, “super-reach per probability variation non-shortening” with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected.

  In this way, in the high probability state (probability change) of the special symbol and the normal state (non-temporal state) of the normal symbol (that is, in the “rengo state”), the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is selected. When executed, a variation pattern type having a relatively short variation time (1 to 5 seconds) is selected. This is because it is assumed that the player launches a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 where the entry is not suspended in the “ream” state. That is, by configuring so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the variation. Therefore, when the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the fluctuation, it makes the player feel that the lottery of the special symbol 2 has been wasted, and makes the player feel dissatisfied. Can be suppressed. Accordingly, the “ream” state that is advantageous to the player can be enjoyed without stress, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The variation time set in each state is not limited to the contents defined in FIGS. 12A to 12C, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the special figure 2 normal / probability change time selection table 202d2, a change effect (change pattern) having a longer change time such as 1 hour or 5 hours may be selected. As a result, even if it becomes a “probable big hit D” in which a lot of prize balls can be obtained by a lottery of the special symbol 2 in a state other than the “ream” state, the time until the lottery result is obtained is very long. can do. In other words, when performing a game method different from normal, the game efficiency can be extremely deteriorated, so even if a large amount of prize balls can be obtained when it becomes “probable big hit D”, You can make it feel that it is not worth it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game method that is different from the normal one. Further, for example, in the common probability variation non-short-time selection table 202d3, it may be configured such that only the variation pattern type of the variation time of 1 second is associated with all the variation types. Thereby, it can suppress more that a ball | bowl enters into the 2nd entrance 640 during the variation | production effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2, and that the thrown-in is discarded.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The normal variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 13A) displays the determination value of the second variation type counter CS2 for determining the display mode of the variation effect (variation pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol. It is a data table prescribed | regulated for every aspect. That is, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the normal symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on is defined. Note that the fluctuation time is the period when the “○” symbol and “×” symbol are alternately lit, and the stop symbol (“○” symbol for normal symbols, “x” symbol for off-time symbols). It means the total with the period when the symbol is stopped. Details of the normal variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 13A is a diagram showing an outline of the common map variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 13 (a), the common map variation pattern selection table 202e is composed of two types of data tables. In other words, it is composed of a normal map / probability changing time selection table 202e1 and a common figure changing / non-short time selection table 202e2.

  First, with reference to FIG. 13 (b), description will be given of the specified contents of the normal / normal change time selection table 202e1. In the normal figure normal / probability change time selection table 202e1, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 are defined in association with each number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Yes. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for entering the normal entrance 67 is 0, if the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the variation time is 180 seconds ( 3 minutes) variation pattern is selected. On the other hand, if the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “50 to 149”, a variation pattern with a variation time of 240 seconds (4 minutes) is selected, and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is “150 to In the range of “198”, a variation pattern having a variation time of 300 seconds (5 minutes) is selected.

  In this way, when the number of reserved balls is 0, a very long variation pattern of 3 to 5 minutes is selected, so that the second entrance 640 (and the normal entrance 67 on the upstream side) You can make it feel like you're losing when you aim. This is because the electric symbol 640a is not released during the variation of the normal symbol, so that the special symbol 2 cannot be drawn. Therefore, in a low probability state (normal) of a special symbol, a high probability state (probability change) of a special symbol, and a short time state (short time) of a normal symbol (that is, in a state other than the “long villa state”), the player It is possible to launch a ball aiming at the first entrance 64.

  In addition, since a plurality of types of variation times (3 minutes, 4 minutes, and 5 minutes) can be selected, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the regular symbol variation time ends. Therefore, in a state other than the “rengo state”, it is possible to prevent the player from launching a ball in anticipation of the timing at which the normal symbol fluctuation time ends (the timing at which the electric accessory 640a may be released) ( Suppression).

  In the present embodiment, the “O” symbol and the “X” symbol are simply changed alternately while the normal symbol (second symbol) is changing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time for switching from the “O” symbol to the “X” symbol and the time for switching from the “X” symbol to the “O” symbol may be changed randomly. As a result, during the change, the period from when the “○” symbol is displayed until it is switched to the “×” symbol becomes longer, and when the “○” symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. Can be difficult to distinguish (it can be difficult to determine whether or not it has been confirmed by the displayed symbol). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from striking the ball aiming at the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a in a state other than the “long-run state”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), when the number of reserved balls for entering the normal entrance 67 is 1 to 4, the variation varies regardless of the value of the second variation type counter CS2. A variation pattern with a time of 0.2 seconds is selected. That is, when the number of reserved balls starts to change when the number of held balls is 0, and the ball entering the normal symbol 67 is held during the change, the variation effect started when the number of held balls is set to 0 is short. The variation effect and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a are repeated during the period. And when a reservation ball | bowl is digested and a reservation becomes a state of 0, it is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation effect for 3 to 5 minutes may be performed again. This operation will be described in more detail. In the following description, the normal symbol time-short state (that is, the probability of winning the normal symbol is 100%) is assumed. That is, the description will be made on the assumption that the electric accessory 640a is always opened once for 0.2 seconds after the normal symbol variation effect. This is because the short time state of a normal symbol is a state in which the player stays for the longest time in the game.

  When a ball enters the normal entrance 67 in a state where the number of reserved balls with respect to the entrance to the normal entrance 67 is 0, a variation effect (variation pattern effect) of 3 to 5 minutes is executed. When a ball enters the normal entrance 67 during execution of this variation effect, the entrance is suspended up to four times. Here, it is assumed that the number of reserved balls becomes 4 during the fluctuation period. Since a variation pattern of a variation time of at least 3 minutes is set, if a player strikes a ball aiming at the normal entrance 67, the ball can easily enter the normal entrance 67 four times or more. This is because it can.

  When the variation period of the variation effect started when the number of reserved balls for entering the normal entrance 67 is 0, the electric accessory 640a is opened for 0.2 seconds and then closed. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is closed, a variation effect corresponding to the first reserved ball is started. Since the number of reserved balls is three at the time of starting this variation effect, the variation effect with a variation time of 0.2 seconds is executed, and the electric accessory 640a is released for 0.2 seconds. Similarly, with respect to the second holding ball and the third holding ball, the electric accessory 640 is released for 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation effect having the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds.

  Further, when the variation effect corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is executed, if the number of reserved balls is 0, the variation effect of 3 to 5 minutes is selected. Further, if a new holding ball is generated, a changing effect with a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds is executed, and when the holding ball becomes 0, a changing effect is executed for 3 to 5 minutes. And when a new entry to the normal entrance 67 is put on hold during the 3 to 5 minute variation production, the electric combination 640a is released for 0.2 seconds after the variation production is completed as described above. And the variation effect for 0.2 seconds is repeated.

  It should be noted that the time from the end of the first variation effect (the variation effect started when the number of reserved balls is 0) to the start of the variable effect corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is Since it is about 1.4 seconds (opening of the electric accessory 640a × 4 times + 0.2 seconds fluctuation × 3 times), a new holding ball is created at the time when the variation effect corresponding to the fourth holding ball is executed. The number is about two at most. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, there is a limit on the launch interval of the sphere, and it is configured so that only 100 spheres can be ejected per minute (that is, after firing one sphere, This is because only two balls can be launched in 1.4 seconds since the interval until the next ball is fired is 0.6 seconds or more).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the low probability state (normal) of the special symbol, the high probability state (probability variation) of the special symbol, and the short time state (short time) of the normal symbol (that is, “ When a ball is entered into the normal entrance 67 in a state other than the “ream villa state”, the normal entrance 67 put on hold during the change effect is executed after the change effect of a long change time is executed. The opening of the electric accessory 640a for 0.2 seconds and the fluctuation effect for 0.2 seconds are repeated as many times as the number of times the player enters the ball. That is, when the variation effect of the long variation time is completed, the opening of the electric accessory 640a and the variation effect corresponding to the reserved ball are repeated in about 1 second. Then, a variation effect with a long variation time is executed again.

  By executing the fluctuation corresponding to the entry to the normal entry hole 67 that has been put on hold in a short period (around 1 second), the electric accessory 640a is released based on the end of the fluctuation effect of the long fluctuation time. Even if the player launches the ball after confirming that the ball has reached the second entrance 640, a short fluctuation time (0.2 seconds) and after the fluctuation The opening of the electric accessory 640a can be terminated. This is because it takes 7 seconds or more to reach the second entrance 640 after launching the ball by passing the detour accessory 700. In addition, as described above, when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed in a state other than the “renso” state, a variation effect with a variation time of 300 seconds (5 minutes) is set regardless of the lottery result. It is comprised so that. Thereby, even if the ball can be entered into the second entrance 640, the fluctuating effect continues for 5 minutes. Moreover, since the entrance to the 2nd entrance 640 is not suspended, the lottery of the next special symbol 2 cannot be executed until the fluctuation for at least 5 minutes is completed.

  In this way, in a state other than the “ream” state, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes long, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit becomes short, so the second entry It becomes difficult to enter the mouth. In addition, since the time required for the ball to reach the second entrance 640 by the detour bonus 700 is increased, even if the normal symbol lottery is suspended, the variation of the normal symbol is completed. Even if the player launches a ball after the electric combination 640a is opened, it is difficult for the ball to reach the second entrance 640 while the electric combination 640a is opened. Further, even if the ball can be entered into the second entrance 640, the lottery time is long (it takes a long time until the lottery result is obtained), so that it becomes difficult to execute the lottery of the special symbol 2. Since these are related to each other, it is extremely disadvantageous for the player to hit the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state. Therefore, in a state other than the “rensou state”, the player can hit the ball aiming at the first entrance 64. Therefore, the ball exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be brought close to the design value.

  Next, with reference to FIG.13 (c), the prescription | regulation content of the selection table 202e2 for universal figure change non-shortening is demonstrated. Similarly to the normal figure normal / probability changing time selection table 202e1, the normal figure probability variable non-short time selection table 202e2 also changes the normal symbol (second symbol) variation time and the second variation type for each number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. The value of the counter CS2 is defined in association with it. As shown in FIG. 13 (c), in the universal figure probability variation non-short time selection table 202e2, a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected regardless of the number of held balls and the value of the second variation type counter CS2. It is configured. In addition, as described above, in the high probability state (probability change) of the special symbol to which this data table is referenced, and in the normal state (non-short time) of the normal symbol (that is, in the “continuous state”), the electric accessory 640a Since the opening time of the battery becomes longer (1 second × 3 times), the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is opened is significantly increased. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Furthermore, in this embodiment, each entrance is arranged so that the time until the ball that has passed through the normal entrance 67 reaches the second entrance 640 is about 1.2 seconds. Yes. As a result, in the “renso” state, the variation effect executed by entering the normal entrance 67 ends, and the timing of the variation effect is triggered when the electric accessory 640a is released. A ball (that is, a ball that has entered the normal entrance 67) is configured to reach the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the second entrance 640 to enter the ball in the “ream” state.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The state setting table 202f is a data table that is referred to in order to set a state after the end of the jackpot after the end of various jackpots. The state setting table 202f includes a special symbol state (whether the special symbol has a high probability state or a low probability state) after the jackpot is finished, a normal symbol state (a short time period of the normal symbol, and an electric role). An opening period of the object 640a) and a set fluctuation pattern table (which table is selected from the special figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202d) are defined at least.

  The state setting table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, “ordinary jackpot A” and “ordinary jackpot B” are associated with a “special symbol low probability state” as a special symbol state. Further, as the state of the normal symbol, “normal state of normal symbol” (ordinary symbol short time period 0 times) is associated, and a state in which the fluctuation time is long and the opening time of the electric accessory 640 a is short is associated. (That is, it is set so that the normal / probable change time reduction selection table 202e1 is selected). Further, as a table to be referred to for selecting the variation pattern type, a special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 and a special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2 are associated. Furthermore, “off” is associated as the state of the advantageous state flag 203i.

  Therefore, at the end of the “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B”, the state setting table 202f is referred to, and the special symbol is set to the low probability state (the probability variation flag 203f is turned off), and the normal symbol normal state ( The value of the hour / medium counter 203g is set to 0), and the fluctuation pattern tables to be selected after the end of the jackpot are set in the special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 and the special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2. The advantageous state flag 203i is set to “off”.

  On the other hand, “high probability state of special symbol” is associated with “probability big hit A1” as a special symbol state. In addition, as the state of the normal symbol, the “short time state of the normal symbol” with one short time period is associated, and the state in which the fluctuation time is long and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is short (that is, Normal table / normal change time selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 13B) is set to be selected). Further, as a table to be referred to in order to select a variation pattern type, a special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 12A) and a special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2 (FIG. 12). (B) is associated. Further, based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is performed once (based on the end of the short time period of the normal symbol), the common probability variable non-short time selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 12C) is selected. Is set as follows. As a result, when the special symbol 2 is drawn after the short time period (once) of the normal symbol is finished, the variation pattern type having a short variation time (1 to 5 seconds) can be selected. it can. Therefore, since the lottery of the special symbol 2 is smoothly performed during the “renso” state, the “renso” state game can be performed without causing the player to feel stress.

  Therefore, at the end of “probability big hit A1”, this state setting table 202f is referred to, a special symbol is set to a high probability state (probability variable flag 203f is turned on), and a short time period (short time) of a normal symbol with one short time period. The value of the intermediate counter 203g is set to 1), and as the variation pattern table selected after the big hit, the special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 and the special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2 are set. The value of the advantageous state flag 203i is set to “off”.

  It should be noted that the “probability variation jackpot A2” to “probability variation jackpot A64” and “probability variation jackpot C” are also associated with other data that is associated only with a different number of times as a short time period of the normal symbol. Is the same as “Probability jackpot A1”.

  “Probability variation jackpot B” and “probability variation jackpot D” are associated with “high probability state of special symbol” as the state of the special symbol. In addition, as the state of the normal symbol, “normal state of normal symbol” (normal symbol short time period 0 times) is associated, and a state in which the fluctuation time is short and the open time of the electric accessory 640a is associated. (That is, it is set so that the common figure change / non-short-time selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 13C) is selected). In addition, a common probability variation non-short-time selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 12C) is associated as a table to be referenced for selecting the variation pattern type.

  Therefore, at the end of “probability big hit B” or “probability big hit D”, this state setting table 202f is referred to, and the special symbol is set to a high probability state (probability variation flag 203f is turned on), and the normal state of the normal symbol ( The value of the hour / short counter 203g is set to 0), the variation pattern table selected after the jackpot is finished is set to the common probability variation non-short time selection table 202d3, and the advantageous state flag 203i is set to “ON”.

  “Probability big hit C1” is associated with “high probability state of special symbol” as the state of the special symbol. In addition, as a state of the normal symbol, a “short time state of the normal symbol” having a short time period of 10 times is associated with a state in which the variation time is long and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is short (that is, Normal table / normal change time selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 13B) is set to be selected). Further, as a table to be referred to in order to select a variation pattern type, a special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 12A) and a special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2 (FIG. 12). (B) is associated. Further, the common probability variable non-short time selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 12C) is selected based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times (based on the end of the normal symbol time-short period). Is set as follows. As a result, when the special symbol 2 is drawn after the short time period of the normal symbol is finished, the variation pattern type having a short variation time (1 to 5 seconds) can be selected. Therefore, since the lottery of the special symbol 2 is smoothly performed during the “renso” state, the “renso” state game can be performed without causing the player to feel stress.

  Therefore, at the end of “probability big hit C1”, this state setting table 202f is referred to, a special symbol high probability state (probability variable flag 203f is set to ON), and a normal symbol time reduction state (time reduction) with 10 time reduction periods. The value of the intermediate counter 203g is set to 10), and the fluctuation pattern table selected after the jackpot is set in the special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 and the special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2. The value of the advantageous state flag 203i is set to “off”.

  Note that “probability variation jackpot C2” to “probability variation jackpot C6” are merely associated with different numbers of short time periods of normal symbols, and the other data associated with them is “probability variation jackpot C1”. Are the same.

  As described above, since the setting for each jackpot type is defined in the state setting table 202f, setting of various states (described later) can be performed only by executing a simple process of reading the setting value from the state setting table 202f at the end of the jackpot. Setting of the probability variation flag 203f, the hour / medium counter 203g, the advantageous state flag 203i, etc.) can be accurately performed.

  Next, how the gaming state changes during the actual game by setting the state after the jackpot based on the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG. .

  FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the transition conditions to other states for each state that the pachinko machine 10 can take in the present embodiment. First, the “normal state” (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) that is set when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized when the power is turned on will be described. The “normal state” is shown on the upper side of FIG. As shown in FIG. 15, in order to shift from this “normal state” to another state, it is necessary to win a special symbol. As described above, the probability that the special symbol is a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1 / 37.5.

  When the special symbol is a jackpot, the state of transition after the jackpot is different according to the jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 15, in the low probability state of the special symbol, when it becomes the “ordinary jackpot A” that is won in 5% of the case where the big symbol is won by the lottery of the special symbol 1, the special game state with one round is After being assigned, the state again shifts to the normal state (see the upper left side of FIG. 15). Although it is possible to obtain a prize ball, the player shifts again to the “normal state” which is difficult to be in the “ream” state, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  In addition, if it becomes “probable jackpot B”, which is won in 5% of the case where it is a jackpot due to the special symbol 1 lottery, after the special game state with 4 rounds is given, It shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol (see the upper right side of FIG. 15). As described above, this “ream” state is advantageous to the player because it is likely to be a “probable big hit D” in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. As described above, when “probability big hit B” is reached, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened only for a maximum of 0.2 seconds in each round, making it difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball. .

  Also, when the special symbol 1 lottery results in a “probable bonus jackpot A” (any of “probable jackpot A1” to “probable jackpot A64”), after a special game state with 4 rounds is given, The state shifts to a “probability short state” (a high probability state of a special symbol and a short state of a normal symbol) (see the upper center in FIG. 15). As described above, the number of times corresponding to the jackpot type is set for the short time period of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A). In “normal state”, “probable jackpot B” could not be entered unless “winning promising jackpot B” was won. Even when the time saving state ends, the state shifts to the “village state”, and therefore, the shift to the “village state” is easier than the “normal state”. Therefore, the shift to the “probability change short state” is advantageous to the player over the “normal state”. As described above, when “probability big hit A” is reached, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened only for a maximum of 0.2 seconds in each round, making it difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball. .

  As described above, the “normal state” is a state in which it is difficult to shift to the “continuous state” and is the most disadvantageous state for the player. As described above, the normal state shifts when the initial setting is performed (set to the initial state) when the power is turned on. For example, when the hall newly introduces the pachinko machine 10 (the pachinko machine in the initial state) 10 is installed), all the introduced pachinko machines 10 can be started from a normal state which is disadvantageous for the player. That is, it is possible to prevent starting from a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall by starting all pachinko machines 10 from an advantageous state when the hall is opened.

  In addition, the “normal state” is a state in which it is difficult to shift to the “continuous state”, but if it is a promising big hit B when it is a big hit, the “long state” is not passed through a short time period of normal symbols. Can be moved to. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with the expectation that the player will directly shift to the “ream” state by winning the probability variation jackpot B, so that motivation for the game can be maintained.

  Next, the “probability short time state” (high probability state of a special symbol and the short time state of a normal symbol) shown in the center part of FIG. 15 will be described. As shown in the center part of FIG. 15, in order to shift from this “probability short time state” to another state, a special symbol jackpot or a normal symbol transitioning after the end of “probability jackpot A” It is necessary to digest a short period (digest the prescribed number of times). As described above, the probability of winning the special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/30.

  First, in the “probability change short state”, when “probability change jackpot A” is won in 90% of the big win in the special symbol 1 lottery, the “probability change short state” will be entered after the jackpot ends in the same way as the “normal state”. (See the center left side of FIG. 15). In other words, the same state (“probability change short state”) is looped. Even if “probable jackpot A” is won, it is difficult for the player to get a prize ball, so if you continue to win “probable jackpot A” (continue to loop “probability short-time state”), it will be disadvantageous for the player. Become.

  Further, when “normal jackpot A” is won in 5% of the case where the special symbol 1 is won, the game shifts to the “normal state” after the jackpot ends (see the lower left part of the center in FIG. 15). That is, it becomes a disadvantageous state after the jackpot ends. And if it becomes “probable big hit B”, which is won in 5% of the big win in the special symbol 1 lottery, it shifts to the “resort state” after the jackpot ends (see the lower center of FIG. 15) ). As described above, this “renso” state is advantageous to the player because it is easy to win the “probability big hit D” that can obtain a large amount of prize balls.

  Furthermore, before the special symbol is a big hit, when the short-time state of the normal symbol is finished (if the special symbol is continuously out of the special time for a set short-time period), it will become the “adult state” that is most advantageous for the player. Transition (refer to the center right side of FIG. 15).

  Next, the “continuous state” shown in the lower part of FIG. 15 (a high probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 15, in order to shift from this “village state” to another state, it is necessary to win a special symbol. As described above, the probability of winning the special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/30.

  In “Landou State”, when “Normal Bonus B” is won in 5% of the case where a big win is won by lottery of Special Symbol 2, the game shifts to “Normal State” after a special game state of 1 round is given. (Refer to the lower left side of FIG. 15). In other words, the “rendezvous state” advantageous to the player is ended, and the player is disadvantaged (“normal state”).

  In addition, when it becomes “probability big hit C”, which is won in 5% of the case where it is a big win by the special symbol 2 lottery, after the special game state of 1 round is given, it shifts to the “probability short time state” (FIG. 15). See bottom left). That is, in this case as well, the “rendezvous state” advantageous to the player ends, and the player is disadvantaged (“probable change time short state”). As described above, different values are set for the short time period of the normal symbol set after the end of the jackpot depending on the jackpot type (“probable variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6”) (FIG. 10A). reference).

  In addition, when the special symbol 2 lottery results in a “probable jackpot D”, which is won in 90% of the case where the jackpot is won, a special game state of four rounds is given, and then the state shifts again to the “rengo state” (see FIG. (See the lower right of 15). In other words, a “ream” state that is advantageous to the player loops. As described above, when “probability big hit D” is reached, the second specific prize opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed or 5 balls have won) in each round. A large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the “probable change time short state”, the normal symbol time-short state is terminated (by continuously falling out of the special symbol only for the set short-time period), It is possible to shift to the “ream” state. Therefore, as the special symbols are removed, the player can feel as if they are in the “ream” state, so the player has a novel gameplay that is different from general gaming machines. Can be provided. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, once in the “renso state”, 90% of the case where the jackpot is won, a large amount of prize balls can be acquired, and the “spanning state” is set again after the jackpot is finished. It becomes. That is, it becomes a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with the expectation that the player will shift to the “rengo state” and loop the “renja state” more times. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 16, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a first variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the random symbol counter C4 is used for the normal symbol lottery, the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the second variation is selected for the variation pattern selection. A type counter CS2 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 40). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the mouth 64, respectively. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 2 execution area 203b. The random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type according to the timing of entering the second entrance 640. Each value of the selection counter C3 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the two entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 40).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the random number counter C1 of the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, as described above, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability that a special symbol is a big hit from the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for probabilities (a period in which a special symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 7B). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 199), After reaching the maximum value (199), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed mode is the one when the special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per-random number counter C1, there are eight random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number values are “5, 52, 78, 119, 138, 201, 262, 291”. Is stored in the first random number table for low probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 8 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 37.5”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 249, 270” is a high probability. It is stored in the first random number table for time. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/30”.

  In this embodiment, the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first per random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first per random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. Then, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, according to the value of the first hit type counter C2, “normal big hit A”, “normal big hit B”, “probability big hit A1” to “probable big change”. Out of the 74 jackpot types of "Big jackpot A64", "Probable variation jackpot B", "Probability variation jackpot C1" to "Probability variation jackpot C6", "Probability variation jackpot D", one of the jackpot types is selected as a large value type for special figure 1 It is selected from the table 202b1 (see FIG. 8A) or the special type 2 hit type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 8B).

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching occurs, the “stop reach” (for example, the final stop symbol is disengaged) (for example, 90 to 99) and “stop completely” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not generate reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “outreach reach” becomes as narrow as 90 to 99, and it is difficult to select “outreach reach”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “out of reach” is as wide as 80 to 99, and “out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done.

  The first variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern type from the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11B). For example, the first variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example. After reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), it returns to 0. Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the first variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the first variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are displayed. It is determined. The value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 11A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit if it matches the value of the random number set in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11A). In addition, as described above, the second random number table 202c is used for a normal symbol with a low probability (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability that a normal symbol is more likely to be hit than the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for time (period in which the normal symbol is in a short time state), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 40).

  The second variation type counter CS2 is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern type from the ordinary variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 13A). For example, the second variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example. After reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), it returns to 0. The variation time of the variation effect indicating the normal symbol lottery result is determined by the second variation type counter CS2. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 16, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 40), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (see FIG. 39) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, The figure holding ball number counter 203e, the probability change flag 203f, the hour / short time counter 203g, the pre-reading probability change flag 203h, and the advantageous state flag 203i are provided.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter. Each value of C1, first hit type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when lottery of special symbol 1 is performed in main controller 110, each value of each counter C1-C3 stored in the reserved first area of special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  The special symbol 2 execution area 203b is a storage area for temporarily storing (storing) each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning). Based on the counter values stored in the special symbol 2 execution area 203b, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed. In addition, since the entrance to the 2nd entrance 640 is not reserved as mentioned above, unlike the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, the reservation area is not provided.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding number 1). Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. As in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in other reserved areas are stored. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (the third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance into the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. 1 is added (see S404 in FIG. 34). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 32).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 32 and S405 in FIG. 34). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, it is possible to correct the deviation by the next reserved ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and displays a hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls whenever the number of held balls changes. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 36).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S703 in FIG. 37: No).

  The probability variation flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the probability variation flag 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. If the value of the probability variation flag 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (the low probability state of the special symbol). The initial state of the probability variation flag 203f is set to off, a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and the probability variation flag 203f is set to on at the end of any one of “probability variation big hit A” to “probability variation big hit D”. The Further, it is set to OFF when “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B” ends.

  When the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 33) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process, the state of the probability variation flag 203f is referred to. If the state is ON, the special symbol 1f random number table (see FIG. 7B) for high probability is used. On the other hand, if the state of the probability variation flag 203f is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the low probability first random number table (see FIG. 7B) (S303 in FIG. 33). , S304). Similarly, in the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 35), if the probability variation flag 203f is turned on, the special symbol 2 based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 7B) is used. On the other hand, if the state of the probability variation flag 203f is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the low probability first random number table (see FIG. 7B) (S507 in FIG. 35). , S508).

  The hour / minute counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203g is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and when the “probable variation jackpot A” or “probability variation jackpot C” ends, the jackpot type is determined. The corresponding value is set. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is finished until the value of the hour / minute counter 203g becomes 0 (S215 in FIG. 32).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the second random number table for high probability (see FIG. 11A). On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery 203g is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table (see FIG. 11 (a)) for low probability. A lottery is performed (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 36).

  The pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is used when the pachinko machine 10 pre-reads the lottery result of the special symbol based on the winning data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired according to the start winning. Whether the winning data should be analyzed as being in a probable state (high probability state of special symbol), or the winning data is analyzed as if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbol (low probability state of special symbol) It is a flag that indicates what should be done.

  When the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is on, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched. On the other hand, when the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is off, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. The pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is initialized to OFF when the RAM is initially set (see S915 in FIG. 39), and it is determined that the prefetched lottery results are “probability big hit A” to “probable big hit D”. (See S410 in FIG. 34 and S513 in FIG. 35). Each time the pre-read lottery result is determined to be “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B”, the lottery result is set to OFF (see S411 in FIG. 34 and S514 in FIG. 35).

  If the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is turned on when the pre-reading of the lottery in the special symbol is performed, the first per random number table for the high probability time, the stop type selection table for the high probability time, and the first per hit Each table of the type selection table is compared with winning data acquired according to the start winning. On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is OFF, the first per-random number table for the low probability time, the stop type selection table for the low probability time, and the first per-type selection table, and the start winning prize Are compared with the winning data obtained.

  The advantageous state flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the above-described “long-run state” is most advantageous for the player. A table corresponding to the gaming state is selected from the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d and the normal figure variation pattern selection table 202e in accordance with the state of the advantageous state flag 203i. This advantageous state flag 203i is turned on when the state is in the “ream” state (that is, when the short time period set after the end of the jackpot ends, and when the “probable variation jackpot B” or “probability variation jackpot D” ends). (See S217 in FIG. 32). Further, it is set to OFF at the end of “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B”, “probable variation jackpot A”, and “probability variation jackpot C” that do not become the “ream” state after the jackpot ends.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a, a back setting table 222b, and a continuous notice determination table 222c. The variation pattern table 222a is a data table for setting a detailed aspect of the variation effect based on the rough variation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 by the variation pattern command. In this variation pattern table 222a, variation effect modes corresponding to all variation pattern types that can be notified by the variation pattern command are defined.

  The back setting table 222b is a data table referred to for setting a back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, seven types of rear surfaces A to G are selectable, and according to the set type of the rear surface, whether the state is in the “village state”. It is configured to indicate whether or not, the remaining short time period, etc.

  The rear surface A is a rear image (wilderness stage) in which wilderness is displayed on the rear surface (see FIG. 23A). This back A is a back type that is likely to be set when the short time period of the normal symbol is 20 or more or when the special symbol has a low probability state. The back B is a back image (river stage) in which a river is displayed on the back, and is a back type that is easily set when the short time period of the normal symbol is less than 20 (see FIG. 23B). The back C is a back image (forest stage) in which forest is displayed on the back, and is a back type that is easily set when the short time period of the normal symbol is less than 10 times (see FIG. 24A). . Further, the back D is a back image (cave stage) in which a cave is displayed on the back, and is a back surface type set in the case of a “village state” (see FIG. 27A).

  The back E to the back G are used to indicate to the player that the short period of the normal symbol may end (that is, when there is a possibility of transition to the “long-story state”). The rear type (ceiling notification stage) (see FIG. 26A). The back E to the back G are set when the short time period of the normal symbol ends with the backs A to C being set, respectively.

  In this way, the player can be made to predict the state from the back image by changing the back surface type according to the state and the remaining time in a short time. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, details of the back setting table 222b will be described with reference to FIGS. The back surface setting table 202b is a data table in which each of the above-described back surface types is defined in association with a value of a ceiling number counter 223e described later and a value of a back surface determination counter 223h. When the special symbol lottery is executed or when the jackpot ends, it is determined whether or not to change the back surface type with reference to the back surface setting table 222b. Although the details will be described later, the ceiling number counter 223e is a counter that counts the remaining short time period, and the back surface determination counter 223h is 0 to 127 each time the main process (see FIG. 44) is executed by the MPU 221. It is a loop counter updated in the range of.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the back setting table 222b is composed of six types of data tables with different prescribed contents. Specifically, the back A time setting table 222b1 referred to when the back A is set, the back B time setting table 222b2 referred to when the back B is set, and the back C are set. Based on the fact that the rear C time setting table 222b3 that is referred to when the time period is short, the notification time setting table 222b4 for switching to the rear surface that notifies that fact, and a big hit In addition, the ceiling reset time setting table 222b5 that is referred to when the short time period of the normal symbol is reset and the back surface (rear surface EG) that suggests the end of the short time period have been set, but the short time period has not ended. And a notification back side setting table 222b6 referred to in the case (when the change of the back side is a fake).

  First, with reference to FIG. 17B, the back A setting table 222b1, which is one of the data tables constituting the back setting table 222b, will be described. As described above, this back A time setting table 222b1 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change the back surface type when the back surface A (wilderness stage) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 10 in the back A hour setting table 222b1, the back side A (wilderness stage) is in the range of “0 to 13” of the back determination counter 223h. ) Are associated. Further, the back C is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “14 to 127”. That is, when the remaining short time period is 10 times with the back surface A, if the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is in the range of “14 to 127”, the back surface type is changed to the back surface C, and the back surface determination counter 223h If the value is in the range of “0 to 13”, the back surface type remains unchanged as the back surface A. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that can be taken by the ceiling number counter 223e, the value corresponding to the change to the back surface C is 114 that is "14 to 127". The probability of changing to C is about 89% (114/128).

  When the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 20, the back A (wilderness stage) is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “0 to 13”. Further, the back B is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “14 to 127”. That is, when the remaining short time period is 20 times with the back surface A, if the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is in the range of “14 to 127”, the back surface type is changed to the back surface B, and the back surface determination counter 223h If the value is in the range of “0 to 13”, the back surface type remains unchanged as the back surface A. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that the ceiling number counter 223e can take, the value corresponding to the change to the back surface B is 114 that is “14 to 127”. The probability of changing to B is about 89% (114/128).

  Furthermore, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 to 99, the back surface A (wilderness stage) is associated with the range where the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is “0 to 125”. Further, the back surface B is associated with the value “126” of the back surface determination counter 223h. Then, the rear surface C is associated with the value “127” of the rear surface determination counter 223h. Of the 128 values 0 to 127 that the ceiling number counter 223e can take, only one value is changed to the back surface B and only one value is changed to the back surface C. Therefore, the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is In the case of 21 or more, the probability of changing to back B and back C is about 0.8% (1/128), respectively.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 9 times or less and in the range of 11 times to 19 times, the back image is not changed regardless of the value of the back surface determination counter 223h (back surface A It is configured so that it will remain.

  Further, the selection method of the back surface type in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is the same as the case where the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 to 99. That is, the back surface B is associated with the value “126” of the back surface determination counter 223h, and the back surface C is associated with the value “127” of the back surface determination counter 223h. Thereby, it can be made difficult to determine from the effect whether the current state is the “normal state” or the state in which the short time period of the normal symbol remains 21 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the “normal state” is the most disadvantageous for the player, and to quit the game at that time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is improved. Can do.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e becomes 20 (that is, when the remaining short time period becomes 20 times), the ceiling number counter 223e is easily changed to the back surface B. When the value of 10 becomes 10 (that is, when the remaining short time period becomes 10 times), the rear surface B is easily changed. Further, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 or more (when the remaining short time period is 21 or more), it is difficult to change to another back surface type. Thereby, since it is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining short time period is likely to be 20 times by changing to the back B, the special symbol lottery will be performed after the back is changed. The game can be made to continue until at least 20 times. In addition, by changing to the back C, it can be recognized that there is a high possibility that the remaining short time period is 10 times, until the special symbol lottery is performed at least 10 times from the change of the back side You can make them want to continue playing. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17C, the back B time setting table 222b2, which is one of the data tables constituting the back setting table 222b, will be described. As described above, the rear B time setting table 222b2 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change the rear surface type when the rear surface B (river stage) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (c), when the value of the ceiling counter 223e is 10 in the back B time setting table 222b3, the back B (river stage) is within the range of “0 to 13” of the back determination counter 223h. ) Are associated. Further, the back C is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “14 to 127”. That is, when the remaining short time period of the back B is 10 times, if the value of the back determination counter 223h is in the range of “14 to 127”, the back type is changed to the back C, and the back determination counter 223h If the value is in the range of “0 to 13”, the back surface type remains the back surface B and is not changed. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that can be taken by the ceiling number counter 223e, the value corresponding to the change to the back surface C is 114 that is "14 to 127". The probability of changing to C is about 89% (114/128).

  On the other hand, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 to 99, the back surface A (wilderness stage) is associated with the range where the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is “0 to 13”. Further, the back B is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “14 to 126”. Then, the rear surface C is associated with the value “127” of the rear surface determination counter 223h. Of the 128 values 0 to 127 that the ceiling number counter 223e can take, the value that is changed to the back surface A is 14, so the value is changed to the back surface A when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 or more. The probability is about 11% (14/128). Further, since only one value is changed to the back C, the probability of changing to the back C when the value of the ceiling counter 223e is 21 or more is about 0.8% (1/128).

  Further, the selection method of the back surface type in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is the same as the case where the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 to 99. That is, the back A is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “0 to 13”, and the back C is associated with the value “127” of the back determination counter 223h. Thereby, it can be made difficult to determine from the effect whether the current state is the “normal state” or the state in which the short time period of the normal symbol remains 21 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the “normal state” is the most disadvantageous for the player, and to quit the game at that time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is improved. Can do.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e becomes 10 (that is, when the remaining short time period becomes 10 times), the back surface B is easily changed to the back surface C. Yes. Further, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 or more (when the remaining short time period is 21 or more), it is easily changed from the back B to the back A (about 11%). Thereby, even if the value of the ceiling number counter 222b1 is 21 to 99 on the back surface A, even if the value is changed to the back surface B, it can be changed to the back surface A again with a relatively short number of fluctuations. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the back surface B from being continued for a long time even though the short time period is 21 times or more. In other words, the longer the back surface B continues, the more likely the remaining short time period is within 20 times. Therefore, the remaining short time period can be predicted more accurately by making the player refer to the back surface.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18A, the back C time setting table 222b3, which is one of the data tables constituting the back setting table 222b, will be described. As described above, the back C time setting table 222b3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change the back surface type when the back surface C (forest stage) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 11 or more in the back C hour setting table 222b3, the back A (wilderness) is within the range of “0 to 26” of the back determination counter 223h. Stage). Further, the back C is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “27 to 127”. That is, when the remaining short time period is 11 times or more, the back surface type is changed to the back surface A in the range where the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is “0 to 26”, and the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is “27 to 127”. In the range of “”, the back surface type remains the back surface C and is not changed. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that can be taken by the ceiling number counter 223e, the value corresponding to the change to the back surface A is 27 from “0 to 26”, so the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 11 or more. The probability of changing to back A is about 21% (27/128).

  Further, the selection method of the back surface type in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is the same as the case where the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 11 to 99. That is, the back surface A is associated with the range of “0 to 26” of the back surface determination counter 223h, and the back surface C is associated with the range of “27 to 127” of the back surface determination counter 223h. This makes it difficult to determine from the effect whether the current state is the “normal state” or the state in which the short time period of the normal symbol remains 11 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the “normal state” is the most disadvantageous for the player, and to quit the game at that time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is improved. Can do.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 10 or less, the back surface C is not changed to another back surface type (back surface A or back surface B). Further, when the value of the changed ceiling number counter 223e is 11 or more (that is, when the remaining short time period becomes 10 times), it is easily changed from the back C to the back A (about 21%). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the back surface C from being continued for a long time even though the short-time period is 11 times or more. In other words, the longer the back surface C is, the more likely the remaining short time period is within 10 times, so the remaining short time period can be predicted more accurately by making the player refer to the back surface.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18B, the notification time switching table 222b4, which is one of the data tables constituting the back setting table 222b, will be described. As described above, the notification time switching table 222b4 is a table that is referred to when switching to the back surface that notifies that when there is a high possibility that the short time period has elapsed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the short time period elapses, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the “ream home state” where it is easy to enter the second entrance 640. As described above, this “rensou state” is advantageous to the player because it becomes a “probable big hit D” in which a large amount of prize balls can be easily obtained when a big win is won by the special symbol 2 lottery. However, even in this “ream” state, it is not impeded that the ball enters the first entrance 64. Also, when the special symbol 1 is won by lottery, as described above, it is easy to win the “probable jackpot A” that becomes a short time state of the normal symbol after the jackpot ends. Therefore, if the player keeps hitting the ball aiming at the first entrance 64 without noticing that it has entered the “rengo state”, despite the transition to the “renja state”, “ Winning “probable big hit A” may end the “ream” state.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to change to the rear surface type (refer to FIG. 26) that suggests that the state is in the “continuous villa state” based on the passage of the short time period. In addition, the change of the back surface type is performed when it is determined that the time-short period elapses by pre-reading (that is, when the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls is executed, the state shifts to the “ream villa state”). Done. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from launching a ball aiming at the first entrance 64 after the rear surface type is changed. It can be suppressed that the lottery is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, when it is determined that the time-short period elapses in the state where the back surface A is set, the back surface E is changed regardless of the value of the back surface determination counter 223e. This back E displays a back image that imaged the wilderness like the back A, and further, there is a possibility that the short time period may end, so that it is a game to stop the injection of the ball to the first entrance 64 A notification image (see FIG. 26A) prompting the user is displayed.

  Similarly, when it is determined that the short time period has elapsed in the state where the rear surface B is set, the rear surface determination counter 223e is changed to the rear surface F regardless of the value. Further, when it is determined that the time-short period elapses in the state where the rear surface C is set, the rear surface is changed to the rear surface G regardless of the value of the rear surface determination counter 223e.

  Even if the short time period does not elapse, if a continuous notice effect (story effect executed over a plurality of fluctuating effects) to be described later is executed, it is changed to this back E. It is configured. As a result, even if a notification image (see FIG. 26A) is displayed, it is not possible to determine whether or not to shift to the “continuous state” until the result of the continuous notice effect is confirmed. Therefore, the display effect performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be more enjoyed with respect to a player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19A, the ceiling reset setting table 222b5 which is one of the data tables constituting the back setting table 222b will be described. As described above, the ceiling reset time setting table 222b5 has a special symbol jackpot so that when the short time period is newly set (or the normal state of the normal symbol is set), after the jackpot ends. It is a data table referred in order to select a back image according to the state of.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, in the ceiling reset time setting table 222b5, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 1 to 10 or more (when the short time period given after the end of jackpot is 10 times or less), The back surface A (wilderness stage) is associated with the range where the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is “0 to 13”. Further, the back C is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “14 to 127”. That is, when the short time period given after the jackpot is 10 times or less, the back surface type is set to “Back A” in the range of “0 to 13” of the back surface determination counter 223h, and the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is In the range of “14 to 127”, the back surface type is set to the back surface C.

  Further, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 11 to 20 (when the short time period given after the end of the jackpot is 11 to 20 times), the value of the back face determination counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 13”. The back A (wilderness stage) is associated. Further, the back B is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “14 to 127”. That is, when the short time period given after the jackpot is 11 to 20 times, the back surface type is set to the back surface A in the range of the value of the back surface determination counter 223h from “0 to 13”, and the back surface determination counter 223h If the value is in the range of “14 to 127”, the back surface type is set to the back surface B.

  When the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 to 99 (when the short time period given after the end of the jackpot is 21 times or more), the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is within the range of “0 to 89”. (Wilderness stage) is associated. Further, the back B is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “90 to 114”. Further, the back C is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “115 to 127”. That is, when the short time period given after the jackpot is 21 times or more, the back surface type is set to the back surface A in the range of the back surface determination counter 223h in the range of “0 to 89”, and the back surface determination counter 223h value is The back surface type is set to the back surface B in the range of “90 to 114”, and the back surface type is set to the back surface C in the range of the value of the back surface determination counter 223h of “115 to 127”.

  When the special symbol is set to the low probability state (normal state), the back image is selected at the same ratio as that when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 to 99. That is, the back side A is associated with the range where the back side determination counter 223h is “0 to 89”, the back side B is associated with the range where the back side determination counter 223h is “90 to 114”, and the back side determination counter 223h. Is associated with the range of “115 to 127”. Thereby, it can be made difficult to determine from the effect whether the current state is the “normal state” or the state in which the short time period of the normal symbol remains 21 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the “normal state” is the most disadvantageous for the player, and to quit the game at that time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is improved. Can do.

  As described above, the types of the rear images that are easily selected according to the short time given after the end of the jackpot are made different. Specifically, the rear surface C is easily selected when the short time period is 10 times or less. Further, the back surface B is easily selected when the short time period is 11 to 20 times, and the back surface A is easily selected when the short time period is 21 times or more. Furthermore, since there is a possibility that the back A is selected even when the short time period is short (within 20 times), even if the back time A is set after the jackpot is finished, it is assumed that the short time period is selected 21 times or more. Cannot be determined. Therefore, even if a short time period of 21 times or more is selected, it can be felt that there is a possibility that a short time period is set, so that the game can be continued for the player. In addition, when the low probability state (normal state) of a special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot, the back A is set. In addition, when the “continuous state” is set after the end of the jackpot, the back D is set.

  In addition, the aspect which suggests the remaining short time period is not restricted to this. For example, the character's clothes may be changed according to the remaining time in a short period, or the character itself may be changed to a different character (for example, a girl character). Moreover, you may comprise so that the display mode of a 3rd pattern may be changed according to the remaining time and a short time, a sound effect, a music, etc. may be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19B, a notification rear side setting table 222b6, which is one of the data tables constituting the above, will be described. As described above, the notification back side setting table 222b6 finishes setting the back side E to the back side G when the back side E to the back side G are set and the time reduction state does not end. ~ Data table referred to return to back C). Thereby, it is possible to cause the player who has stopped launching the ball by displaying the back surface E to the back surface G to fire the ball again aiming at the first entrance 64.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, the back side setting table 222b6 for notification defines the back side type to be set in association with the value of the continuous notice counter 223i. In addition, although mentioned later for details, the continuous notice counter 223i is a counter for discriminating the number of productions of the continuous notice effect executed over five fluctuation effects. The continuous notice counter 223i is set to 4 at the start of the continuous notice effect, the variable effect is executed, and is subtracted by 1 each time the effect progresses.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, when the currently set back surface is the back surface E, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 0 (that is, the variation effect executed last in the continuous notice effect). Switch to back A). On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 1 to 4 (that is, in the middle of the continuous notice effect), the rear E is not changed.

  Further, when the currently set back side is the back side F, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 0 (that is, in the case of the variable effect executed last in the continuous notice effect), the back side B is reached. Can be switched. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 1 to 4 (that is, in the middle of the continuous notice effect), it is not changed from the rear face F.

  Further, when the currently set back surface is the back surface E, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 0 (that is, in the case of the variable effect executed last in the continuous notice effect), the back surface A is displayed. Can be switched. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 1 to 4 (that is, in the middle of the continuous notice effect), it is not changed from the back E.

  In this manner, the back image is returned from the back type for notification (back E to back G) to the normal back type (back A to back C) in the variable effect executed at the end of the continuous notice effect. Has been. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player who has stopped launching the ball according to the back type for notification (back E to back G) to launch the ball again.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The continuous notice determination table 222c is a data table used to determine whether or not to set a continuous notice effect (an effect with a story that is executed over a plurality of fluctuating effects). Details of the continuous notice determination table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 19C is a diagram showing the specified contents of the continuous notice determination table 222c. In the continuous notice determination table 222c, the determination value of the notice determination counter 223j when it is determined that the continuous notice is set is defined in association with the value of the ceiling number counter 223e. Although details will be described later, the notice determination counter 223j is a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 127 every time the main process (see FIG. 44) is executed by the MPU 221. The continuous notice effect set here is a so-called gasse effect, and does not shift to the “long-run state” even if the continuous notice effect ends.

  As shown in FIG. 19C, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is in the range of 1 to 5, there is no value of the notice discrimination counter 223j that is judged to set the continuous notice effect. In addition, when the short time period is 5 times remaining, a continuous notice effect that shifts to the “ream state” (not a frustration) is set.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is in the range of 6 to 10, it is determined that the continuous notification effect is set in the range of the notification determination counter 223j of “0 to 6”. Further, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is in the range of 11 to 20, it is determined that the continuous notification effect is set in the range of the notification determination counter 223j of “0 to 13”. Further, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 or more, it is determined that the continuous notification effect is set in the range where the value of the notification determination counter 223j is “0 to 2”.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is difficult to set the continuous notice effect when the remaining short time period is 21 or more, and the continuous notice effect is set when the remaining short time period is 11 to 20 times. It is configured to be easy. This makes it possible for the player to think that there is a possibility that the short-term period is 20 times or less even if the state is not in the consecutive resort state after the end of the continuous notice effect, so motivation to continue the game Can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a ceiling number counter 223e, and a villa state flag 223f are stored. And a back flag 223g, a back determination counter 223h, a continuous notice counter 223i, and a notice determination counter 223j.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. In addition, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1608 in FIG. 46). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1603 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2102 in FIG. 51). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2107 in FIG. 51). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is determined to be set as it is.

  As described above, the ceiling number counter 223e is a counter used to determine the remaining number of times in a short period of time set after the end of the jackpot. Based on the value of the ceiling number counter 223e, a rear image is changed, a continuous notice effect is set, and the like. The ceiling number counter 223e is set to a value according to the jackpot type when the jackpot variation pattern is notified from the main controller 110 by a variation pattern command (see S1705 and S1708 in FIG. 47). In addition, every time a variation pattern indicating a deviation of the special symbol is notified by the variation pattern command, 1 is subtracted (see S1802 in FIG. 48).

  The renzo state flag 223f is a flag that indicates whether or not it is a period during which the “rendezvous state” effect is executed. If the state is on, an effect corresponding to the “rendezvous state” is currently executed. To do. Specifically, the back D is set as the back image. Further, if the extended game state flag 223f is off, a normal effect is set. The continuous state flag 223f indicates that the variation type notified by the variation pattern command is a variation effect corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D (see S1710 in FIG. 47), or the time shortened state of the normal symbol. When it is determined that the processing has been completed (see S1804 in FIG. 48), it is set to ON. Further, when the variation type notified by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot A, a normal jackpot B, a probability variation jackpot A, or a probability variation jackpot C (see S1706 and S1709 in FIG. 47).

  The back flag 223g is a flag indicating the currently set back image type. This back flag is composed of 1 byte, for example. Then, 00H to 06H are associated as values corresponding to the back surface A to the back surface G, respectively. For example, when the back C is set, 02H (0010B in binary notation) is set. The value of the back flag 223g is changed whenever the type of the back image is changed (see S1504, S1508, S1512 in FIG. 45, and S1810, S1815 in FIG. 48).

  The back surface determination counter 223h is a counter referred to for determining whether or not to change the back surface type. Whether or not to change the back surface type is determined based on the value of the back surface determination counter 223h and the specified contents of the back surface setting table 222b. The back side determination counter 223h is composed of a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 127, and is updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 44).

  The continuous notice counter 223i is a counter indicating how many times the variable effect is executed when the continuous notice effect set over the five variable effects is executed. In accordance with the value of the continuous notice counter 223i, a mode of a variation effect executed during the continuous notice effect is set, or a back image is set. The continuous notice counter 223i is set to 4 when the continuous notice effect is set (see S1906 in FIG. 49), and is decremented by 1 every time the start of the change effect is notified by the change pattern command during the continuous notice effect. (See S1903 in FIG. 49).

  The notice determination counter 223j is a counter referred to for determining whether or not to set a continuous notice effect. Whether or not to set the continuous notice effect is determined based on the value of the notice determination counter 223j and the specified contents of the continuous notice determination table 222c. The notice determination counter 223j is composed of a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 127, and is updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 44).

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  The MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (such as characters) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 52) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 54B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2203 and S2204 in FIG. 52).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 21, a power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 21 shows that the display controller 114 turns on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to turn on the main power-on main shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 21 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 21 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on A power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and 21 (c) are alternately displayed in the third symbol display device. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 so as to be displayed at 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back image and the back image will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the seven types of back images and the range of back images stored for each back image in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. FIG. 22B shows a rear surface B corresponding to the “river stage”, a rear surface C corresponding to the “forest stage”, a rear surface D corresponding to the “cave stage”, and a rear surface A corresponding to the “wilderness stage”. It is shown with respect to the back surface E-back surface G corresponding to each ceiling alerting | reporting stage, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A to G are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to G (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured so that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the back surface type is changed based on the back surface setting table, the MPU 231 first sets the position between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area, and the image at the initial position is the third pattern. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 22A, the rear surface A corresponding to the wilderness stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. By making all the image data of the back A corresponding to the wilderness stage, which is the initial stage, reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 is reduced. can do.

  On the other hand, the back B corresponding to the river stage, the back C corresponding to the forest stage, the back D corresponding to the cave stage, and the back E to the back G corresponding to the ceiling notification stage, as shown in FIG. Only a part of the back surface, that is, image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the back image when the change of the back image is determined, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the back images. is there. However, with this configuration, a very large capacity RAM must be used as the resident video RAM 235, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ′, and the position from the position a including the initial position is set. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the stage is changed even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. In this case, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the back B and the back C can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the scroll display can be changed with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B to the back surface G, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Further, the rear B to the rear G are displayed from the initial position image, and then the range from the position a to the position b is set from left to right using image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Note that, in the back B to the back G, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 20) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Next, a specific example of the rear image actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a specific example during the continuous notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 23A is a diagram illustrating an example of the back surface A (wilderness stage) described above. As shown in FIG. 23A, when the back A (wilderness stage) is set, an image of an adventurer character 801 carrying a sword and a shield walking in the wilderness full of Iwayama is a back image. Is displayed. The character 801 is configured to suggest a degree of expectation that is a big hit or an expectation that a short time period ends by performing various actions with various effects performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, the back surface A (wilderness stage) is a back surface type that is likely to be displayed when the short time period of the normal symbol is 21 or more or when the special symbol has a low probability state (normal state). Therefore, based on the display of the back surface A, the remaining short time period until the short time period ends can be predicted.

  FIG. 23B is a diagram illustrating a display example of the back surface B (river stage) described above. When this back B (river stage) is set, a display image in which the character 801 rides on the raft and goes down the river is displayed as a back image. This back surface B (river stage) is a back surface type that is easily displayed when the short time period of the normal symbol is 11 to 20 times. Based on the display of this back B (river stage), it is possible to think that there is a high possibility that the short-term period is less than 20 times. Can be made to look at the situation until is executed 20 times. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  FIG. 24A is a diagram illustrating a display example of the back surface C (forest stage) described above. When this back C (forest stage) is set, a display image in which the character 801 advances through the forest with trees is displayed as a back image. This back C (Mori stage) is a back type that is easily displayed when the short time period of the normal symbol is less than 10 times. Based on the display of this back C (Mori stage), it can be considered that there is a high possibility that the short-term period is less than 10 times. Can be seen to see how it is executed 10 times. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG.24 (b), FIG.25, and FIG.26, the display aspect of the continuous notice effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is demonstrated. As described above, this continuous notice effect is an effect in which an effect with a story is executed over five variable effects. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as this continuous notice effect, an effect of fighting the monster 802 that protects the entrance of the cave 803 where the treasure is hidden is executed over five variable effects. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is suggested whether or not to shift to the “continuous state” based on whether or not to destroy the monster 802.

  This continuous notice effect is configured so that it is always set when there are five remaining time reduction periods, and an effect of destroying the monster 802 is executed by the continuous notice effect. In addition, after the continuous notice effect is completed (that is, when the time-shortening period becomes zero), it is configured to shift to the “spanning state”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the short time period is five or more remaining, or in the case of the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol, the continuous notice effect is set when setting the variation effect mode. There is. In this case, the effect that the character 801 is defeated by the monster 802 is executed in the fifth variation effect from the start of the continuous notice effect. Thereby, it can be made to recognize with respect to a player that it has not changed to a "renso state".

  FIG. 24B is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the continuous notice effect is executed in the state set to the back C (forest stage). . When the start of the continuous notice effect is determined at the start of the change, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), the effect that the cave 803 and the monster 802 that protects the entrance of the cave 803 appear in the traveling direction of the character 801 is displayed. The Then, as shown in FIG. 25A, an effect in which the character 801 and the monster 802 stare is displayed. These display effects are displayed during the fluctuating effects set to start the continuous notice effect. Although not shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a forest is displayed in the back even when the character 801 and the monster 802 are staring at each other or during a battle. Has been. Similarly, when a continuous notice effect is started in the wilderness stage or the river stage, the character 801 and the monster 802 are configured to battle each other against the background of the wilderness or river.

  In addition, when the hold ball corresponding to the number of changes until the end of the continuous notice effect is put on hold during the execution of the change effect, a notification image 804 shown in FIG. 25B is displayed (the back image is a ceiling notification). Switch to the back for). Specifically, when the entry to the first entrance 64 corresponding to the variation effect executed for the fifth time of the variation effect is put on hold, it corresponds to the held entry on the small area Ds1. A reserved ball number symbol (fourth reserved ball number symbol) to be displayed is displayed, and a notification image 804 is displayed. In the example of FIG. 25 (b), since it is the first time of the continuous notice effect, the notification image 804 is controlled to be displayed when the fourth reserved ball number symbol is displayed. The number of reserved balls on which the notification image 804 is displayed varies depending on the number of changes after the setting. That is, if the continuous notice effect is changing for the second time, the third reserved ball number symbol is displayed and the notification image 804 is displayed. Also, if the third change of the continuous notice effect is in progress, the second reserved ball number symbol is displayed and the notification image 804 is displayed. If the fourth change is in progress, the first hold ball is displayed. Control is performed so that several images are displayed and a notification image 804 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (b), the notification image 804 displays characters such as “Ceiling! Please support without hitting the ball!”. By displaying these characters, it is possible to prompt the player to stop the launch of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of held balls exceeding the number of fluctuations executed during the continuous notice effect from being held during the continuous notice effect. Therefore, although the transition to the “spanning state” is made after the end of the continuous notice effect, the “sitting state” state is in progress based on the entry to the first entrance 64 held during the continuous notice effect. The lottery of the special symbol 1 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the “renzo state” is ended by the lottery of the special symbol 1 during the “renso state” and the “renso state” is terminated. You can fully enjoy the "state".

  This notification image 804 is configured to be displayed even when the short time period does not end after the end of the continuous notice effect (that is, when the continuous notice effect of the gusset is displayed). That is, the notification image 804 is displayed when the holding ball corresponding to the number of fluctuations until the end of the continuous notice effect is put on hold, regardless of whether or not the result of the continuous notice effect is shifted to “continuous state”. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether or not the “continuous state” state is to be transitioned to after the end of the continuous notice effect by simply displaying the notification image 804, so that the player can confirm the result of the continuous notice effect more interestingly. be able to. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  A plurality of aspects of the notification image 804 may be provided. In addition, a mode that is set only when the “continuous state state” is set after the end of the continuous notice effect (for example, a mode in which “Let's support the ceiling without hitting the ball! ) And a mode that can be set regardless of the result of the continuous notice effect (for example, a mode in which characters such as “Ceiling ?! Please support without hitting the ball!”) Are provided. . Thereby, the player can be pleased by displaying the mode in which the transition to the “rengo state” is confirmed. Therefore, since attention can be paid not only to the contents of the effect of the continuous notice effect but also to the mode of the notification image 804, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  FIG. 26A shows an example of display contents when the fourth variation effect of the continuous notice effect is set in a state where the notification image 804 is displayed. In the fourth continuous notice effect, an effect in which the character 801 attacks the monster 802 is displayed. When a change effect corresponding to the fifth continuous effect is executed after this effect is displayed, the monster 802 falls and a victory notification image 805 (win !!!! left) indicating that the character 801 has won the monster 802. Either an effect in which the characters “Stop hitting!” Are displayed (see FIG. 26B) or an effect in which the monster 802 fights back and the character 801 is defeated. It is configured as follows. Thereby, the player can easily recognize whether or not to shift to the “rengo state”.

  Further, in the fifth effect of the continuous notice effect, the battle result between the character 801 and the monster 802 is displayed immediately after the start of fluctuation. In other words, when the state is shifted to the “village state”, the display content shown in FIG. 26B is displayed immediately after the start of the change. As a result, even if the fourth variation effect of the continuous notice effect is finished in a state where there is no holding ball, and the fifth change effect of the continuous notice effect is started based on a new start winning prize after that, It is possible to prevent the winning at the first entrance 64 being suspended during the fluctuating effect. This is because by confirming the victory notification image 805, it is possible to make the player recognize that the ball will be lost if the ball is launched to the left side of the board surface 13 (left-handed). Therefore, even when the fourth variation effect is ended without holding the holding ball corresponding to the number of times of change until the end of the continuous notification effect (that is, when the notification image 804 cannot be displayed), the continuous notification effect is generated. The lottery of the special symbol 1 can be prevented from being executed during the “ream” state based on the entry to the first entrance 64 held during the fifth variation effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the “renzo state” is ended by the lottery of the special symbol 1 during the “renso state” and the “renso state” is terminated. You can fully enjoy the "state".

  Note that the mode of the continuous notice effect is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined as long as it can indicate whether or not the player is in an advantageous state. For example, the adventurer's character 801 performs an effect of climbing a high tower, and suggests whether or not it will be in a “village state” depending on whether it can climb the tower without losing the obstruction of the monster 801 or the like. May be.

  Further, the method for suppressing the number of held balls exceeding the number of fluctuations executed during the continuous notice effect is not limited to displaying the notification image 804. For example, when the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured with a touch panel, and the reserved balls for the number of fluctuations executed during the continuous notice effect are accumulated, two distant locations in the 3rd symbol display device 81 are played. You may encourage them to touch each other with their hands. Thereby, since a player's hand can be separated from the handle | steering-wheel 51, it can suppress that a player launches a ball | bowl. Therefore, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the “renzo state” is ended by the lottery of the special symbol 1 during the “renso state” and the “renso state” is terminated. Can fully entertain.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the back D (cave stage), which is the back type set in the “continuous state”, will be described. As shown in FIG. 27A, when the back surface D is set, a back image in which the character 801 searches the cave is displayed. In the display area 806 provided in the lower part of the third symbol display device 81, characters “cave search mode” are displayed. In addition, characters “right-handed” are displayed on the left and right of the character. Here, as described above, in the “ream” state, it is easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 by launching the ball toward the right side of the game board 13. Also, a special symbol 2 lottery is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, and if it is a big win, it is configured to have a “probability big hit D” with a probability of 90%. . This “probable big hit D” is able to win a large amount of prize balls, and after the jackpot is over, the “renso state” is set again (a high probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol are set) Jackpot) and the most advantageous jackpot for the player. Therefore, in order to make the lottery of the special symbol 2 that is likely to become “probability big hit D” in the “renso” state, the character “right-handed” is displayed in the display area 806 and the right side of the game board 13 is displayed. The player is encouraged to launch a ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from being shot out by mistake aiming at the first entrance 64 in the “rengo state”, so that the “renja state” can be more enjoyed.

  FIG. 27 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display effects in the case where the rear face D is set (“continuous state”) and the big symbol is won by lottery of the special symbol 2. As shown in FIG. 27B, when the variation effect corresponding to the jackpot is executed in a state where the back surface D is set, the variation effect in which the same main symbols are arranged in the small area Ds2 is executed, and the character An effect is performed in which 801 finds the treasure box 807. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, after a change effect is performed in the small area | region Ds2 and a stop symbol is displayed, it is comprised so that a stop symbol may be largely stopped and displayed with respect to the main display area Dm (refer FIG.5 (b)). . Thereby, the player can confirm a stop symbol clearly. This stop display state continues for at least 1 second. Then, when the next variation effect is started or the demonstration effect is started, the stop display state is ended.

  Note that the effect in the case of performing the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot is not limited to the effect of finding the treasure box 807. Any mode that suggests that the player is in an advantageous state (a state in which a prize ball can be obtained) can be arbitrarily determined. Moreover, it is not necessary to perform the same effect for all jackpot types. For example, if “normal jackpot B” or “probable jackpot C”, which is a jackpot type in which the “renja state” ends after the jackpot ends, it is suggested that the jackpot is not desirable for the player. An effect may be executed in a manner. For example, an effect may be executed in which the cave collapses and the character 801 escapes from the cave. By performing the effect of the character 801 escaping from the cave, the player can easily recognize that the “cave stage” has ended (that is, the “rengo state” has ended).

  Further, in the “renso state”, it may be configured to suggest whether or not the “renso state” continues after the jackpot ends due to the effect of the jackpot. Specifically, for example, in the variable effect for informing the jackpot, an effect of finding the closed treasure chest 807 is executed, and the effect of opening the treasure chest 807 in the subsequent jackpot effect is executed. You may comprise. And if a treasure is in the treasure box 807, it will be in the “ream” state even after the jackpot ends. Further, it may be configured to suggest that the “rensou state” ends after the jackpot ends.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a predetermined sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If the jackpot is one of the jackpots C, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, when “probability jackpot A” and “probability jackpot B” (a jackpot that makes it difficult to win a prize ball), it is difficult to recognize that the player has won a jackpot. The above effects are executed. That is, in the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect, the display effect is executed as if the changing effect for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is continued (executed before the jackpot) The execution period of the variation effect to be performed and the effect periods of the respective effects performed during the jackpot are connected to execute one variation effect). For this reason, in the data table storage area 233b, “probability big hit A” and “probability big hit B” (hits that are difficult to win a prize ball as data tables corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect) ) A dedicated data table and a data table corresponding to a jackpot that allows players other than these to win prize balls are stored, and a display data table corresponding to the jackpot type is set. This makes it difficult to recognize that it has been a big hit that makes it difficult to win a prize ball, and even if the big hit is announced, the big hit ends without getting the prize ball, and the player is discouraged. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type is the back surface A to the stage selected by the player (any one of “wilderness stage”, “river stage”, “forest stage”, “cave stage”, and “ceiling notification stage”). Information for specifying which of G is displayed is described.

  The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the specified stage among the rear surfaces A to G as the drawing target when the rear surface type specifies that any one of the rear surfaces A to G is displayed. The range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time passes.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 28). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 29 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 29).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2205 in FIG. 52). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3805 in FIG. 63 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2501 in FIG. 54B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 54B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 54B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Step S2509 in FIG. 54B is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 55 to 59) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3701 in FIG. 63A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 63B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 30) to be described later describing the contents of image drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 54B). ) (See S2503)), pointer update processing (see S3405 in FIG. 60) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list (FIG. 30) and the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is obtained. Add to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As illustrated in FIG. Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 54B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3407 in FIG. 60). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2202 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3913 in FIG. 64). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “off” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3914 in FIG. 64). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4002 in FIG. 65).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 54B) is executed (see S4002 in FIG. 65).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 31 to 41. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 299, 199, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 ( S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 40) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol 1 lottery is performed on the first symbol display device 37, and a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variation display based on the lottery result is executed (S208). The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S209: No), the display mode of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is updated (S210), and this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 1 variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. Thus, it is determined whether the normal jackpot B, the probability variation jackpot A, or the probability variation jackpot B.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the lighting aspect of several LED provided in the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 may be changed according to jackpot classification. Each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S212). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S213), and the process proceeds to S218. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S213, if the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 40) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and an opening command is set. (See S1102 in FIG. 41). In the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S212, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1. When it is determined that it is not above (that is, 0) (S214: No), the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S214, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S214: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is decremented by one (S215).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the short time counter 203g after subtraction has become 0 (S216), and if it is 0 (S216: Yes), the short time period ends due to the variation effect of the special symbol this time. This means that the symbol shifts to the normal state (that is, shifts to the “ream” state), so that the advantageous state flag 203i is set to ON to indicate the “ream state” (S217). The process proceeds to S218.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is not 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command for stopping the variation of the third symbol is set in the third symbol display device (S218), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S208). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 32) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are selected. It is a process for determining the production pattern (fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed in step S2.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random-number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203f of the RAM 203 is on (S302). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203f is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol high probability state (probability variation state). Therefore, based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first per-random number table for high probability (see FIG. 7B), whether or not the special symbol is a big hit The lottery result is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random numbers stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 7B). As described above, ten random numbers corresponding to the special symbol, “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270”, are set. When the value of the counter C1 matches the random number value that is a hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the probability variation flag 203f is 0 (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 And a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 7B) (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random number values stored in the first random number table for low probability. As random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, eight values of “5, 52, 78, 119, 138, 201, 262, and 291” are set. Is determined to be a jackpot of a special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S305). : Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the hit type selection table 202b1 for special figure 1, and the big hit of 66 kinds of special symbols Of the normal jackpot A, the probability variation jackpot A1 to the probability variation jackpot A64, the probability variation jackpot B, it is determined what the jackpot type is (see FIG. 8A).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (normal jackpot A, probability variation jackpot A1 to probability variation jackpot A64, probability variation jackpot B). The In addition, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, this jackpot type (normal jackpot A, probability variation jackpot A1 to probability variation jackpot A64, probability variation jackpot B) is set as the stop category. Is done.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 12A). Based on the above, the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined.

  If it is determined in S305 that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on the above, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as either front-rear outreach, reach other than front-rear out, or complete disengagement.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 Based on the above, the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined.

  When the processing of S307 or S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 40). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first ball inlet 64 and the second ball inlet 640. When there is a start winning, a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and a prefetch of a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of lottery hold in the special symbol 1) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S403: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) described later executed by the MPU 201, the voice It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, based on the state of the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h in the RAM 203 and the various counter values stored in the process of S406, whether or not the lottery is a special symbol (whether it is a big win) and its stop type (in the case of a big win) Is a jackpot type) and its fluctuation pattern is predicted (S408). Here, if the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is on, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S406 and the first per-random number table for high probability. It is determined by comparing each of 10 random values (winning values) stored in (see FIG. 7B) one by one. As described above, ten random numbers corresponding to the special symbol, “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270”, are set. When the value of the counter C1 matches the random number value that is a hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is off, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the first per-random number table for low probability ( It is determined by comparing each of the 8 random values (winning values) stored in FIG. 7 (b). As described above, eight random numbers “5, 52, 78, 119, 138, 201, 262, 291” are set as the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. Are determined to be a big hit of the special symbol.

  When it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b. The jackpot type is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is out, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is the outreach reach. It is determined whether it is present or not completely.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is obtained from the special lottery pattern selection table 202d stored in the ROM 202 (see FIGS. 11B and 12), the predicted lottery result, and the predicted stop type. The variation pattern is selected according to the type of jackpot in the case of jackpot.

  If the process of S407 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, a stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and a variation pattern, then the predicted lottery is predicted, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408).

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) to be described later executed by the MPU 201, an audio lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  After the winning information command is set by the processing of S409, it is determined whether or not the lottery predicted in the processing of S408 is a special symbol jackpot (S409). When the lottery result predicted in the process of S407 is any one of “probable big hit A” to “probable big hit D” (S409: Yes), the pre-reading probable changing flag 203h is set to ON (S410), and S413. Move on to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result predicted in the process of S407 is not “probable big hit A” to “probable big hit D” (S409: No), the predicted lottery result is “normal big hit A” or “normal It is determined whether or not the jackpot B "(S411). If it is determined that the value is either “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B”, the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is set to OFF (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, in the process of S411, when it is determined that it is not “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B” (that is, the lottery result is out of the special symbol), the process of S412 is skipped and the process of S413 is performed. Migrate to In the process of S413, the special symbol 2 winning process for setting the start of the variation effect is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 (S413), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the special symbol 2 winning process (S413) described above will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol 2 winning process (S413) is a process for setting the start of the variation effect based on the ball entering the second entrance 640. In this special symbol 2 winning process, it is first determined whether or not a ball entering the second entrance 640 has been detected (S501). In the process of S501, when the entrance of the sphere into the second entrance 640 is not detected (S501: No), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if a ball entering the second entrance 640 is detected by the processing of S501 (S501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a changing effect is being executed (S502). If the variation effect is being executed (S502: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the ball entering the second entrance 640 is discarded without being held.

  If the variation effect is not being executed in the process of S502 (S502: No), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504), and it is determined that it is not 0 (that is, the variation effect in the special symbol 1 is held). If so (S504: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: Yes), the first random number counter C1 and the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above Each value of the winning type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the special symbol 2 execution area 203b of the RAM 203, thereby controlling the special symbol 2 to be selected.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current state is a high probability state of a special symbol by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203f is on (S506). If the probability variation flag 203f is on, the processing of S505 is performed. The stored value of the first random number counter C1 and the 10 random number values (hit values) stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 7B) one by one. By comparing, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S507), and the process proceeds to S509. As described above, ten random numbers corresponding to the special symbol, “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270”, are set. When the value of the counter C1 matches the random number value that is a hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S506, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203f is off (S506: No), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the process of S505 and the first for low probability are used. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit by comparing each of the eight random number values (hit values) stored in the hit random number table (see FIG. 7B) (S508), The process proceeds to S509. As described above, eight random numbers “5, 52, 78, 119, 138, 201, 262, 291” are set as the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. Are determined to be a big hit of the special symbol.

  In the processing of S509 executed after the completion of S507 or S508, it is determined whether or not the determination result by the processing of S507 or S508 is a special symbol jackpot (S509), and if it is a special symbol jackpot (S509) : Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S505 (S510). In the process of S510, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type. In addition, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S511). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of S511, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the table to be referred to according to the gaming state (whether or not it is the “ream” state) (one of the special figure 2 normal / accuracy variable time reduction selection table 202d2 or the common probability variable non-short time selection table 202d3) ) And confirm the selected table and the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203. Based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, normal reach, super reach, and super long Determine the fluctuation time of the design fluctuation such as reach. As described above, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d.

  When the processing of S511 is completed, it is then determined whether the jackpot type is any one of “probability variation jackpot A” to “probability variation jackpot D” (S512), and “probability variation jackpot A” to “probability variation jackpot D” is determined. If it is any (S512: Yes), the prefetching probability change flag 203f is set to ON (S513), and the process proceeds to S517. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not “probable variation jackpot A” to “probability variation jackpot D” (that is, “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B”) (S512: No), the prefetching probability variation flag 203f. Is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S517.

  In the process of S509, when it is determined that the special symbol is off (S509: No), the display mode at the time of the off is set (S515). In the process of S515, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on the above, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S516). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. Specifically, the table to be referred to according to the gaming state (whether or not it is the “ream” state) (one of the special figure 2 normal / accuracy variable time reduction selection table 202d2 or the common probability variable non-short time selection table 202d3) ) And the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super long reach is determined based on the selected table and the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the processing of S513, S514, or S516 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S511 or S516 is set (S517). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S510 or S515 is set (S518). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 40). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S518 ends, the process returns to the start winning process. By this special symbol 2 winning process (S413), the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be executed only when the variation effect is not executed and the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 does not exist.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 31), and is accompanied by the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203g in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). Note that the hour / short counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 11A), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). ). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability (see FIG. 11A). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 239”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. That is, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol in the entire range that the value of the second random number counter C4 can take (see FIG. 11A).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low probability Based on the second random number table for time, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability (see FIG. 11A). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-222”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 223-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbols (see FIG. 11A).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state flag 203i is on (i.e., the "long-run state") (S614). If it is on (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit with a special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 3 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the advantageous state flag 203i is off (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set. In addition to setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S612 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state flag 203i is turned on (S619). If the advantageous state flag 203i is turned on (S619: Yes), the universal figure certain change non-short-time selection table 202e2, Based on the value of the 2 fluctuation type counter CS2, the fluctuation display fluctuation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the advantageous state flag 203i is off (S619: No), the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is based on the universal chart normal / probability changing time selection table 202e1 and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. Is set (S621), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the “renso state”, compared to the special symbol low probability state (normal state), special symbol high probability state (probability change), and normal symbol time short state (short time), Since the time of the fluctuation display becomes very short as “1 second” and the release period of the second entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 3 times”. 2 The ball enters the entrance 640 easily.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 40) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 40) is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance 67, and if a sphere has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: No), or the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is less than 4 even though the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 If not (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter One is added to the value (M) of 203e (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S913 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and it is determined whether the calculated RAM determination value is normal (S907). If it is determined in step S907 that the RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data is destroyed. In this case, the process proceeds to S913. As will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. 40, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S914, S915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, based on the state of the probability variation flag 203f and the value of the hour / minute counter 203g, a state command for notifying the sound lamp controller 113 of the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of start-up is generated, The sound is output to the sound lamp controller 113. Since the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are not backed up, the stored contents are lost when the power is turned off. For this reason, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state of a special symbol or a short time period of a normal symbol based on the state command output from the main controller 110) ) And various effects are set based on the determined gaming state. Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during business hours, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that an effect that contradicts the actual gaming state is executed after the power is restored. Although the details will be described later, the status command output by the processing of S901 is performed by the MPU of the sound lamp control device 113 during the startup processing (see FIG. 42) (see FIG. 43). The various flags are updated based on the gaming state notified by the state command.

  When the processing of S910 ends, an effect permission command is then transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S911). Next, an interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the start-up process (see FIG. 39) ends will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device ( External output processing to be transmitted to the peripheral control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 31) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) or the start winning process (see FIG. 34) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 34) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 41) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated (S1002). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. To do. Then, the updated values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then the special symbol jackpot state is reached. In this case, the jackpot control process for executing the jackpot effect or opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol 1 variation start processing (see FIG. 33), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol. Start on display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol 1 variation start processing (see FIG. 33) is completed, the first symbol display is displayed. The variation display being executed in the device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 33). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S620 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 36) or the processing of S621, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 36), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36) ( (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). When it is determined that the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the first variation type counter CS1, and the second variation type counter CS2 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 38 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area backed up in the RAM 203 and the work area.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 40). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) S213 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this processing is terminated.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1103). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1103, if the special symbol is a big hit (1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is selected according to the jackpot type. A round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1104 (S1104: No), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. It is determined whether or not the closing condition is satisfied (S1107). Specifically, when the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened, the closing condition is set when 0.2 seconds have elapsed or when five balls have been won. It is determined that it has been established. Further, when the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when 30 seconds have elapsed or five balls have been won. .

  In the processing of S1107, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the first The specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (S1108), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not satisfied (S1107: No), the ending effect is displayed. It is determined whether it is a start timing (S1109). Specifically, when the final round of the special gaming state is completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  In the process of S1109, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending command is set (S1110), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1109 that it is not the ending start timing (S1109: No), it is then determined whether or not it is a jackpot end timing (S1111). Specifically, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect, it is determined that it is a jackpot end timing. If it is determined that the jackpot end timing is reached (S1111: Yes), the state setting table 202f is read (S1112), and the current jackpot type and after the jackpot end specified in the state setting table 202f are read. Based on the setting, the probability change flag 203f, the hour / middle counter 203g, the free state flag 203i, etc. of the RAM 203 are updated (S1113), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1111 that it is not the jackpot end timing (S1111: No), this processing is ended as it is.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42 to FIG. 51, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 42, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1419 (see FIG. 44) depends on whether the current start-up process is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 44, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1416 in FIG. 44), it executes a power-off process in S1419. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1419 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1318 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1418 in FIG. 44). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1419 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1419 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210).

  When the process of S1210 is completed, a state command process for determining the state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed based on a state command (see S910 in FIG. 39) output from the main controller 110 when the power is turned on (see FIG. 39). S1211), interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1208 is performed via the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the state command process is performed. Execute (S1211), set the interrupt permission (S1212), and proceed to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the state command process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the startup process (see FIG. 42) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. This status command processing (S1211) is a status command output to the sound lamp control device 113 in order to notify the gaming status at the time of power recovery in the startup processing (see FIG. 39) in the main control device 110. This is a process performed to accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 based on the above.

  In this state command process (S1211), first, it is determined whether or not the state notified by the state command is a special symbol high probability state (S1301), and is not a special symbol high probability state (ie, a special symbol). (S1301: No), the value of the ceiling number counter 223e corresponding to the remaining short time is set to 0, and whether or not it is in the “continuous state” is determined. The consecutive resort state flag 223f shown is set to OFF (S1302), and this process is terminated. By the process of S1302, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can determine that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol low-probability state (normal state) in subsequent processes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that an effect corresponding to the “rensou state” is erroneously executed and the player misidentifies the state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the special symbol is in a high probability state (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the short time period notified by the state command is 0 (S1303). . If it is determined that the short time period is 0 (S1303: Yes), the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is set to 0, and the extended villa state flag 223f is set to ON (S1304). finish. By the process of S1304, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can determine that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “continuous state” in the processes executed thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that an effect corresponding to a state other than the “renso state” is erroneously executed, and the player quits the game despite the “renso state”.

  In the process of S1303, when it is determined that the short time period notified by the status command is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1303: No), the notified short time period is set to the value of the ceiling number counter 223e. At the same time, the consecutive resort state flag 223f is set to OFF (S1305), and this process is terminated. Through the processing of S1305, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can determine that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of a special symbol and a short-time state of a normal symbol in subsequent processing. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that an effect corresponding to the “rengo state” is mistakenly executed, and that the player misidentifies the “renso state”.

  As described above, by executing the state command process, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that it is possible to prevent the player from misinterpreting the state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the start of the main process or the previous process of S1401 (S1401). If not (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1412 without performing S1402 to S1411. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1402 to S1411 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1412, the change display setting process of S1413, and the process of updating the counter values of S1414 and S1415 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1412 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1413 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1413 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1402). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1408 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1404). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1407). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1407 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1408), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1409, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1409 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. When the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1410) is completed, a rear and rear face setting process is executed (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. This hit / rear back setting process (S1411) is a process for setting a rear image after the big hit is completed. Details of the rear and rear face setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1412, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1412). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1413). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1413 is completed, the rear determination counter 223h used for determining whether or not to change the rear image is updated (S1414). Specifically, the value of the back face determination counter 223h is read from the RAM 223, 1 is added to the value, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (127 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the back surface determination counter 223h is stored in the back surface determination counter 223h.

  Next, the notice determination counter 223j used for determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect is updated (S1415). Specifically, the value of the notice determination counter 223j is read from the RAM 223, 1 is added to the value, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (127 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the notice determination counter 223j is stored in the notice determination counter 223j.

  When the processing of S1415 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1416). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1416 (S1416: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1418), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1419). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1420), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1416: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1417), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1417: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1317: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the rear and rear face setting process (S1411) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the rear and rear face setting process. The winning five back setting process (S1411) is a process for setting the back type at the end of the jackpot.

  In the hit / rear back setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit end timing (S1501). The jackpot end timing specifically means the end of the ending effect. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the case of a big hit (probable big hit A and probable big hit B) where the first specific winning opening 65a is difficult to obtain, the same effect during the big hit is the same as during normal times. Is executed. Therefore, even during the ending effect, the effect as if the normal variation effect is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the big hit that is difficult to obtain a prize ball is won, and therefore it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the short time period is reset based on the fact that the big hit is A. Therefore, since it can be difficult to accurately determine the remaining short time period, the remaining short time period can be predicted by the player from the back image or the like. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the process of S1501, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot end timing (S1501: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot end timing is reached (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot to be ended is a normal jackpot A (S1502), and if it is a normal jackpot A (S1502: Yes), a display rear image change command corresponding to the rear surface A is set (S1503), a value corresponding to the rear surface A is set to “00H” for the rear surface flag 223g (S1504), and this processing is ended. To do. The display rear image change command set by the process of S1503 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. Among them, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot to be ended is not the normal jackpot A (S1502), it is then determined whether the jackpot type is either the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D (S1505). When it is determined by the processing of S1505 that the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D is satisfied (that is, “the villa state is set” after the jackpot is ended) (S1505: Yes), this corresponds to “the villa state”. In order to set the back type D back (cave stage), a display rear image change command corresponding to the back D is set (S1506), and “03H” corresponding to the back D is set to the back flag 223g. After setting (S1507), this process is terminated. The display rear image change command set by the processing of S1506 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the command output processing (S1402) of the main processing (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. Among them, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1505 that the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D is not one (either the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot C) (S1505: No), the time set newly at the end of the jackpot In order to set the back image based on the period, the ceiling number counter 223e and the ceiling reset time setting table 222b5 (see FIG. 19A) are read (S1508). Although details will be described later, the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is updated in a short period of time corresponding to the jackpot when the fluctuation pattern command indicating the jackpot is received. Therefore, in this process, by referring to the ceiling number counter 223e, it is possible to set the back image according to the short time set at the end of the jackpot.

  When the process of S1508 is completed, the value of the back face determination counter 223h is then read, and the back face type to be set after the big hit ends based on the ceiling reset time setting table 222b5 read in the process of S1508 and the value of the ceiling number counter 223e. Specify (S1509). For example, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 5 (that is, the short time period given after the end of the jackpot is 5 times) and the value of the back face determination counter 223h is “85”, The back C (forest stage) is selected (see FIG. 19A).

  After the processing in S1509, a display rear image variation command corresponding to the specified back surface type is set (S1510), a value corresponding to the specified back surface type is set in the back surface flag 223g, and this processing ends. The display rear image change command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image in the third symbol display device 81.

  By executing this hitting rear face setting process (S1411), it is possible to switch to the appropriate rear face type according to the short time period or state after the end of each jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the command determination process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1412). This command determination processing (S1412) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Process.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the variation pattern is processing for extracting the variation pattern type from the received variation pattern command. The selection process is executed (S1603), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 51) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 51) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (special The number N1) of the variable display hold in the symbol is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). In the process of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1608 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected or each time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is set to the number of the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1608. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of drawing a special symbol, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1608 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1607, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1607: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1609). If the winning information command is received (S1609: Yes), the ceiling notification process is executed (S1610), and the process returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110. Then, the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original lottery is obtained from each acquired value of each counter C1 to C3 separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various kinds of information obtained when the above is performed is prefetched (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning information command including various information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The ceiling notification process is a process of switching to a notification rear type (back E to rear G) based on the prefetch result. Details of the ceiling notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the winning information command is not received in the processing of S1609 (S1609: No), it is then determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1611). If an opening command is received (S1611: Yes), a display opening command is set (S1612), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221, the display control device. Sent to 114. When receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the opening command has not been received in the processing of S1611 (S1611), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1613). When the round number command is received (S1613: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1614), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1615), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1613 (S1613: No), it is then determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1616). If an ending command is received (S1616: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1617), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the first specific winning opening 65a is a big hit (probable big hit A and probable big hit B) that makes it difficult to obtain a winning ball, it seems as if a normal variation effect is being executed during the ending effect. Production is performed. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the big hit that is difficult to obtain a prize ball is won, and therefore it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the short time period is reset based on the fact that the big hit is A. Therefore, since it can be difficult to accurately determine the remaining short time period, the remaining short time period can be predicted by the player from the back image or the like. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S1616 (S1616: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1618). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process. This variation pattern selection process (S1603) is a process for extracting a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In this variation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot variation pattern that is notified by the variation pattern command (S1701). If it is determined (S1701), a rear-side back setting process for determining whether or not to change the back image is executed (S1702). Next, a continuous notice setting process for setting the start of the continuous notice effect is executed (S1703), and this process ends. Note that details of the rear-side rear setting process (S1702) and the continuous notice setting process (S1703) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49, respectively.

  If it is determined in the process of S1701 that the variation pattern is a big hit (S1701: Yes), it is then determined whether the normal big hit A or the normal big hit B is notified by the variation pattern command (step S1701: Yes). S1704). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot type that shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol and shifts to the normal state of the normal symbol (the short time state of the normal symbol is not given) after the jackpot ends. If it is determined that the normal jackpot A or the normal jackpot B (S1704: Yes), the value of the ceiling counter 223e is set to 0 (S1705). Then, the extended resort state flag 223f is set to OFF (S1706), and the process proceeds to S1712.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1704 that the normal jackpot A is not the normal jackpot B (S1704: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot C (S1707). . That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot is finished. If it is determined in the processing of S1707 that the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot C (S1707), the short time period given after the jackpot is ended is set as the value of the ceiling number counter 223e (S1708). The resort state flag 223f is set to OFF (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1712.

  In the processing of S1707, when it is determined that neither the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot C is in effect (that is, the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D) (S1707: No), after the jackpot is ended, the “rendezvous state” Therefore, the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is set to 0 (S1710), the consecutive house state flag 223f is set to ON (S1711), and the process proceeds to S1712.

  In the process of S1712 that is shifted to after the process of S1706, S1709, or S1711, the corresponding fluctuation pattern is extracted from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command notified from the main controller 110 (S1712), and this process is performed. finish. Based on the variation pattern extracted here, a variation pattern command for display is set by variation display setting processing (see FIG. 51).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the rear back side setting process (S1702) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. This off-rear side setting process (S1702) is executed in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 47) as described above, and is a process for determining whether or not to change the back image.

  In the rear face setting process, it is first determined whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is greater than 0 (S1801). If it is greater than 0 (S1801: Yes), the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is decremented by 1 ( S1802). Since the value of the ceiling number counter 223e indicates the remaining short time period, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the counter value every time a variation pattern command corresponding to a special symbol outage is received, thereby reducing the short time period. Can be grasped accurately.

  When the processing of S1802 is completed, the back flag 223g is then read (S1803), and the table corresponding to the back surface type specified by the read back flag 223g value is read from the back setting table 222b (S1804). Specifically, if the current time is the back A (the value of the back flag 223g is “00H”), the back A setting table 222b1 is read, and if the current is the back B (the value of the back flag 223g is If “01H”, the rear B time setting table 222b2 is read. If the current time is the rear C (if the value of the rear flag 223g is “02H”), the rear C time setting table 222b3 is read. Also, if the current back surface type is the back surface type E to back surface G (that is, the value of the back surface flag 223g is “04H” to “06H”), the notification back time setting table 222b6 is read.

  Next, based on the data table read out in step S1804 and the value of the ceiling number counter 223e, the back surface type is specified (S1805), and it is determined whether the back image needs to be changed as a result of the specification. (S1806). If it is determined that the rear image needs to be changed (S1806: Yes), a display rear image change command corresponding to the changed back surface is set (S1807), and the value corresponding to the changed back surface is set. The back flag 223f is set (S1808), and the process proceeds to S1809. The display rear image change command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1805 that there is no need to change the back image (the current back surface type and the back surface type specified by the processing of S1804 are the same) (S1805: No), S1807, S1808. The process is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1809.

  In the processing of S1809, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter 223e has become 0 as a result of subtracting 1 in the processing of S1802 (S1809). If it is 0 (S1809: Yes), the short time period elapses. (That is, “the villa state” is set), the villa state flag 223f is set to ON (S1810), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is not 0 (1 or more) by the process of S1809 (S1809: No), the process of S1810 is skipped and this process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S1801, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S1801), it is then determined whether or not the extended game state flag 223f is on. However, if it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S1811: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the consecutive resort state flag 223f is on (that is, “connected resort state”) (S1811: Yes), then the rear flag 223e is read (S1812), and whether or not the current rear surface type is the rear D. Is discriminated (S1813).

  In the process of S1813, when it is determined that the current back surface type is the back surface D (S1813: Yes), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the back surface type is not the back surface D (S1813: No), the first time when the change pattern command corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is received after becoming the “ream” state, This means that the back setting process (S1702) has been executed. Therefore, by setting a display rear image change command corresponding to the back D, a change to the back of the cave stage corresponding to the “rengo state” is set (S1814), and the value corresponding to the back D is “ “03H” is set in the back flag 223f (S1815), and this process is terminated.

  Thus, by performing the back side setting process (S1702) at the time of detachment, it is possible to determine whether or not to change the back image according to the remaining time and short period. Therefore, since the player can be given pleasure to predict the remaining short time period from the type of the back image, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the continuous notice setting process (S1703) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. This continuous notice setting process (S1703) is executed in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 47) and is a process for determining whether or not to set a continuous notice effect.

  In the continuous notice determination process (S1703), first, the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is read (S1901), and it is determined whether or not the value is 0 (S1902). If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is not 0 (that is, one of 1 to 4) (S1902: No), the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is decremented by 1 (S1903), and the subtraction is performed. Based on the value of the subsequent continuous notice counter 223i and the variation pattern table 222a, the variation pattern mode is extracted (S1904). Based on the variation pattern extracted here, a variation pattern command for display is set by variation display setting processing (see FIG. 51).

  In the variation pattern table 222a, selectable variation pattern types are defined for each variation time notified by the variation pattern command. In addition, with respect to one variation time, a variation pattern effect that can be selected in a normal time (when the continuous notice effect is not set), a variation pattern effect that can be selected in the first variation effect of the continuous notice effect, Variation pattern effects that can be selected in the second variation effect of the continuous notice effect, variation pattern effects that can be selected in the third variation effect of the continuous notice effect, and variations that can be selected in the fourth variation effect of the continuous notice effect Selectable when the last variation in the short-time state of a normal symbol is executed with the pattern effect, the variation pattern effect selectable in the fifth variation effect of the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice effect not set At least a variation pattern effect (a variation pattern effect corresponding to a ceiling notification notice) is defined. In the process of S1904, the corresponding variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern table 222a according to the value of the continuous notice counter 223i.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1902 that the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 0 (S1902: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 4 (S1903). 4 is determined (S1903: Yes), the remaining short time period is 5 times (the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is updated before the start of change, so the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is By setting the continuous notice effect, it is possible to shift to the “long villa state” along with the end of the continuous notice effect. Therefore, in this case, the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is set to 4 (S1906), and the variation pattern modes that can be selected in the first variation effect of the continuous notice effect are extracted from the variation pattern table 222a (S1907). This process is terminated.

  In the processing of S1905, when it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is not 4 (5 or more or 3 or less) (S1905: No), next, whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is greater than 4 (S1908), and if it is greater than 4 (S1908: Yes), whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect based on the value of the notice determination counter 223j and the continuous notice determination table 222c (see FIG. 19C). Is determined (S1909). In addition, in the continuous notice effect, the effect is executed over five fluctuating effects. Therefore, even if the continuous notice effect is set when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is larger than 4, “renso” There is no transition to the “state” (this is a so-called gassing effect).

  If it is determined by the process of S1910 that the continuous notice effect is to be executed (S1910: Yes), the process of S1906 and S1907 described above is executed to set the start of the continuous notice effect, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1910, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is not executed (S1910: No), the variation pattern effect for normal time corresponding to the variation time notified by the variation pattern command is obtained from the variation pattern table 222a. After extracting (S1911), this process is terminated.

  In the process of S1908, when it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is not larger than 4 (3 or less) (S1908: No), the remaining short time period is 4 times in a state where the continuous notice effect is not set. Since this means that the following has occurred, it is next determined whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 0 (S1912). That is, it is determined whether or not the short time period of the normal symbol ends due to the current fluctuation.

  When it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is not 0 by the processing of S1912 (S1912: No), the fluctuation pattern effect for normal time corresponding to the fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command is extracted ( S1911), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 0 (S1912: Yes), the variation pattern effect (selectable when the last variation in the short time state of the normal symbol is executed from the variation pattern table 222a ( The fluctuation pattern effect corresponding to the ceiling notification notice) is extracted, and this processing is terminated.

  By this continuous notice setting process (S1703), a continuous notice effect can be set. Therefore, when a continuous notice effect that is easy to be set when the state is a “long-run state” is set, “ It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the “ream” state.

  Next, the ceiling notification process (S1610) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the ceiling notification process (S1610). This ceiling notification process determines whether or not to shift to the “rengo state” based on the look-ahead result notified by the winning information command, and at the stage when it is determined that the “rensou state” is to be entered. This is a process for informing the person to stop the launch of the ball.

  In this ceiling notification process, first, it is determined whether or not the pre-read result notified by the winning information command is winning information indicating a jackpot (S2001), and if it is a jackpot (S2001: Yes), the short time period is reset. Therefore, this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the pre-read result is out of the special symbol (S2001: No), the value (A) of the ceiling number counter 223e is read (S2002), and it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is zero. (S2003).

  Then, if the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 0 (S2003: Yes), since the time of the normal symbol is not short, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is not 0 (1 or more) (S2003: No), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S2004), and the ceiling number counter It is determined whether or not the difference between the value (A) of 223e and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 0 (S2005). That is, it is determined whether or not the short time state of the normal symbol is finished when the fluctuating effect for the number of reserved balls is executed.

  In the process of S2005, when it is determined that the difference between the value (A) of the ceiling number counter 223e and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is not 0 (S2005: No), the number of reserved balls Since the short time period does not end even when the fluctuating effect is executed, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference between the value (A) of the ceiling number counter 223e and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 0 (S2005: Yes), the back flag 223g is read ( S2006), the notification back type corresponding to the current back is specified from the notification setting table 222b4 (see FIG. 18B) (S2007).

  Next, a display rear image change command corresponding to the specified back surface type is set (S2008), a value corresponding to the background type after the change is set in the back surface flag 223g (S2009), and this process ends. The display rear image change command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image in the third symbol display device 81.

  By executing this ceiling notification process, it is possible to prompt the stop of the ball launch when the time-saving state of the normal symbol ends by executing the entry to the reserved first entrance 64. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of reserved balls exceeding the remaining short time period from being held. It is possible to suppress the lottery of the special symbol 1 from being executed during the “ream” state based on the entry to the first entrance 64 held during the short time state of the symbol. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the fact that the “renzo state” ends up being a big hit with the special symbol 1 lottery during the “renso state”. You can entertain "state".

  Note that the notification back type is not limited to the case where the short time period has elapsed. For example, even when the continuous notice effect of the gaze is set, it may be configured to change to the back type for notification by receiving a winning command corresponding to the last variation effect of the continuous notice effect. . This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect is a frustration, so that the player can be more interested in confirming the continuous notice effect to the end.

  Also, when a winning information command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B is received, it may be changed to the back type for notification. When it becomes a probable jackpot B, it will be in the “rengo state” after the jackpot is over, so by prompting the player to stop launching the ball to the first entrance 64, the “renja state” was played. The special symbol 1 is drawn with the holding ball, and it is possible to prevent the “ream state” from ending by winning the normal jackpot A or the probable jackpot A.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the variable display setting process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1413). This variable display setting process (S1413) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, is off) (S2101: No), the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S2106. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S2102), and then the process of S1712 of the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 47), or In the processing of S1907, S1911, and S1913 of the continuous notice setting processing (see FIG. 49), the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2104). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S2105). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2106.

  In the processing of S2106, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2106). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, is off) (S2106: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus this change display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2106: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S2107), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2108).

  Next, in order to set the extracted stop type (stop type notified from the main control device 110), a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is displayed. Settings are made for transmission to the device 114 (S2109). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 65, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2301.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2302, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2302, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2303). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 52). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 52) (S2305), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  Thus, by executing the boot process (S2201), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. Are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 53, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2302 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2303 to S2305 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2301 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, the process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently setting the head address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2301. In addition, the processing of S2303 to S2305 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2302.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2303 to S2305 without performing the processes of S2301 and S2302. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2203, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2204, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2205). As a result, when the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 63A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S3702 in FIG. 63A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B), the simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 21 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2508 in FIG. 54B) and simple display setting processing (see S2509 in FIG. 54B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. In the case of being via the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 21B and 21C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2205, interrupt permission is set (S2206). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 30) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 54B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2501: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2502) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2503) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2502), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2503), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502) or the like, the third symbol display device 81 should display one frame to be displayed next. The content of the image is specified specifically. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2504). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2503) or the simple display setting process (S2509). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2505) are used. 30 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2507). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when reception of a display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, a stop corresponding to the stop type (various jackpots, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / back outreach, complete out) indicated by the display stop type command The type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2508) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2509) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, details of the above-described command determination process (S2502), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 55, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2601: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2602), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S2603).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S2604). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2604: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2605), the process returns to S2601.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 56A, details of the variation pattern command processing (S2605) will be described. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Of the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2701 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2703, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2706), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2705 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2702. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2704, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2604 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2606). If there is a display variation type command (S2606: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2607), and the processing returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2607) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (any one of the big hits, front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / back out of reach, or complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2801). The change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is compared between the stop type table and the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B) is executed. A stop symbol after production is finally set (S2802).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2802 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S2803), and this process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2802 is described. In the task process (S2504) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2803, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2802.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2606 that there is no display stop type command (S2606: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2608). If there is a command opening command (S2608: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2609), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S2609) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2905), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2904, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901, The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of one frame image to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2902. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required after the opening effect is finished until the round effect is started. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for one round or four rounds). Since the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, the ending effect is started after the round effect is finished. There was a lot of waiting time, and there was a fear that the player might feel uneasy about whether the operation stopped or feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a display opening command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that point, and until the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. As a result, when the opening effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for five rounds) can be started. ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect ends before the variation effect that is a big hit ends in the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, when the variation effect that becomes a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is finished, the opening effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so the player is concerned that the operation has not stopped. And it does not make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2608 that there is no display opening command (S2608: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2610). If there is a round number command for use (S2610: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2611), and the processing returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2611) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. The table buffer 233d is set (S3001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3002).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3005), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2610 that there is no display round number command (S2610: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2612). If there is an ending command for use (S2612: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S2613), and the processing returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2613) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3102). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S3101 is turned on, Data table determination flags corresponding to other ending display data tables are set to OFF (S3103). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of which ending effect corresponds to by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3103. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3104), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3105). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3106), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2612 that there is no display ending command (S2612: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2614). If there is a change command (S2614: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2615), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2615) will be described. FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag is set to ON (S3201). When the rear image change flag is on, it is determined that the rear image needs to be changed in response to the reception of the rear image change command in the normal image transfer setting process (S3703). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to G), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3202), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64), when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3201 is turned on, the back surface after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3202. Specify the image type. When the specified back image type is back B to back G, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to these back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that when the rear image type after the change is the rear A, since all the image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235c, the image is not transferred.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the backs A to G is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S3202 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S3202, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2614 that there is no rear image change command (S2614: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2616), and there is an error command. If this is the case (S2616: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2617), and processing returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2617) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3301). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3302). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3301, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3302 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3302 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2616 that there is no error command (S2616: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2618), and the processing returns to S2601.

  In the process of S2601, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes). ), The processing of S2602 to S2618 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2601 to S2618 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2601 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2509) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 56 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 56 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 56A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2701. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2702, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2503), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 60, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3401). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3401: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3402 to S3404 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3405. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3401: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S3402), and S3403 to S3404. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3403). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3403: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3404).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3501).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3501, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3502), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3404) or in the process of S3403, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3403: No), the process proceeds to S3405.

  In S3405, pointer update processing is executed (S3405). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3601). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3601, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3602). As a result, if it is End information (S3602: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3603), and if it is a demo display data table (S3603: Yes), the display data table buffer Time data corresponding to the production time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3604), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3605), this processing is terminated, and the display is completed. Return to the setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3603: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3606). ), This process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which End information is written is set. Since the drawn contents are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3602, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3602: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3406). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3406 together with the warning image previously expanded and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3407), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3408). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3408: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3408: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3409).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3409: Yes), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet, and the confirmed display effect is at the timing of performing the confirmed display. Therefore, first, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3410), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3411). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3412), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3413). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3414), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3415), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S3415 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task process (S2504), until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started, the previous stop change determination flag set in S3415 is specified and the stop effect of the change effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3409, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3409: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3416). If the demo display flag is off (S3416: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S3417), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3418). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3419). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3420), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3421), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set to be displayed.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3416: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2509) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 21B and 21C) be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2505), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3701, that is, if it is off (S3701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3702), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3702).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3801), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3801: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3802). In the process of S3802, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3802 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3802: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3802: Yes), the process proceeds to S3803. Also, as a result of the process of S3801, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3801: No), the process proceeds to S3803.

  In the process of S3803, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3803). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S3803: No), that A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3803 (S3803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3805), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 54B) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 54B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 55 to 59) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) (see S3701: No in FIG. 63A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3703), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3703).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3405) of the display setting process (S2503) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3902). If it is transfer data information (S3902: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3903) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3905.

  In the process of S3902, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3902: No), the processes of S3903 and S3904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3905. In the process of S3905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3906).

  In the process of S3906, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process in S3906 (S3906: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3906: Yes), the process proceeds to S3907. Also, as a result of the process of S3905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3905: No), the process proceeds to S3907.

  In the process of S3907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3907). If the transfer start flag is on (S3907: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3908), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3903 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3907: No), it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3909: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3910), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3911). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3912), and the process proceeds to S3913.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3911, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3913, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913). The determination in the process of S3913 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3913 (S3913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3913 (S3913: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3914). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3914, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3915), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2506), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the drawing list shown in FIG. 30 is generated (S4001). That is, in the process of S4001, the storage RAM type and address for storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S4002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes, as the drawing target buffer information, information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4002, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S4003). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 54B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, two types of entrances, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, are provided as entrances that trigger the lottery of special symbols. It is possible to win a large amount of prize balls by winning a lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640, so that it is easy to win a jackpot type (probable bonus jackpot D) advantageous to the player It is configured. In addition, in a low probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol, the ball is configured to be difficult to enter the second entrance 640 and the entrance to the first entrance 64 When a special symbol jackpot is won in the lottery based on the, it is difficult to get a prize ball, and it is easy to win the jackpot (probable variation jackpot A) that shifts to the short time state of the normal symbol after the jackpot ends Yes. That is, it is configured such that a state where it is difficult to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 is easily repeated. Then, by ending the short-time state of the normal symbol, it is configured to shift to a state where the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 (“continuous state”). By being “probable jackpot D”, after the jackpot is over, it is configured to shift again to the “rensou state”.

  For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the “ream” state. Here, in order to end the normal symbol short-term period and shift to the “ream” state, the special symbol will be removed continuously for the same number of times as the normal symbol short-term period set after the end of probability variation jackpot A. It is necessary to become. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the “ream villa state” is approaching as the special symbol continues to deviate, so even if the special symbol deviates continuously, the player's motivation for the game Can be maintained.

  In a general pachinko machine, a player plays a game with the main purpose of being a big hit, so there is no merit for the continuation of special symbols. Therefore, there is a risk that the motivation for the player's game will decrease as the detachment continues. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the closer to the special symbol, the closer to the “resort state” that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a novel game that can be played.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, 64 types of “probable variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64” are given as the jackpot types to which the short time period of the normal symbol is given when the special symbol 1 is won by lottery. The jackpot type is provided. These 64 types of jackpots are different in the short time period of the normal symbol to be given, so the ease of transition to the “long-run state” varies depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, even if the player recognizes that it has been a big hit (the short time period has been reset), the short time period that has passed so far is suppressed from being thought to be wasted, and the short hit time Can be expected. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from being shot at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes extremely long. (It will be 3 to 5 minutes). Further, the opening period in which the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit is set to a short time (0.2 seconds × 1 time). As a result, even if it is possible to enter the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a is hardly opened (released at a frequency of 0.2 seconds in a few minutes). It is possible to prevent the player from launching a ball toward the second entrance 640 provided on the downstream side thereof. In other words, the player intentionally enters the second entrance 640 with the aim of winning the “probable jackpot D” that can obtain a large amount of prize balls even though it is not in the “ream” state. It is possible to suppress the playing of a game method to try to make a ball.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the detour accessory 700 is provided on the upstream side of the second entrance 640, the ball reaches the second entrance 640 after launching the ball. It takes more than 7 seconds to complete. Therefore, even if a ball is launched after recognizing that the electric accessory 640a is opened, the electric accessory 640a is closed before the ball reaches the second entrance 640 (0.2 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream state”. Furthermore, when there is an ordinary symbol holding ball, the fluctuation time is shortened. Therefore, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol held for about one second after the completion of one fluctuation, and the opening of the electric accessory 640a. Is configured to end. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a ball from entering the second entrance 640 when the ball is launched after the electric accessory 640a is opened, regardless of whether or not there is an ordinary symbol holding ball. Can do.

  Further, as described above, even if a ball can be entered into the second entrance 640, if the special symbol is changing, the entry is discarded without being suspended. That is, in a state other than the “ream” state, the fluctuation time becomes extremely long, and even if a ball is entered into the second entrance 640 during the fluctuation, a special symbol is based on the entry. No 2 lottery will be held. Therefore, in order to receive the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is necessary to make the ball enter the second entrance 640 again after the variation effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 is completed. In a state other than the “rengo” state, the variation pattern type of the variation time of 300 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol 2, so that the lottery can be received only every 300 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, the game efficiency will be extremely deteriorated, so that even if it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls when “probable big hit D”, the player will feel that it is not worth it. Can do. Therefore, it can suppress that a player plays a game aiming at the 2nd entrance 640 in states other than a "rengo state".

  As described above, in a state other than the “ream villa state”, the player is prevented from launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 (that is, the ball is launched at the first entrance 64). In the “renso state”, since the ball can be launched aiming at the second entrance 640, the “probable big hit D” is won in a state other than the “renso state”, and a large number of prize balls are played. Can be prevented from being acquired by a person. In addition, only the special symbol 1 lottery is performed in a state other than the “renso state”, and only the special symbol 2 lottery is performed in the “renso state”. The ball exit rate can be brought close to the design value. Therefore, when a hall | hole performs sales prediction etc. from the design value of a payout rate, it can calculate more correctly.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the short time period of a normal symbol may be suggested by the classification of a back image. Specifically, if the back A (wilderness stage) is displayed, there is a high possibility that the remaining short time period is 21 or more, and if the back B (river stage) is displayed, the remaining short time is short. The possibility that the period is 20 times or less is high, and if the back surface C (Mori stage) is displayed, the possibility that the remaining short time period is 10 times or less is high. Thereby, since the remaining short time period can be predicted from the type of the back image, the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be confirmed more interestingly to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the time-short period has elapsed due to the prefetching (that is, when the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls is executed, the state shifts to the “resort state”). It is informed to stop the launch of the ball to the 1 entrance 64. Thereby, it can suppress that the number of reservation balls more than the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation until it transfers to a "rengo state" are accumulate | stored. That is, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the special symbol 1 from being executed on the basis of the reserved ball corresponding to the ball entering the first ball slot 64 after the transition to the “ream” state. Therefore, after becoming the “renso” state, the special jackpot 1 lottery results in a normal jackpot A or a probable jackpot A, and the “renso state” ends without receiving any benefits of the “renso state”. Can be suppressed. Therefore, when the state shifts to the “renzo state”, the player can sufficiently enjoy the “renso state”.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In the above embodiment, the rear image is changed at the start of the variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rear image may be changed at the end of the change. Thereby, since the process which performs a fluctuation pattern, and the process which changes a back image can be performed at a different timing, the processing load by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the special symbol 2 is drawn and a big hit is made, the same is true if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the “ream” state. The jackpot type is selected, but a different jackpot type may be selected depending on whether or not it is in the “ream” state. If the state is not a “ream” state (ie, a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, or a high probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol) The jackpot type that is more disadvantageous to the user may be selected.

  As a disadvantageous jackpot, for example, if a special symbol 2 draws a lottery in a low probability state (non-probability change) of a special symbol or a short time state (probability change short time) of a normal symbol, a winning ball is obtained. It may be configured such that only jackpot types that are difficult to select are selected. In other words, in each round of jackpots, only the jackpot for which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 0.2 seconds elapses or five balls are won) is selected. May be. More specifically, for example, 5% of cases where a special symbol 2 is won in a lottery, the special symbol can be shifted to a low probability state (non-probability change) after winning the jackpot, and a prize ball can be obtained. It is configured to be a difficult normal jackpot C, and 95% of the bonuses in the special symbol 2 lottery are set, and after the jackpot is over, the short time period of the normal symbol is set 100 times, and a prize ball can be obtained. It may be configured to have a difficult probability variation jackpot E.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that no merit is produced for the player even if the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery. Therefore, although it is not in the “reaming state”, it is possible to make the gaming method that attempts to obtain a large number of prize balls by entering the balls into the second entrance 640 can be basically disabled. Since this pachinko machine 10 is designed assuming that only a special symbol 1 lottery is performed in a state other than the “renso state”, and only a special symbol 2 lottery is performed in the “renso state”. By preventing the player from aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state, the exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be brought close to the design value. Therefore, when a hall | hole performs sales prediction etc. from the design value of a payout rate, it can calculate more correctly.

  In the above embodiment, in a state other than the “rengo state”, the ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. In a state other than “”, when a ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, a notification may be given by a display image, voice, or the like so as to aim at the first entrance 64. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state. In addition, when a ball is launched at the first entrance 64 in the “ream” state, it may be notified that the ball is launched at the second entrance 640. As a result, it is possible to prevent the “Longsou state” from ending due to a normal jackpot A or a probabilistic jackpot A due to the lottery of the special symbol 1 in spite of the transition to the “Spansole state”. Can do. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from winning the “probable big hit D” in a state other than the “rengo” state and acquiring a large amount of prize balls by the player. The pachinko machine 10 is designed on the assumption that only the special symbol 1 lottery is performed in a state other than the “rengo state”, and only the special symbol 2 lottery is performed in the “renso state”. Therefore, by preventing the player from aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state, the exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be brought close to the design value. Therefore, when a hall | hole performs sales prediction etc. from the design value of a payout rate, it can calculate more correctly.

  As a trigger for notification, for example, sensor means capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided for the opening 710 of the detouring accessory 700, and the passage of the sphere is detected by the sensor means in a state other than the “ream” state. The notification may be executed when the error is detected. Further, the notification may be executed when the entrance to the normal entrance 67 is detected in a state other than the “ream state”. This is because the normal entrance 67 is on the upstream side of the second entrance 640, so that it is easier for the ball to enter the normal entrance 67 by launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640. . Thereby, since it is not necessary to provide a sensor means newly, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. As control for executing notification when a ball enters the normal entrance 67, the free state flag 203i is turned off in S614 or S619 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36). (S614: No, or S619: No), it may be configured to set a command for causing the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to perform notification. That is, a command is set to alert the player who has launched a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 even though it is not in the “ream” state, using a warning image or warning sound. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may output to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 in the external output process (S1001) in the main process (refer FIG. 40) of the control apparatus 110. FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the remaining time-short period until the villa state is reached is suggested depending on the type of the back image, but the suggesting method is not limited to this. For example, the character's clothes may be changed according to the remaining time in a short period, or the character itself may be changed to a different character (for example, a girl character). Moreover, you may comprise so that the display mode of a 3rd pattern may be changed according to the remaining time and a short time, a sound effect, a music, etc. may be changed. In addition, for example, the remaining short time standard may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with numerals or the like. In this case, it may be configured to display numbers less than the actual short time period with a certain probability (so-called gas display). In addition, in the case where the gusset display is performed, for example, when the continuous notice effect is failed, the number suggesting the remaining short time period may be increased and changed to a value corresponding to the actual short time period.

  In the present embodiment, the rear D (cave stage) is always displayed when in the “ream” state, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rear image may be changed from the back A to the back C with a low probability every time the fluctuating effect is executed even in the “ream” state. Further, in the “ream” state, when the back surface A to the back surface C are obtained, it may be configured to determine whether or not to return to the back surface D every time the changing effect is executed. In addition, when the “normal jackpot B” or “probable jackpot C”, which is a jackpot type that ends the “renso” state, is reached, the first specific winning a prize opening 65a is set for a predetermined time (maximum 0.2 seconds). ) It may be configured to be a jackpot that is opened, and may be configured to execute an effect similar to that in a normal time as an effect during the jackpot. In other words, even if “normal jackpot B” or “probability jackpot C” is set, it may be configured such that it is difficult for the player to notice that the jackpot has been won. Thereby, even if the back image is changed from the back D to any of the back A to the back C, whether the back type has been changed by satisfying the change condition of the back type during the “village state”, It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the rear face type has been changed based on the fact that “normal jackpot B” or “probable variation jackpot C” has been won and the “rensou state” has ended. Therefore, even if the back type is changed from the back D, the player can be made to think that the “rengo state” may still be continued. Even if it is, the game can be continued. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the first specific winning port 65a is opened when the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B is reached, but the first specific winning port 65a is opened in addition to the jackpot. You may comprise. For example, it is possible to provide a small hit that does not change after completion even if the winning is made, and the first specific winning opening 65a may be opened four times (four rounds) even if the winning is won. As a result, even if the operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is seen, it is not possible to determine whether it has won the small win or the probable big hit A or the probable big win B, so whether or not the short-term period has been reset. Can be harder to understand.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that when the number of reserved balls is digested by pre-reading, the state shifts to the “ream” state, the notification display is performed so as to stop the launch of the ball to the first entrance 64. In addition to this, when it is determined that the state shifts to the “ream villa state” by prefetching, the variation time until the suspension is digested is determined. An effect that suggests a “village state” may be set. Thereby, since various display effects can be performed, the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the “ream villa state”, the normal bonanza B or the probability variation jackpot C is configured so as not to end until the win is made, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if an upper limit (for example, 15 times) is set for the number of consecutive special symbol high probability states, and the special symbol high probability state is 15 times or more, the special symbol is low regardless of the type of jackpot. You may comprise so that it may transfer to a probability state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the “ream villa state” from continuing for a long time, and thus it is possible to suppress giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Characteristics A group> (Gameability for canceling the number of games with pachinko machines)
A entrance where a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the entrance, and a game ball that is less likely to enter the entrance than the first position. Variable means variable to two positions, passing means through which a game ball can pass, lottery means for executing a lottery based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and a predetermined lottery result by the lottery means Based on the fact that the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, then the variable is executed one or more times to change from the first position to the second position. The control unit and the mode from when the game ball passes through the passing unit to the end of the control by the variable control unit are set as the first mode until the specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition is satisfied. Based on the second mode different from the first mode A setting means and a disadvantageous state that is disadvantageous to the player when the first aspect is set by the aspect setting means, and the player is compared with the disadvantageous state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied And a state setting means for setting an advantageous state advantageous to the game machine A1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, No. 2514417).

  However, since the above-described conventional gaming machine cannot enjoy the winning game as long as it continues to be out of the lottery, the player's motivation for the game may decrease as the player continues to be out of the lottery. In other words, the long-awaited situation has caused the player to want to quit the game, and the operating rate of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first position where the game ball can enter the entrance, and the second position where the game ball can enter the entrance more easily than the first position. The variable means is varied. A lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position based on a predetermined lottery result by the lottery means. Control that is changed from the first position to the second position after being changed for a predetermined period is executed one or more times by the variable control means. The mode from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the control by the variable control means ends is set to the first mode by the mode setting means until the specific condition is satisfied. On the other hand, based on the establishment of the specific condition, the mode setting means sets the second mode different from the first mode. When the first mode is set by the mode setting means, an unfavorable state that is disadvantageous to the player is set by the state setting unit, while the specific condition is established, so that the player is compared with the unfavorable state. An advantageous advantageous state is set by the state setting means.

  Thereby, during the game, by checking whether the variable means is controlled in the first mode or the second mode, it is determined whether the advantageous state is set or the disadvantaged state is set. A player can play a game while predicting. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the state, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the aspect setting means sets the probability that the predetermined lottery result is the first lottery probability as the first aspect until the specific condition is satisfied, based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, as the second aspect, the probability of the predetermined lottery result is set to a second lottery probability higher than the first lottery probability.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the probability that a predetermined lottery result is set as the first probability is set by the mode setting means as the first mode until the specific condition is satisfied. On the other hand, based on the establishment of the specific condition, as the second mode, the mode setting means sets the second lottery probability that is higher than the first lottery probability by the predetermined lottery result.

  Thus, until the specific condition is satisfied, the first lottery probability that is likely to be a predetermined lottery result is set by the lottery means, which is advantageous to the player, while the state setting means sets the disadvantaged state. On the other hand, after the specific condition is satisfied, a second lottery probability that is unlikely to be a predetermined lottery result is set by the lottery means, which is disadvantageous for the player, while the state setting means sets the advantageous state. That is, in both cases, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which an advantageous aspect and an unfavorable aspect are set to coexist, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine A2, a specific lottery means that can execute a lottery based on a game ball entering the entrance, and a player determines a predetermined lottery based on a specific lottery result by the specific lottery means. Bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game that can acquire the game value of the game, a first bonus game as the bonus game to be given by the bonus game granting means, and a player than the first bonus game has the game value A bonus game selection means capable of selecting at least a second bonus game that is likely to be obtained in a large amount, and the mode setting means sets a probability that the predetermined lottery result is obtained based on completion of the first bonus game. Based on the fact that the first lottery probability is set, and the first lottery probability is set, the second lottery result is different from the specific lottery result by the specific lottery means continuously for a predetermined number of times. The state setting means sets the disadvantageous state based on the end of the first privilege game, and the specific lottery continues for the predetermined number of times after the disadvantageous state is set. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the advantageous state is set based on the result of the winning lottery result by means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the lottery is executed by the specific lottery means based on the game ball entering the entrance, and the player obtains a predetermined game value based on the specific lottery result by the specific lottery means. Possible privilege games are awarded by the privilege game granting means. The privilege game selection unit selects the first privilege game as the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting unit, and the second privilege game where the player can easily obtain more game value than the first privilege game. The probability of a predetermined lottery result based on the end of the first privilege game is set as the first lottery probability by the aspect setting means. In addition, the second lottery probability is set by the aspect setting unit based on the fact that the specific lottery means results in a lottery result different from the specific lottery result a predetermined number of times after the first lottery probability is set. The disadvantageous state is set to the disadvantageous state by the state setting means based on the end of the first privilege game. Further, the advantageous state is set by the state setting means based on the fact that the specific lottery means and the lottery result is obtained continuously for a predetermined number of times after the disadvantaged state is set.

  Thereby, even if it is set in a disadvantageous state based on the first privilege game being granted, it can be shifted to the advantageous state if the losing lottery result can be continued a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in a disadvantageous state, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in the hope that the result of losing lottery will be continued, so that it is possible to provide novel gaming characteristics.

  In the gaming machine A3, the first bonus game is the off lottery until the second lottery probability is set after the first lottery probability is set by the mode setting means after the end of the first bonus game. The bonus game selection means is configured as a bonus game given by the bonus game granting means as a bonus game given by the bonus game selection means. A gaming machine A4, which is capable of selecting one award game.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first privilege game has a plurality of types in which the number of consecutive lottery results differs from the first lottery probability set by the mode setting means to the second lottery probability after the first privilege game ends. Among the plurality of types of first privilege games, one of the first privilege games is selected by the privilege game selection means as the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means.

  Thereby, even if a disadvantageous state is set by providing the first privilege game, the first privilege game of a type with a small number of consecutive lottery results until an advantageous state is set for the player. Can be expected to be selected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointed that the number of consecutive lottery results has been interrupted and disappointing the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, when the first lottery probability is set, the variable control means sets the second lottery probability during a period in which the variable means is changed to the first position. In such a case, the game machine A5 is set so as to be shorter than a period during which the variable means is changed to the first position.

  According to gaming machine A5, when the first lottery probability is set, the period for changing the variable means to the first position is changed, and when the second lottery probability is set, the variable means is changed to the first position. Since it is set by the variable control means so as to be shorter than the period, even if the second lottery probability is set, the game ball can easily enter the entrance. Therefore, since the lottery by the specific lottery means is not executed in spite of the advantageous state and the situation that the second privilege game is not granted can be suppressed for a long time, the player is in an advantageous state for the player. There is an effect that the game can be enjoyed without stress.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, period setting means for setting a period from when the predetermined lottery means results in the predetermined lottery result until the variable means is changed to the first position by the variable control means The period setting means sets a longer period when the first lottery probability is set than when the second lottery probability is set. .

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the period setting means sets the period from when the lottery means makes a predetermined lottery result until the variable control means changes the variable means to the first position. Further, when the first lottery probability is set, the period setting means sets a longer period than when the second lottery probability is set.

  Thereby, even if the second lottery probability is set, the game ball can easily enter the entrance. Therefore, since the lottery by the specific lottery means is not executed in spite of the advantageous state and the situation that the second privilege game is not granted can be suppressed for a long time, the player is in an advantageous state for the player. There is an effect that the game can be enjoyed without stress.

<Characteristic B group> (Do not turn Special Figure 2 at normal times)
A first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, a first entrance port provided in the first flow path and into which a game ball can enter, A lottery is made based on the second entrance provided in the second flow path and into which the game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. A lottery means to execute, a bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a lottery result obtained by the lottery means being a predetermined lottery result, and at least the second flow path during the predetermined period And a suppressing means for making it difficult for a lottery result of the lottery executed by the lottery means to be produced by flowing the game ball down to the first flow path as compared with the case of flowing the game ball down to the first flow path. A gaming machine B1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a case where a gaming method for intentionally generating a hit type having a lot of game value that can be acquired is executed, and there is a risk of causing unexpected damage to the hall. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the first entrance is provided in the first flow path, and the second entrance is provided in the second flow path different from the first flow path. A lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance, and the game is based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a predetermined lottery result. A privilege game advantageous to the user is granted by the privilege game giving means. The lottery result of the lottery executed by the lottery means as compared with the case where the game ball is caused to flow down to the first flow path by the suppression means by flowing the game ball down to the second flow path at least during a predetermined period Is hard to come out.

  Thereby, it can be made to feel that the 1st flow path wants to flow down rather than letting a game ball flow down with respect to the 2nd flow path where a lottery result is hard to come out at least for a predetermined period. Therefore, since the flow path through which the game ball flows down can be changed with respect to the player according to the period, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of striking the direction in which the game ball is launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B1, a first position at which a game ball can enter the second entrance, and a second position at which the game ball is less likely to enter the second entrance than the first position. Variable means variable to,
Passing means through which the game ball can pass, specific lottery means for executing a lottery based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and the variable means based on a specific lottery result by the specific lottery means Variable control means for performing control one or more times to change from the first position to the second position after changing the second position from the second position to the first position, And when changing the variable means to the first position during the predetermined period, the variable means is controlled to be in the first position during the first period, and the variable means is controlled outside the predetermined period. When changing to the first position, the variable means is controlled to be in the first position for a second period longer than the first period, and the suppressing means is the second flow path. Game balls that flowed down The time to reach to the second ball entrance port, a game machine, characterized in that it comprises a flow-down delay means for longer than the first period B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the lottery is executed by the specific lottery means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and the game ball is unlikely to enter the variable means based on the specific lottery result obtained by the specific lottery means. The variable control means executes control one or more times by changing from the first position to the second position after changing the position from the position to the first position where the game ball can enter. When changing the variable means to the first position during the predetermined period, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is in the first position during the first period. On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the first position outside the predetermined period, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is in the first position for a second period longer than the first period. In the suppression means, the period until the game ball that has flowed down to the second flow path reaches the second entrance is longer than the first period by the flow-down delay means.

  As a result, when the player launches a game ball into the second flow path after confirming that the variable means has been changed to the first position during the predetermined period, the game ball enters the second entrance. , So that the player can aim the first flow path for a predetermined period. Therefore, since the flow path through which the game ball flows down can be changed with respect to the player according to the period, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of striking the direction in which the game ball is launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game in which the player can easily obtain more game value than the first privilege game are selected as the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means. Possible bonus game selection means, wherein the bonus game selection means has a predetermined lottery result by a lottery executed based on a game ball entering the second entrance In addition, it is easier to select the second privilege game than the predetermined lottery result obtained by the lottery executed based on entering the first entrance. B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the player can easily obtain more game value than the first privilege game are selected by the privilege game selection device as the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means. The Here, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained by a lottery executed based on the game ball entering the second entrance, the game ball enters the first entrance. It becomes easier for the bonus game selection means to select the second bonus game than when the lottery executed based on the lottery results in a predetermined lottery result.

  Thereby, it can control that a game is aimed at the 2nd entrance during a predetermined period, and only the 2nd privilege game continues. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

  In the gaming machine B3, the first variable state setting means for setting the variable means to a first variable state in which the variable control means is not easily changed to the first position by the variable control means during the predetermined period, and the predetermined period ends. Based on the first variable state, the second variable state setting means for setting the variable means to a second variable state that is more likely to be changed to the first position than the first variable state. The game machine B4 is characterized in that the game ball is easier to enter the second entrance when compared to the first variable state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, during the predetermined period, the variable means is set by the first variable state setting means to the first variable state that is not easily changed to the first position. Based on the end of the predetermined period, the variable means is set to the second variable state that is more likely to be changed to the first position than the first variable state by the second variable state setting means. Further, in the second variable state, when the ball is launched into the second flow path, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second entrance than in the first variable state.

  Accordingly, during the predetermined period, the variable means is not easily changed to the first position, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance, so that the second flow is caused by flowing down the first flow path. You can make it seem more profitable than letting down the road. On the other hand, when the predetermined period is over, the variable means is easily changed to the first position, and it is easy to make the ball enter the second entrance, so that the second channel is made to flow down by flowing down the second flow path. A game can be performed with the aim of giving a bonus game. Therefore, since the flow path through which the game ball flows down according to the period can be divided, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, an acquisition unit that acquires information based on a game ball passing through the passing unit, and whether or not to change the variable unit to the first position based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit And a first period as a period from when it is determined that the variable means is changed to the first position until the variable means is set to the first position by the variable setting means. A period setting means capable of setting at least a second period shorter than the first period; and setting the variable means to the first position by the variable setting means, then ending the first position, Variable period setting means capable of setting at least a first variable period and a second variable period shorter than the first variable period as a period until returning to the first variable period, and the period setting means includes the second variable state In which the second period is easier to set than the first variable state, and the variable period setting means is more likely to set the second variable period in the second variable state than in the first variable state. And the time from when the game ball passes through the passing means until it reaches the entrance is longer than the sum of the second period and the second variable period. Machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, information is acquired by the acquiring means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and the determining means determines whether or not the variable means is changed to the first position based on the information acquired by the acquiring means. Is done. As a period from when it is determined that the variable position is changed to the first position by the determining means until the variable means is set to the first position by the variable setting means, there are a first period and a second period shorter than the first period. At least set by the period setting means. Here, in the second variable state, the second variable period is more easily set by the variable period setting means than in the first variable state. The time from when the game ball passes through the passing means until it reaches the entrance is longer than the sum of the second period and the second variable period.

  As a result, even if the game ball is caused to flow down to the second flow path after confirming that the variable means has been changed to the first position, the game ball will not reach the second entrance. The variable means can be reliably changed to the second position. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the second privilege game from being given when the player causes the game ball to flow down to the second flow path during the predetermined period.

  The gaming machine B5 includes launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game board at an interval not falling below a predetermined lower limit period, wherein the second variable period is shorter than the lower limit period. A gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced. That is, a game ball is fired onto the game board by the launching means at intervals that do not fall below a predetermined lower limit period. Here, the second variable period is set to be shorter than the lower limit period.

  Thereby, even if game balls are continuously fired in a predetermined period, the number of game balls that reach the second entrance during the second variable period can be limited to one. Therefore, there is an effect that a plurality of game balls can be prevented from entering the second entrance in the second variable period.

  In any one of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the second variable state setting unit is configured to change the second variable state so that a period during which the variable unit is set to the second position is shorter than the first variable state. A gaming machine B7, which is for setting a state.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the second variable state is set such that the period during which the variable means is set to the second position is shorter than the first variable state. Since it is set by the second variable state setting means, it is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the second entrance in a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more surely prevent the player from flowing down the game ball to the second flow path aiming at becoming the second privilege game in the predetermined period.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the restraining means is a result of the lottery after the lottery means starts the lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance during the predetermined period. The gaming machine B8 is characterized by comprising a lottery period varying means for varying a period until the time is reached so that it becomes longer than after the predetermined period ends.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B7, the result of the lottery after the lottery starts based on the fact that the ball enters the second entrance during the predetermined period. Since the period until the game starts is varied by the lottery period variable means so as to be longer than after the predetermined period is completed, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance in the predetermined period. It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second entrance after the period ends. Therefore, it is possible not to aim at the second flow path during the predetermined period but to launch the sphere aiming at the second flow path after the end of the predetermined period. Therefore, since the method of launching the game ball can be changed according to the period, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B8, the lottery period varying means determines whether the lottery result after the lottery means starts the lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance after the predetermined period ends. The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that a time period until leaving is shorter than a case where a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the first entrance.

  According to the gaming machine B9, after the predetermined period is over, the lottery period from when the lottery based on the fact that the ball enters the second entrance is started by the lottery means is the lottery period. Since the variable means is changed so as to be shorter than the case where the lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the first entrance, the game ball is placed in the first flow path for a predetermined period. It is possible to increase the game efficiency when it is made to flow down. Therefore, the game ball can flow down to the first flow path until the predetermined period elapses, and the game ball can flow down to the second flow path after the predetermined period elapses. Therefore, since the method of launching the game ball can be changed according to the period, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic C group> (Production when canceling the number of games)
A entrance where a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the entrance, and a game ball that is less likely to enter the entrance than the first position. Variable means variable to two positions, passing means through which a game ball can pass, lottery means for executing a lottery based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and a predetermined lottery result by the lottery means Based on the fact that the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, then the variable is executed one or more times to change from the first position to the second position. The control unit and the mode from when the game ball passes through the passing unit to the end of the control by the variable control unit are set as the first mode until the specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition is satisfied. Based on the second mode different from the first mode It is characterized by comprising setting means and effect setting means for setting a game effect that makes it difficult to determine from the game effect that the mode setting means has set the first mode. Game machine C1.

  Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is a win, the game shifts to a win state, and after the jackpot ends, There are things that shift to a state that is advantageous to the player, such as a probability variation state. Among such gaming machines, there is one that notifies whether the gaming machine is in an advantageous state or an unfavorable state for a player (for example, JP-A-2004-24830).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since it is possible to easily detect whether or not the player is in a disadvantaged state, the player who senses the disadvantaged state may easily quit the game. It was. In addition, there is a case where a player who tries to start a game refrains from playing a game on a gaming machine in an unfavorable state. That is, there is a possibility that the operating rate of the gaming machine is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the variable control means makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the entrance from the first position where the game ball can enter the entrance, and from the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position. A lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Thereafter, the control for changing from the first position to the second position is executed one or more times by the variable control means. As a mode from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the control by the variable control means ends, the mode setting means sets the first mode until the specific condition is satisfied. Further, based on the specific condition being satisfied, the mode setting means sets the second mode different from the first mode. Here, the effect setting means sets a game effect that makes it difficult to determine from the game effect that the first setting is set by the mode setting means.

  This makes it difficult for the player to determine from the effect whether the first mode is set or the second mode is set, so whether the first mode is set for the player, The game can be performed while predicting whether the second mode is set. Therefore, since the player can feel the enjoyment of predicting the mode, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, a special lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition, and a special game that allows a player to acquire a predetermined game value based on a specific lottery result obtained by the specific lottery means. As a privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means to be given and the privilege game given by the privilege game granting means, the third privilege game, the second privilege game, and the third privilege game can be easily obtained in comparison with the second privilege game. Based on the privilege game selecting means capable of selecting at least a privilege game and the first privilege game being granted by the privilege game granting means, the privilege game selecting means is unlikely to select the third privilege game, Based on the fact that the second condition game is set to the first state in which the specific condition is difficult to be established, the third reward game is less likely to be selected, and the special condition is more than the first state. Set to a second state in which the condition is likely to be established, and set to a third state in which the third privilege game is more easily selected than the first state and the second state based on the establishment of the specific condition. State setting means, wherein the aspect setting means sets the first aspect based on the fact that the second privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means, and the effect setting means includes: A gaming machine C2 that sets a game effect that makes it difficult to determine from the game effect that the second privilege game has been granted.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a special lottery is executed by the specific lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and a special game that allows the player to acquire a predetermined game value based on the specific lottery result is given a special game. By means. As the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means, the first privilege game, the second privilege game, and the third privilege game that easily obtains the game value compared to the second privilege game are provided by the privilege game selection means. At least selected. Based on the provision of the first privilege game by the privilege game granting means, the state setting means sets the first state in which the third privilege game is not easily selected by the privilege game selection means and the privilege condition is difficult to be established. Further, based on the fact that the second privilege game is given, the third privilege game is hardly selected, and the state setting means sets the second state in which the specific condition is more easily established than in the first state. Further, the state setting unit sets the third state in which the third privilege game is easily selected as compared with the first state and the second state based on the establishment of the specific condition. The first mode is set by the mode setting unit based on the second bonus game being granted by the privilege game granting unit. A game effect that makes it difficult to determine from the game effect that the second privilege game has been granted is set by the effect setting means.

  Thereby, it can be made difficult to determine from the game effect whether the current state is the first state or the second state. That is, it can be difficult to determine whether or not the specific condition is easily established. Therefore, it can be determined that the current state is the first state in which the specific condition is less likely to be established than the second state, and the player can be prevented from quitting the game at that time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult to quit the game and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path that is different from the first flow path and is provided with the entrance, and the first A specific entrance that is provided in the flow path and into which a game ball can enter, and the specific lottery means is based on the game ball entering the entrance or the specific entrance The lottery is executed, and the bonus game selection means is configured to enter the specific entrance when the specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery executed based on entering the entrance. It is easier to select the third award game than the specific lottery result by the lottery executed based on entering the ball, and the mode setting means, as the first mode, If the probability of a lottery result is high and the predetermined lottery result is reached, the variable A mode in which the period during which the stage is changed to the first position is set short, and as the second mode, the probability of the predetermined lottery result is lower than that in the first mode, and the predetermined lottery result is The predetermined lottery is based on the fact that the variable period of time when the variable means is changed to the first position is longer than that of the first mode and the first privilege game is given. The probability that the result is lower than that of the first aspect, and the period during which the variable means is changed to the first position when the predetermined lottery result is reached is equal to or shorter than the length of the first aspect. The game machine C3 is set to three modes, and in the second mode, the game ball is easier to enter the entrance than in the first mode.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, a specific entrance that allows a game ball to enter is provided in the first flow path, and the entrance is provided in a second flow path different from the first flow path. The lottery is executed by the specific lottery means based on the game ball entering the specific entrance or the entrance. When a lottery executed based on entering the entrance gate results in a specific lottery result, a lottery executed based on entering the entrance into the specific entrance gate results in a specific lottery result It becomes easier for the third privilege game to be selected by the privilege game selection means. As the first mode, the mode setting unit sets a mode in which the probability that a predetermined lottery result is high and the variable unit is changed to the first position when the predetermined lottery result is short is set. Further, as a second mode, the probability that the predetermined lottery result is lower than that of the first mode, and when the predetermined lottery result is reached, the period during which the variable means is changed to the first position is the first mode. A comparatively long aspect is set by the aspect setting means. Further, the probability that a predetermined lottery result is obtained based on the first bonus game being given is lower than that in the first mode, and the variable means is changed to the first position when the predetermined lottery result is obtained. Is set to the third mode in which the period is equal to or shorter than the first mode. Here, in the second mode, it becomes easier for a game ball to enter the entrance than in the first mode.

  As a result, when the second mode in which the game ball can easily enter the entrance is set, the game ball is caused to flow down with respect to the second flow path, and the first mode and the third mode are set. If it is, the game ball can flow down with respect to the first flow path. Therefore, the pleasure which changes the flow path made to flow down according to the aspect set with respect to the player can be given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C3, based on the determination means that can determine whether or not the specific condition is satisfied before the specific condition is satisfied, and the determination means that the specific condition is satisfied, the game A gaming machine C4, comprising: an informing means for informing the player to stop the game ball from flowing down to the first flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, whether or not the specific condition is satisfied is determined by the determining means before the specific condition is satisfied, and it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the determining means. Based on this, the notification means notifies the player to stop the game ball from flowing down to the first flow path.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the lottery based on the entrance to a specific entrance is performed by the specific lottery means after specific conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it can suppress that the 1st privilege game or the 2nd privilege game is given by becoming a specific lottery result by the lottery by this specific lottery means, and the 1st mode or the 3rd mode is set up. . Therefore, after the specific condition is established, there is an effect that it is possible to sufficiently entertain the second mode in which the player can easily enter the game ball into the entrance.

  In the gaming machine C4, the lottery by the specific lottery means obtains information for acquiring lottery information by the specific lottery means based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the information obtained by the acquisition means. A storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit, and a prediction means capable of predicting a lottery result by the specific lottery means based on information being acquired by the acquisition means. The setting means sets the first mode until the predetermined lottery result is different from the specific lottery result continuously by the specific lottery means based on the given second bonus game being given. The second mode is set based on the fact that the specific lottery means results in the losing lottery result for the predetermined number of times after the second bonus game is granted. The discriminating unit discriminates whether or not the result of the lottery result is the predetermined number of times continuously based on the prediction result by the prediction unit, and the informing unit continuously performs the predetermined number of times by the discriminating unit. The game is characterized in that the player is informed to stop the flow of the game ball to the first flow path based on the fact that it is determined that the off lottery result is obtained. Machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, information for executing the lottery by the specific lottery means is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition means is predetermined until the lottery by the specific lottery means is performed. Are stored by the storage means. The lottery result by the specific lottery means is predicted by the prediction means based on the information being acquired by the acquisition means. The first mode is set by the mode setting unit until the predetermined lottery result is different from the specific lottery result continuously by the specific lottery unit based on the given second privilege game being given. In addition, the second mode is set by the mode setting unit based on the fact that the lottery means continuously loses the predetermined number of times after the second privilege game is given and results in the lottery result. Based on the prediction result by the prediction means, it is determined by the determination means whether or not a predetermined lottery result is obtained. Based on the fact that the discriminating means discriminates that the result is a lottery result for a predetermined number of times, the informing means informs the player to stop the game ball from flowing down to the first flow path.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the lottery with respect to the entrance into a specific entrance is performed by the specific lottery means based on the information memorize | stored by the memory | storage means after the 1st aspect is complete | finished. Therefore, it can suppress that the 1st privilege game or the 2nd privilege game is given by becoming a specific lottery result by the lottery by this specific lottery means, and the 1st mode or the 3rd mode is set up. . Therefore, after the specific condition is established, there is an effect that it is possible to sufficiently entertain the second mode in which the player can easily enter the game ball into the entrance.

  In the gaming machine C5, based on the number of times discriminating means for discriminating the number of consecutive times of the outlier lottery result after the end of the second privilege game, the number of consecutive times discriminated by the number of times discriminating means, and the predetermined number of times A gaming machine C6, comprising: an effect mode setting means for setting an aspect of the game effect executed by the effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of consecutive losing lottery results after the end of the second award game is determined by the number determining means, and the effect executing means is executed based on the continuous number determined by the number determining means and the predetermined number of times. The aspect of the game effect is set by the effect mode setting means.

  Thereby, the player can be provided with the pleasure of predicting the remaining number of times up to a predetermined number of times based on the aspect of the game effect set by the effect mode setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C5 or C6, the effect setting means includes dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the specific lottery means, and the effect setting means indicates the second privilege game. As the identification information, the same identification information as the identification information indicating the losing lottery result can be set as the identification information indicating the lottery result, and the gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5 or C6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the effect setting means, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the specific lottery means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means. As the identification information indicating the second privilege game, the same identification information as the identification information indicating the off lottery result is set by the effect setting means as the identification information indicating the lottery result.

  Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that it has become the second privilege game in which the game value is less likely to be obtained than the third privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because it is difficult to obtain the game value.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, when the third mode is set by the state setting unit, the effect setting unit is the case where the first mode and the second state are set A gaming machine C8, which sets different game effects.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, when the first mode and the second state are set when the third mode is set by the state setting means Since the aspect of the game effect different from that is set by the effect setting means, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that it is an advantageous state that is likely to become the third privilege game.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B9, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B9, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B9, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
67 Normal entrance (passage means)
64 1st entrance (1st entrance)
640 Second entrance (second entrance)
640a Electric accessories (variable means)
700 Detouring part (part of suppression measures)
S106 Variable control means S213 Bonus game grant means S303, S304 Part of lottery means S507, S508 Part of lottery means S610, S611 Particular lottery means S617, S621 Part of suppression means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by making different game values that can be acquired.

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

  However, since the conventional gaming machine described above cannot enjoy the winning game as long as it continues to be out of the lottery, there is a risk that the motivation for the player's game will decrease as the player continues to be out of the lottery.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in games.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided in a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first flow path. A first entrance through which a game ball can enter, a second entrance through which the game ball can enter and provided in the second flow path, the first entrance, or the second entrance. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on a game ball entering a ball opening, and a privilege for giving a special game advantageous to a player based on a lottery result obtained by the lottery means being a predetermined lottery result This is executed by the lottery means in comparison with the case where the game ball is caused to flow down to the first flow path by flowing the game ball down to the second flow path at least during a predetermined period. Suppression means for making it difficult for a lottery result to be obtained.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first entrance is provided in the first flow path, and the second entrance is provided in the second flow path different from the first flow path. A lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance, and the game is based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a predetermined lottery result. A privilege game advantageous to the user is granted by the privilege game giving means. The lottery result of the lottery executed by the lottery means as compared with the case where the game ball is caused to flow down to the first flow path by the suppression means by flowing the game ball down to the second flow path at least during a predetermined period Is hard to come out.

  Thereby, it can be made to feel that the 1st flow path wants to flow down rather than letting a game ball flow down with respect to the 2nd flow path where a lottery result is hard to come out at least for a predetermined period. Therefore, since the flow path through which the game ball flows down can be changed with respect to the player according to the period, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of striking the direction in which the game ball is launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the detouring part of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first random number table, (c) is FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the specified contents of a first hit type selection table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the classification selection table for special figure 1, and (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the classification selection table for special figure 2 typically. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between probability variation jackpots A1 to A64 and a short time period, and (b) schematically shows short-term and short-term allocation when probability variation jackpot A is reached. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the probability variation jackpots C1 to C6 and the short time period, and (b) schematically shows the short and short time allocation when the probability variation jackpot C is reached. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd per random number table, (b) is the block diagram which showed the content of the special figure fluctuation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the selection table for common probability variation non-shortening. (A) is a block diagram showing the contents of a general map variation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general map normal / probability change time selection table, (c) These are the schematic diagrams which showed typically the content of the selection table for common figure change non-shortening. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the state setting table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the method of the state transfer of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the contents of the back setting table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the back A setting table, and (c) is the back B setting table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of this. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the back C time setting table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the notification time switching table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the setting table at the time of ceiling reset, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the notification back side setting table, (c) These are the schematic diagrams which showed typically the content of the continuous notice determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surfaces BG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the actual display screen when the back surface A is set, (b) is a schematic diagram of the actual display screen when the back surface A is set. It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the actual display screen in case the back surface C is set, (b) is the continuous notice effect started in the state where the back surface C is set. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the actual display screen in the case. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an actual display screen during a continuous notice effect, and (b) shows a hold ball corresponding to the number of fluctuations until the end of the continuous notice effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the alerting | reporting image displayed in a case. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the actual display screen in the 4th variation | change effect of a continuous notice effect, (b) is the actual display screen in the last variation effect of a continuous notice effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the actual display screen when the back surface D is set, (b) is the actual case when it becomes a big hit in the state where the back surface D is set. It is the schematic diagram which showed the display screen typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the back and back setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the back side setting process at the time of a removal performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the ceiling alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the contents of the super reach effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later.

  When the normal reach production is started in the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach is developed from the super reach, the selection screen for the super reach production mode is displayed during the normal reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. It is done. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and the ball passes through the normal entrance 67. In this case, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and either the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time and released. Is repeated a number of times (1 round or 4 rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. Special jackpot types include “normal jackpot A”, “normal jackpot B”, “probable jackpot A1” to “probable jackpot A64”, “probable jackpot B”, “probable jackpot C1” to “probability jackpot C6”, 74 types of “probable jackpot D” are provided, and after the end of the special gaming state, game value (game value) according to these jackpot types is given to the player as added value after the jackpot ends The

  Whether the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is determined according to the jackpot type. Specifically, when winning “probability jackpot A1” to “probability jackpot A64” and “probability jackpot B”, the first specific winning a prize slot 65a is set for a predetermined time (0.2 seconds have passed) in each jackpot round. Or until 5 balls are won). Since it is difficult for the player to win the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a during the open period of 0.2 seconds, in most cases where the player wins the above-mentioned jackpot, the special game state is obtained without the player getting a prize ball. Is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type other than the above, in each jackpot round, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapses or five balls are won). For this reason, in many cases, when the second specific winning opening 650a is a jackpot that is opened, it is possible to win five balls in each jackpot round.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that when 12 balls are entered into the first specific winning port 65 and the second specific winning port 650a, 12 prize balls are paid out. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for one round (one time) ("normal jackpot A", "normal jackpot B", "probability jackpot C"), There is a jackpot ("jackpot D") that is opened four rounds (four times). In the jackpot where the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for one round (one time), a maximum of 60 (5 × 12 × 1 round) prize balls will be paid out. Considering the number of balls launched, the player can increase the number of possessed balls by about 50 before and after the jackpot. In other words, the difference between the number of prize balls that are paid out during the jackpot and the ball that the player hits during the jackpot is about 50 balls. Similarly, in the jackpot where the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for four rounds (four times), a maximum of 240 award balls are paid out. Therefore, considering the number of balls that the player has launched to obtain the award balls, Before and after the big hit, the player can increase the holding ball by about 200 balls. That is, the difference between the number of award balls that are paid out during the jackpot and the ball that the player hits during the jackpot is about 200 balls.

  When the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. On the other hand, if a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball is discarded without being held. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the special symbol lottery performed based on entering the first entrance 64 will be referred to as the special symbol 1 lottery (the special drawing 1 lottery). The special symbol lottery performed on the basis of having entered 640 is referred to as the special symbol 2 lottery (the special symbol 2 lottery).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. Easy state. That is, when the normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol 2 is easily drawn. In the following description, the term “the period in which the electric accessory 640a is opened” includes the opening period based on the normal symbol winning and the ending period (ball throwing period). In other words, in the case of “the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second”, an opening period is set based on the normal symbol hit, and after the opening period ends, the electric accessory 640a is opened and the second input Meaning that the ball is set in a state where the ball can enter the ball opening 640, and then the electric accessory 640a is closed and an ending period is set, and the period until the ending period ends is 1 second. doing. Therefore, the period during which the electric accessory 640a is actually opened is configured to be slightly shorter than 1 second.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, after the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83 and a predetermined time (for example, 1 second or 300 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, the special symbol jackpot types include “normal jackpot A”, “normal jackpot B”, “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64”, “probability variation jackpot B”, “probability variation jackpot C1” to “ There are 74 types of “probable big hit C6” and “probable big hit D”.

  When “ordinary jackpot A” or “ordinary jackpot B” is reached, a special gaming state (one round jackpot) in which the number of rounds is one round, and no added value is given after the jackpot ends. In addition, when “probability jackpot A1” to “probability jackpot A64” and “probability jackpot B” are all set to a special game state with four rounds (four round jackpot), and then the added value after the jackpot ends , Shift to a high probability state of the special symbol (while the special symbol is being changed). In addition, in “probability jackpot A1” to “probability jackpot A64”, as an added value after the jackpot end, the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases for a period determined for each jackpot type. For example, “probability jackpot A5” increases the probability of winning a normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery five times. Until the end of 73 times, the normal symbol hit probability increases (see FIG. 9A). The correspondence relationship between the jackpot type and the period in which the probability of winning a normal symbol increases will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  From “Probable jackpot C1” to “Probable jackpot C6”, the number of rounds becomes a special game state with one round (one round jackpot), and then, as a value added after the jackpot ends, a high probability state (special) Moves to (during symbol change). In addition, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases only during the period determined for each jackpot type. For example, “probability jackpot C1” increases the probability of winning a normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 10 times, and “probability jackpot C5” draws the special symbol after the jackpot ends. Until the end of 80 times, the normal symbol hit probability increases (see FIG. 10A).

  Furthermore, when “probability jackpot A” is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 4 rounds (4 round jackpot), and then, as a value added after the jackpot ends, to a high probability state of special symbols (during special symbol probabilities) It moves, but the probability of hitting a normal symbol does not increase.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, a transition to a special gaming state. It is an easy game state. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). In addition, “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) is more advantageous than the “normal symbol time-short state” state (normal symbol normal state) when the normal symbol lottery condition is satisfied. It refers to the state. Specifically, the “normal symbol time-short state” is configured such that the normal symbol hit probability is higher than the “normal symbol normal state”.

  Note that the method of making the “normal symbol time-short state” more advantageous than the “normal symbol normal state” is not limited to increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol. For example, when the normal symbol lottery condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) executed in the second symbol display device 83 may be shortened. In “Normal symbol short-time state”, the normal symbol time-varying state is shorter than “Normal symbol normal state”, so that “Normal symbol short-time state” draws more regular symbols at the same time. Can be made. Therefore, since the number of times that the normal symbol is hit increases, it can be advantageous for the player. Further, in the “ordinary symbol time-short state”, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a that is released when the normal symbol is hit may be longer than that in the “normal symbol normal state”. As a result, when the normal symbol is hit in the “normal symbol time-short state”, a larger number of balls can enter the second entrance 640.

  Further, in the “normal symbol time-short state”, a plurality of the above conditions may be combined. For example, in the “normal symbol short-time state”, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be increased, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a opened when the normal symbol hits may be increased. . Further, if at least one advantageous condition is set in the “normal symbol time-short state”, the other conditions may be disadvantageous compared to the “normal symbol normal state”. For example, in the “normal symbol short-time state”, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher (advantageous) compared to the “normal symbol normal state”, but compared to the “normal symbol normal state”. The variation time may be long. That is, although the number of times of normal symbol drawing is reduced, it may be easy to win when the normal symbol lottery is performed.

  Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol is referred to as a special symbol probability variation period. Further, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a normal symbol short time period. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, a short time period of a normal symbol is indicated by using the number of times of drawing a special symbol. For example, if “C5 Probability Bonus C5” is won, it is described that the short time period of the normal symbol is 80 times.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the special symbol has a low probability state, the normal symbol has a normal state, the special symbol has a high probability state, and the normal symbol has a short time state. The variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes extremely long (3 to 5 minutes) and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is shortened (0.2 seconds × 1 time). Yes. On the other hand, when the short time period of the normal symbol ends (the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the fluctuation time becomes short (becomes 1 second) and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is reduced. It is configured to be long (1 second × 3 times).

  This increases the probability of hitting the normal symbol during the short time period of the normal symbol, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes longer (3 to 5 minutes), so the direction of the normal entrance 67 (the game board 13 Even if the ball is continuously launched in the right direction), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened only every few minutes, and the opening time is shortened. That is, even if a ball is launched to the normal entrance 67, the possibility of drawing the special symbol 2 is reduced. If the special symbol 2 is not drawn, the game will not shift to the special game state (hit state), so the number of balls will decrease so that the ball is launched in the direction of the second entrance 640 during the short period of the normal symbol. End up.

  On the other hand, when the short time period of the normal symbol is completed as described above, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is lengthened, so that it is easy to make the ball enter the second entrance 640. . By configuring in this way, in order to receive the lottery of the special symbol 1 during the short time period of the normal symbol, the ball is launched aiming at the first entrance 64, and after the short time period of the normal symbol has passed, In order to receive the lottery of the special symbol 2, the ball can be launched aiming at the second entrance 640.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the big symbol is won by a lottery of the special symbol 1, a big hit that hardly obtains a prize ball (a big hit that opens the first specific winning port 65a) is made. It is structured to be easy to win. On the other hand, when the big symbol is won by lottery of the special symbol 2, it is easy to win a big hit (a big hit that opens the second specific winning port 650a) that makes it easy to obtain a lot of prize balls. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the aim of ending the short time period by repeating the lottery of the special symbol 1 during the short time period of the normal symbol. Then, after the short period of normal symbols is over, a game can be played aiming at the second entrance 640 in order to obtain a prize ball.

  In general gaming machines, players play games aiming to win big games, so discouragement that they didn't win big enough to keep out of the special symbol lottery will accumulate, There is a risk of reducing motivation. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the short-term period ends, the player shifts to a state where the special symbol 2 advantageous for the player can be easily drawn. Therefore, during the short-term period of the normal symbol, the player It is possible to request that the special symbols come off continuously. Therefore, even if the special symbol continues to be lost, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed with respect to the fact that the player did not win a big hit, so that novel gaming characteristics can be provided.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a big hit is made by lottery of the special symbol 2, it is easy to make the ball enter the second entrance 640 again after the big hit (the special symbol high). (Probability state and normal state of normal symbol). In other words, when a special symbol 2 is won by lottery, the short time period of the normal symbol is hardly given. As a result, once the short time period of the normal symbol can be ended, the state where it is easy to receive the special symbol 2 lottery and the big hit (probability big hit D) from which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained are likely to continue. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more strongly wish that the special symbol lottery continues to be missed during the normal symbol time. Therefore, even if the special symbol is not a big hit, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Hereinafter, the state in which the above-described special symbol 2 is likely to be drawn will be referred to as a “long villa state”.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed based on the power-on (when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the power is turned on), the “special symbol low probability state and , "Normal state of normal symbol" (normal state). In the “special symbol low probability state and normal symbol normal state” (normal state), as described above, the normal symbol fluctuation time becomes longer (3 to 5 minutes) and hits the normal symbol. In this case, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is also shortened (0.2 seconds × 1 time). That is, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 (the special symbol 2 is difficult to be drawn), which is disadvantageous for the player.

  Thereby, for example, when there is a pachinko machine 10 in the “continuous state” when the hall is closed, the pachinko machine 10 can be brought into the “normal state” only by initial setting of the pachinko machine 10. That is, when the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, an advantageous state (“continuous state”) does not occur. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 that was in the “ream villa state” at the closing time of the hall is prevented (suppressed) from remaining in the “ream villa state” even when the store is opened the next day regardless of whether there is an initial setting. As a result, it is possible to suppress the “continuous state” from continuing across business days and causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

  Furthermore, since the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the “normal state”, the hall clerk can easily put the pachinko machine 10 in a disadvantageous state when preparing for opening a store. In other words, in order to end the “ream villa state”, the clerk of the hall plays the game until the “ream villa state” ends on the pachinko machine 10 between the closing time of the hall and the opening time of the next business day. There is no need to carry out any major work. Therefore, the time and labor of the hall clerk can be reduced.

  In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a “ream villa state” due to the initial setting, for example, in the hall where the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed before opening the store, inequalities occur due to the time the player visits the store. End up. In other words, players who cannot come to the store at the opening time of the hall cannot basically shift to the “rensou state” unless a short period of time elapses, whereas players who can visit the store at the opening time of the hall Since the game can be started from the “ream” state without any trouble, inequality occurs between the players. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, even if the initial setting is performed, the state does not shift to the “renzo state”. A game can be performed. Therefore, a sense of equality can be given to the players.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball is discarded without being held. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, purple, and white) of the respective LEDs are different, and various games of the pachinko machine 10 with fewer LEDs depending on the combination of the emission colors. The state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a short time during normal symbols, etc.) can be displayed. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a big win, a special symbol corresponding to the jackpot type (first symbol) Is shown.

  Further, on the right side of the game area when viewed from the front (the right side in FIG. 2), a detour accessory 700 is provided in which a ball launched to the right side of the game board 13 can enter the inside. This detour accessory 700 is provided to lengthen the time until the ball launched to the right side of the game board 13 reaches the second entrance 640 (more than 7 seconds after being launched). ing. By increasing the arrival time at the second entrance 640, a state other than the “ream state” (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, or a high probability state of a special symbol, and When the normal symbol is hit in the normal symbol time-short state), the ball reaches the second entrance 640 during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640. Can be suppressed. That is, even if the player hits the ball after recognizing that the electric accessory 640a is opened, the electric accessory 640a is closed while the ball is flowing down the detour accessory 700, It is configured so that the ball cannot enter the 2 entrance 640.

  As described above, in the “rensou state”, it is easy to win a big hit (probability big hit D) that allows a large amount of winning balls to be obtained by entering the ball into the second entrance 640. That is, it is configured to be advantageous to the player by winning a big win by drawing the special symbol 2. Therefore, even in a state other than the “rengo state” (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, or a high probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol), the “probability big hit D There is a possibility that the player hits the ball in an attempt to enter the second entrance 640 with the aim of winning. In order to suppress such a gaming method, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, by providing the detouring accessory 700, the player can play the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state. It is configured so that it is difficult to intentionally enter the ball.

  Details of the detour accessory 700 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detour accessory 700. As shown in FIG. 3, the detour accessory 700 is provided with an opening 710 at the top thereof. The ball can enter the inside of the detouring accessory 700 through the opening 710. In addition, an opening 720 for discharging the sphere that has flowed down in the detour bonus 700 to the outside of the detour bonus 700 is provided at the lower part of the detour bonus 700. Further, in the detouring accessory 700, the frontal front side, the rear side, and the left-right direction are prevented by the peripheral edge portion 730 in order to prevent the sphere that has progressed inside from being discharged outside without passing through the opening 720. The four directions are enclosed. Since the peripheral edge portion 730 is made of a translucent member (for example, PS material), the player can easily see how the ball flows down.

  Moreover, since the plane on the back side in the front view of the peripheral edge portion 730 can be assembled so as to be substantially the same plane as the base plate 60, a gap is generated between the peripheral edge portion 730 and the base plate 60. It is possible to prevent the sphere from being caught in the gap. Furthermore, since the front plane front side of the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are configured to contact each other without a gap when the front frame 14 is closed, the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are in contact with each other. It is possible to prevent the sphere from being caught in the gap.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of flow paths (guide flow paths 740 to 790) that are inclined toward the lower side of the detour combination 700 are provided inside the detour combination 700. In each of the guide channels 740 to 790, the surface with which the sphere contacts has a substantially flat plate shape, and the width is the width of the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 (the inner wall on the back side in front view and the inner wall on the front side in front view). The distance between the two is substantially the same. That is, a gap is formed between the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 and each of the guide passages 740 to 790, so that a sphere can be prevented from passing through the gap.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the guide channels 740, 760, and 780 are inclined in a direction downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction. In addition, the guide channels 750, 770, and 790 are inclined in a direction downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction. In addition, guide channels 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, and 790 are arranged in order from the upper side of the detouring accessory 700. That is, a flow path that is inclined in a downward direction from the upper right direction in the front view to a lower left direction and a flow path that is inclined in a downward direction from the upper left direction in the front view are alternately provided.

  The ball that has entered the opening 710 first travels to the guide channel 740 and flows down in the lower left direction when viewed from the front along the inclination formed by the guide channel 740. When the sphere reaches the lower end of the guide channel 740, the sphere falls from the guide channel 740 toward the guide channel 750. Then, the dropped sphere flows down along the guide channel 750 in the lower right direction in front view. When the sphere that has flowed down reaches the lower end of the guide channel 750, the sphere falls into the guide channel 760 and flows down in the lower left direction when viewed from the front along the inclination formed by the guide channel 760.

  Thereafter, the sphere alternately repeats the action of flowing down along the flow path and the action of dropping into the lower flow path. Finally, the sphere reaches the lower end of the guide channel 790 and falls from the lower end of the guide channel 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the ball that has entered the detouring accessory 700 is discharged to the outside of the detouring accessory 700 through the opening 720. Each time the flow path of the sphere changes, the direction of the flow of the sphere changes (that is, from the lower right direction to the lower left direction or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction). You can reduce the momentum to do. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time until the ball that has entered the detouring accessory 700 through the opening 710 is discharged to the outside through the opening 720. Thus, when the ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13 as compared with the case where the ball is launched to the left side of the game board 13, the ball is placed below the game board 13 (the first entrance 64 and the second entry). It is possible to lengthen the time to reach (the area where the ball port 640 is disposed) (7 seconds or more). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to intentionally enter the ball into the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream state” (that is, the state where the electric accessory 640a is difficult to be opened). Can do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the guide channels 740 to 790 are pivotally supported by the channel support shafts 741 to 791, respectively, and clockwise or counterclockwise around the channel support shafts as rotation axes. It is comprised so that rotation is possible. Further, the rotation operation is performed by rotating the lower surfaces of the guide channels 740 to 790 relative to the rotation stop members 742 a to 792 a or the rotation stop members 742 b to 792 b provided below the guide channels 740 to 790. Stop by touching. This rotation operation will be described using the guide channel 740 as an example.

  As described above, the guide channel 740 is configured to be rotatable about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This turning operation is performed based on the weight of the sphere flowing down the guide channel 740. Specifically, when the sphere flows down the upper half of the guide channel 740, the load due to the weight of the sphere is applied to the upper half of the guide channel 740, so that the upper half of the guide channel 740 is rotated downward. Force to move is generated. That is, a force is applied to rotate the guide channel 740 clockwise in front view, so that the guide channel 740 rotates clockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation operation stops when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742b. The rotation stop member 742b can prevent the guide channel 740 from rotating too much clockwise and the guide channel 740 from tilting in the opposite direction.

  Here, the rotation stop member 742b is a substantially cylindrical member, and is joined to the inner wall on the near side and the inner wall on the far side of the peripheral edge 730, respectively. That is, the position is not shifted by an impact when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 comes into contact. The other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and the rotation stop members 752b to 792b have the same structure as the rotation stop member 742b.

  On the other hand, when the sphere flows down the lower half of the guide channel 740, the load due to the weight of the sphere is applied to the lower half of the guide channel 740, and therefore the direction in which the lower half of the guide channel 740 is rotated downward The power of is generated. That is, since a force is applied to rotate the guide channel 740 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation operation stops when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742a. The rotation stop member 742a can prevent the guide channel 740 from rotating too much counterclockwise. That is, it is possible to suppress the inclination of the guide channel 740 from becoming too large to remove the momentum of the sphere. Therefore, the sphere can be surely flowed down over 7 seconds. In addition, when the sphere flows down in a state where the inclination of each of the guide passages 740 to 790 is maximized, the guide passages 740 to 740 so that it takes 7 seconds until the sphere reaches the second entrance 640. A path length of 790 and a maximum inclination angle are set. Since it is rare that the spheres flow down with all the guide channels 740 to 790 maintaining the maximum inclination angle, the time for the spheres to reach the second entrance 640 can be surely set to 7 seconds or more. it can.

  In this way, by configuring the guide passages 740 to 790 to change in inclination based on the load due to the weight of the sphere, the flow speed of the sphere flowing down the guide passages 740 to 790 can be varied. it can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the time until the ball finishes passing through the detouring accessory 700. In the above description, the case where one sphere travels on the guide channel 740 has been described. However, a state in which a plurality of spheres travel on the same guide channel may occur during an actual game. In this case, since it becomes more difficult to predict the rotation operation of each guide channel 740 to 790, it is difficult for the player to predict the time until the ball has passed through the detour accessory 700. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from driving the ball into the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state. In other words, in a state other than the “rensou state”, it is possible to prevent the winning of a large amount of prize balls by becoming a “probable big hit D” by winning a big win by drawing the special symbol 2.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is processed so that the left and right corners of the lower surface are rounded compared to the left and right corners of the upper surface. By comprising in this way, when each guide flow path 740-790 rotates, it can make it difficult to contact the corner | angular part of a lower surface, and the inner wall part of the peripheral part 730. FIG. Therefore, since each guide channel 740-790 can be brought closer to the peripheral portion 730, a gap is formed between each guide channel 740-790 and the peripheral portion 730, and a sphere is sandwiched in the clearance. Or the passage of the sphere through the gap can be suppressed. In addition, each guide flow path 740-790 is comprised so that it may return to the arrangement | positioning with the largest inclination by dead weight in the state where the ball | bowl is not flowing down. For example, in a state in which the sphere does not flow down the guide channel 740, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise with the channel support shaft 741 as the rotation axis due to its own weight. This rotation operation is performed until the lower surface of the guide channel comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a, and stops when it contacts the rotation stop member 742a. Similarly, the guide flow paths 750 to 790 are configured to perform a rotation operation until they come into contact with the rotation stop members 752 a to 792 a by their own weight in a state where the sphere is not flowing down. As a result, depending on whether the sphere flows down while each guide channel 750-790 is rotating, or the sphere flows down when the guide channels 750-790 are turned. The flow velocity of the sphere can be varied. Therefore, it can be made difficult for the player to aim at the second entrance 640.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each induction | guidance | derivation flow path 740-790 may not rotate with dead weight, but may rotate only by passage of a ball | bowl. When each guide channel 740 to 790 rotates under its own weight, the speed at which the ball flows down the detour device 700 by waiting until the rotation of each guide channel 740 to 790 is completed each time one ball is launched. Can be made substantially the same. On the other hand, if each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is configured so as not to rotate due to its own weight, even if it is launched one by one, the randomness of the flow-down speed can be improved. It is possible to make it difficult to aim at the mouth 640.

  In the detour accessory 700 according to the present embodiment, each of the guide passages 740 to 790 is configured to perform a rotation operation based on a load due to the weight of the sphere. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each guide channel 740 to 790 may be configured to be rotated by a motor or the like. This makes it difficult to predict the movement of each of the guide channels 740 to 790, so that the player can drive the ball into the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a shield, sword, cloak, etc. almost full of the front of the wooden box. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery result performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, easily obtains a winning ball (normal jackpot A to C, probability variation jackpot). In the case of C1 to C6, a probable variation jackpot D), a variation display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a jackpot is generated after the variation display is finished.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is out of place, or if it is a big jackpot of a type that is difficult to win a prize ball (probable big jackpot A1-A64, probable big jackpot B), the variable display that the same main symbols are not aligned Is done. This is because if the variable display with the main symbols aligned is performed in the type of jackpot where it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the player may be discouraged if the prize ball cannot be obtained. In addition, when the jackpot type is any one of the probabilistic jackpots A1 to A64, the short time period of the normal symbol corresponding to each jackpot type is newly set. In other words, the short time period of the normal symbol that has been digested until the big hit is reset, which may cause the player to feel as if the "ream state" is far away. That is, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for the game is reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, when one of the jackpots A1 to A64 is won, the player notices that the short time period of the normal symbols has been reset by executing a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned. It is hard to be configured. Thereby, even if it wins jackpot A1-A64, it can suppress that a player will reduce the motivation with respect to a game.

  The change display in which the same main symbols are arranged will be described more specifically. For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “normal jackpot A”, the variable display in which any of the main symbols to which “0, 2, 4, 6, 8”, which is an even number, is added, is performed. If “ordinary jackpot B”, “probable variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6”, the main symbol to which the even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added, and “7” All the numbers including the odd number “7” are displayed if the main symbol to which any one of the main symbols to which the odd numbers except “1, 3, 5, 9” are added is “probable big hit D”. Fluctuation display in which any of the main symbols to which is added is arranged is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, or if it is a big hit of a type that is difficult to win a prize ball, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is a main display for displaying the 3rd symbol when the 3rd symbol is variably displayed or when the 3rd symbol is stopped. An area Dm, a small area Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls, and a small area Ds2 for reducing and displaying a variable effect are configured.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 is When the display effect different from the change effect is executed in the main display area, the change effect is reduced and displayed. By reducing and displaying the variation effect, it is possible to prevent the display effect different from the variation effect from being obstructed by the third symbol and becoming difficult to see.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display showing the expected degree of jackpot in the background of the third symbol Production and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, the state in which the main symbol of the third symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 5B) is limited to the period when the symbol variation starts and when the variation stops. During the change, the changing symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2. Thereby, the player can confirm the effect displayed in the main display area Dm without being blocked by the third symbol.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol and the symbol “×” are alternately lit. Display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is only for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64, but is limited to 4 times or less, or 5 times or more ( For example, it may be set to 8 times. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  A first entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80, and a second entrance 640 is disposed at the lower right of the first entrance 64. Has been. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the first entrance switch. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol (a special symbol 1 lottery). On the other hand, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. Accordingly, a special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is performed by the main controller 110. When the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed, a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are also one of the entrances for paying out 5 balls as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed in the lower left direction of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In addition, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed in the upper right direction of the second ball opening 640, and a horizontally long second specific winning port (large opening) 650a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls can be obtained than usual. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time.

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, when the jackpot round remains, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific prize opening 65a is configured to be performed once (1 round) or 4 times (4 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and by winning a ball to the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a being opened. A lot of prize balls are paid out.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 include a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate. And a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening / closing driving forward. The first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a are in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win in normal times. In the case of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. Then, it operates to alternately repeat the open state and the normal closed state.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the period during which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened is 0.2 seconds at the maximum. That is, even if the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, it is difficult to enter the ball. On the other hand, the period during which the second specific prize winning opening 650a is opened is configured to be 30 seconds at the maximum. That is, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained at the jackpot where the second specific winning opening 650a is opened.

  The first specific winning opening 65a is configured so that the opening / closing operation is difficult to be seen by the player by the cover body 800 provided on the front surface thereof. As described above, in order to make it difficult to distinguish the special symbol from being out of order when the first specific winning opening 65a is a jackpot that is opened (probable big jackpot A1 to A64, probable big jackpot B), the third symbol display device In 81, it is configured such that a fluctuating effect in which the main symbols are not aligned is executed. Despite this configuration, if the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is made easily visible, the big hit (probability big hit A1 to A64, It can be easily determined whether or not the probability variation big hit B) has been reached. That is, there is no point in executing a variation effect in which main symbols are not aligned. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the cover body 800 makes it difficult to confirm the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a, and the player is hard to obtain a winning ball (probable big hit A1 to A64, probable big hit B). It is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether or not. Although omitted in FIG. 2, the actual cover body 800 is configured to be difficult to see the first specific winning opening 65 a by applying a pattern, color, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot is configured so that the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a is opened according to the jackpot type, but is not limited to the above-described form. . When the game area has a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37, the first specific winning port is displayed. The opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time, and the first specific winning opening 65a is triggered by a ball being won while the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened. In addition, a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the second specific winning port 650a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time may be formed as a special game state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. A special figure variation pattern selection table 202d, a common figure variation pattern selection table 202e, and a state setting table 202f are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 7B) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (at the time of starting winning) is defined in the first per-random number table 202a. If it matches one of the determination values, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

  In the first random number table 202a, a determination value for a low probability state of a special symbol and a determination value for a high probability state of a special symbol are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the low probability state of the special symbol, 8 of “5, 52, 78, 119, 138, 201, 262, 291” as the judgment value that is a big hit of the special symbol. Individual determination values are defined (see FIG. 7B). The first random number counter C1 includes a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 299. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 8 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 37.5”.

  On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, ten determination values “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 249, and 270” are defined as the determination values that are jackpots of the special symbol. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/30”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the number of determination values that are jackpots of special symbols is changed only by two. For this reason, the probability that the special symbol is a big hit does not change greatly between the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol. This is because even if the special symbol is a big chance in the low probability state, most of the prize balls are hardly obtained, and after the jackpot ends, a short time period of the normal symbol is set from “probable big jackpot A1” to “probable big jackpot” It is because it will become A64 ". In other words, even if a special symbol is a big hit in the normal state of the special symbol, there is almost no merit for the player, so the longer the normal state of the special symbol lasts, the less the player's interest in the game There is.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is basically necessary to end the short time period of the normal symbol in order to shift to the “long villa state” which is the most advantageous state for the player. In other words, it is necessary to continuously remove the special symbol during a short time period of the normal symbol. Therefore, during the normal symbol time reduction, the special symbol can be removed continuously, so that the player can feel as if he is approaching the “renzo state” step by step. Interest can be improved. On the other hand, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the short time period of the normal symbol is not set in the first place. Therefore, no matter how long the special symbol is deviated, it does not approach the “spanning state”. That is, as the special symbols are continuously removed, the player's discouragement accumulates, and the player may lose motivation for the game.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability that the special symbol jackpot is not significantly different from the high probability state of the special symbol is low. It is difficult to stay in the probability state. Thereby, it can suppress that a player loses the motivation with respect to a game because the low probability state of a special symbol continues for a long time.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7C) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each jackpot type. It is defined in association with. As shown in FIG. 7 (c), this first hit type selection table 202b is for special figure 1 in which a judgment value for determining the big hit type is determined when the special symbol 1 is won by lottery. A hit type selection table 202b1 and a special type 2 hit type selection table 202b2 in which a determination value for determining a big hit type when a big win is won by lottery of special symbol 2 is configured. Has been. Details of these data tables will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 8A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the type selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 described above, and FIG. 8B shows the specified contents of the type selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 described above. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), “normal jackpot A”, “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64”, and “probability variation jackpot B” are selected in the special figure 1 hit type selection table 202b1. In this case, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. In other words, if the special symbol 1 is won in the lottery, the jackpot type is determined as any one of “normal jackpot A”, “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64”, and “probability variation jackpot B”.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, “normal jackpot A” is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C <b> 2 is “0 to 9”. The first hit type counter C2 includes a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of “0 to 199”. Among the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “ordinary jackpot A” is ten. Is 5% (10/200).

  Normally, the jackpot A is one round, and the second specific prize opening 650a is a jackpot that is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or five balls are won). A player can receive a maximum of 60 (5 × 12 × 1 round) prize balls (the number of possession balls can be increased by about 50). In addition, after the jackpot is over, the special symbol shifts to a low probability state, and the normal symbol is not given a short time period (the normal symbol shifts to the normal state). As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes longer (3 to 5 minutes) and the normal symbol In the case of winning, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also shortened (0.2 seconds × 1 time). Therefore, even if a ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is difficult to cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the “normal jackpot A” is over, it is necessary to aim for a big jackpot by drawing the special symbol 1. If the special symbol 1 lottery results in a “probable jackpot A”, the short time period of the normal symbol is set, so that the “shortage state” that is most advantageous to the player by passing the set short time period is achieved. Can be migrated. Further, if the “successful big hit B” is obtained through the lottery of the special symbol 1, it is possible to shift directly to the “long villa state” after the big win ends.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 189”, “probability big hit A” is associated and defined. Among the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are “probable big hit A” is 180. Therefore, when the special symbol 1 draws a big hit, “normal big hit A” Is 90% (180/200). In other words, the majority of cases where the special symbol 1 is won in the lottery is the “probable big hit A”.

  “Probability variation jackpot A” is a collective term for “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64” which are different for a short period of time after the jackpot is ended. In the range of ˜189 ”, determination values corresponding to the 64 types of jackpots are further defined. The correspondence relationship between the 64 types of jackpots and the first hit type counter C2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  This “probable big hit A” has four rounds and is the big hit that the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapses or five balls are won). , It becomes difficult for the player to win the prize ball. In addition, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol shifts to a high probability state, and a short time period (1 to 100 times) of the normal symbol according to the jackpot type is given. As described above, in the short time state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes longer (becomes 3 to 5 minutes), and when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is The opening time is also shortened (0.2 seconds × 1 time). Therefore, even if a ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is difficult to cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the “probability change big hit A” is completed, it is necessary to pass the set short time period by continuously losing by the special symbol 1 lottery. When the set short time period elapses, it becomes a “rensou state” where the special symbol 2 is likely to be drawn. If the special symbol 2 is won by lottery, it becomes easy to win the “probability big hit D” that can acquire a large amount of prize balls, so that it becomes an advantageous state for the player by entering the “ream” state. Note that, as described above, even if the set short time period has not elapsed, if it is “probable big hit B” by the lottery of the special symbol 1, it is possible to shift directly to the “long villa state”.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “190 to 199”, “probability big hit B” is associated and defined. Among the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “probable big hit B” is 10, so when the big symbol is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, “probable big hit B” Is 5% (10/200).

  This probability variation jackpot B has four rounds, and the first specific winning opening 65a is a jackpot that is opened for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapses or five balls are won). It is difficult for a person to obtain a prize ball. In addition, after the jackpot is over, the state shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol, but the short time period of the normal symbol is not given. In other words, when winning the promising jackpot B, the system shifts directly to the “rensou state” after the jackpot ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8B, the special type 2 type selection table 202b2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 8 (b), “normal jackpot B”, “probability variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6”, and “probability variation jackpot D” are selected in the special figure 2 hit type selection table 202b2. In this case, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. In other words, if the special symbol 1 is won by a lottery, the jackpot type is determined as any one of “normal jackpot B”, “probable variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6”, and “probability variation jackpot D”.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, “normal jackpot B” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C <b> 2 is “0 to 9”. Among the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “ordinary big hit B” is ten. Is 5% (10/200).

  This “ordinary jackpot B” has one round, and the second specific winning slot 650a is a jackpot that is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or five balls are won). As described above, the player can receive a maximum of 60 (5 × 12 × 1 round) prize balls (the number of possession balls can be increased by about 50 balls). In addition, after the jackpot is over, the special symbol shifts to a low probability state, and the normal symbol is not given a short time period (the normal symbol shifts to the normal state).

  As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes longer (3 to 5 minutes) and the normal symbol In the case of winning, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also shortened (0.2 seconds × 1 time). Therefore, even if a ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is difficult to cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the “normal jackpot B” is over, it is necessary to aim for a big jackpot by drawing the special symbol 1. If the special symbol 1 lottery results in a “probable jackpot A”, the short time period of the normal symbol is set, so that the “shortage state” that is most advantageous to the player by passing the set short time period is achieved. Can be migrated. Further, if the “successful big hit B” is obtained through the lottery of the special symbol 1, it is possible to shift directly to the “long villa state” after the big win ends.

  On the other hand, “probability big hit C” is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 19”. Of the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are “probable big hit C” is ten. Is 5% (10/200).

  The “probable variation jackpot C” is a generic name of “probability variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6” which are given after the jackpot is ended, and is actually a determination value “10 which becomes“ probability variation jackpot C ”. In the range of “˜19”, determination values corresponding to each of the six types of jackpots are further defined (see FIG. 10A).

  Further, the number of time reductions given also varies depending on whether or not it is in the “ream” state (that is, the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). As shown in FIG. 8 (b), states other than the “ream state” (ie, a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state (normal state) of a normal symbol, or a high probability state of a special symbol, and In the normal symbol time-short state (probability variation short-time state), even if any of the “probability variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6” is won, 100 time-shortening periods are set as the regular symbol time-shortening period. By configuring so that only the shortest time period (100 times) is set, the player launches a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state (a large number of award balls) (Playing a game aiming to become a probable big hit D) that can be acquired) can be suppressed. This is because the longer the time-short period, the more difficult it is for the player to shift to the “long-run state”.

  On the other hand, when the “big hit state” (high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) becomes “big hit C”, a different number of short-term periods are given depending on the big hit type. The correspondence between “big hit C1” to “big hit C6” and the first hit type counter C2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The “probable big hit C” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is one round and the second specific winning slot 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or five balls are won). As a result, the player can receive a maximum of 60 (5 × 12 × 1 round) prize balls (the number of possession balls can be increased by about 50). Also, after the jackpot is over, the special symbol shifts to a high probability state, and the short time period of the normal symbol is given (10 to 100 times) according to the jackpot type and the state of winning the jackpot. As described above, in the short time state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes longer (becomes 3 to 5 minutes), and when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is The opening time is also shortened (0.2 seconds × 1 time). Therefore, even if a ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, it is difficult to cause the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, after the “probability big hit C” is over, it is necessary to elapse the set short time period by continuing the losing by the lottery of the special symbol 1. When the set short time period elapses, it becomes a “rensou state” where the special symbol 2 is likely to be drawn. If the special symbol 2 is won by lottery, it becomes easy to win the “probability big hit D” that can acquire a large amount of prize balls, so that it becomes an advantageous state for the player by entering the “ream” state. Note that, as described above, even if the set short time period has not elapsed, if it is “probable big hit B” by the lottery of the special symbol 1, it is possible to shift directly to the “long villa state”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, “probability big hit D” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C <b> 2 is “20 to 199”. Among the 200 values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are “probable variation big hit D” is 180. Therefore, when the special symbol 2 draws a big hit, “probability big hit D” Is 90% (180/200).

  Since this probability variation jackpot D is a round of 4 rounds and the second specific winning opening 65a is a jackpot that is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed or 5 balls have been won), as described above. The player can receive a maximum of 240 prize balls (5 × 12 × 4 rounds) (the handball can be increased by about 200 balls). When “probability big hit D” ends, the state shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol. Further, depending on whether or not the “probable big hit D” is the “long-run state”, a different time saving period is given after the jackpot ends.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8B, a state other than the “ream state” (that is, a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a special symbol, and a short time state of a normal symbol) Then, 100 short time periods are set as the short time period of normal symbols. By configuring so that only the shortest time period (100 times) is set, the player launches a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state (a large number of award balls) (Playing a game aiming to become a probable big hit D) that can be acquired) can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if “probable jackpot D” in the “renso” state, the short time period of the normal symbol is not given after the jackpot ends. In other words, in the “renso state”, if the probable jackpot D is obtained by drawing the special symbol 2, the transition to the “renso state” (the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) is resumed after the big jackpot ends. To do. As described above, in the “renso” state, it becomes easy for the special symbol 2 to be drawn. And 90% of the cases where the special symbol 2 is won in the lottery is the “probable big hit D”. Therefore, since it becomes easy to repeatedly win “probability big hit D”, the player can obtain a large amount of prize balls by entering the “ream” state. This “Renso state” is terminated by winning “normal jackpot B” or “probable bonus jackpot C” when a special jackpot is won by lottery. In addition, when the special symbol 1 is drawn in the “Renso state” and “normal jackpot A” or “probable bonus jackpot A” is won, the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, or the normal symbol In order to shift to the short-time state, the “long villa state” ends.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol has a low probability state, and the normal symbol shifts to the normal state (normal state) ("normal jackpot A", "normal jackpot B"), the special symbol has a high probability state, And the big jackpot ("probability big hit A", "probability big hit C") that shifts to the short time state (probability change short state) of the normal symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol, and the normal state of the normal symbol (continuous state) There are three types of jackpots ("probable variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot D") that are shifted to (). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot type that shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol (non-probability short time state) may be provided. As a result, it becomes more difficult to predict the state from the probability of hitting the normal symbol, so even if the special symbol is repeatedly deviated, it is detected that the state is a low probability state of the special symbol that does not shift to the `` village state ''. Thus, the player can be prevented from quitting the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, a description will be given of the correspondence relationship between the above-mentioned “probable variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64” and the first hit type counter C2, and the short time period given after each jackpot.

  As described above, “probability jackpot A1” to “probability jackpot A64” shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol after the end of each jackpot, and shortens the number of times of ordinary symbols according to each jackpot type A jackpot type to which a period is given. In addition, the given time saving period increases in the order of “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64”, and is a minimum of once (in the case of probability variation jackpot A1) and a maximum of 100 times (in the case of probability variation jackpot A64). A period is granted.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, “probability big hit A1” is associated with two determination values “10” and “11” as the value of the first hit type counter C2. Similarly, two determination values are associated with “probability big hit A2” as the value of the first hit type counter C2, and the values are “12” and “13”. Similarly, “probability variation jackpot A3” to “probability variation jackpot A9” are associated with two values of the first hit type counter C2. In addition, when “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A9” is reached, after the completion of each jackpot, 1 to 9 times of the normal symbol time-short state is given.

  In addition, “decision big hit A10” is associated with one determination value “28” as the value of the first hit type counter C2. When this “probability big hit A10” is completed, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 19 times. That is, there is no jackpot that is given 10 to 18 times as a short time period of a normal symbol in “probability jackpot A”. "Probability variation jackpot A11" to "probability variation jackpot A36" are also associated with one value of the first hit type counter C2, and the values are "29" to "54", respectively. That is, determination values having different values by 1 are associated with “probability variation jackpot A10” to “probability variation jackpot A36”. Further, when “probability variation jackpot A11” to “probability variation jackpot A36” are completed, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 20 to 45 times, respectively. That is, it is configured such that a short time period with a different number of times is given from “probability variation jackpot A10” to “probability variation jackpot A36”.

  Three determination values “55, 56, 57” are associated with the “probability big hit A37” as the value of the first hit type counter C2. When this “probability big hit A37” is finished, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 64 times. That is, there is no jackpot type that is given 46 to 63 times as a short time period of normal symbols in “probability jackpot A”. “Probability variation jackpot A38” to “Probability variation jackpot A45” are also associated with three values of the first category counter C2, each of which corresponds to “55, 56, 57” to “79, 80, 81”. Is. That is, determination values having different values by 3 are associated with “probability variation jackpot A38” to “probability variation jackpot A45”. When “probability variation jackpot A38” to “probability variation jackpot A45” are completed, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 65 to 72 times, respectively. That is, it is configured such that a short time period with a different number of times is given from “probability variation jackpot A37” to “probability variation jackpot A45”.

  “82” is associated with “probable big hit A46” as the value of the first hit type counter C2. When this “probability big hit A46” is completed, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 73 times. Further, “probability variation jackpot A47” to “probability variation jackpot A63” are also associated with one value of the first hit type counter C2, and the values are “83” to “99”, respectively. That is, determination values having different values by 1 are associated with “probability variation jackpot A47” to “probability variation jackpot A63”. In addition, when “probability variation jackpot A47” to “probability variation jackpot A63” are completed, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 74 times to 99 times, respectively. That is, it is configured such that “short-term periods with different number of times” are given from “probability variation jackpot A46” to “probability variation jackpot A63”.

  Ninety determination values “100 to 189” are associated with “probability big hit A64” as the value of the first hit type counter C2. In addition, when “probability big hit A64” is completed, the short time period of the normal symbol is given 100 times. There are 180 judgment values of “10 to 189”, of which 90 judgment values are assigned to “probability jackpot A64”, so that “probability jackpot A” 50% (90/180) is “probable big hit A64”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9 (b), a description will be given of the short-time and short-term allocation of the normal symbols given when the “probability jackpot A” is won. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the range of the short time period (number of rotations) of the normal symbol and the ratio (distribution) at which the range is selected when “probability big hit A”.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the ratio in which the range of 1 to 9 times is selected as the short time period of the normal symbol (that is, the ratio in which “probability big hit A1” to “probability big hit A9” is selected) is: 10%. As described above, since the number of determination values associated with “probability variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A9” is 18 from “10 to 27”, out of 180 determination values that are “probability variation jackpot A”. This is because it corresponds to 10% (18/180).

  If the short time period of a normal symbol is within nine times, the short time period can be passed with a high probability, and the state can be shifted to the “long villa state”. For example, if the short time period of the normal symbol is three times, the special symbol is removed three times in succession, so that the state shifts to the “long villa state”. As described above, since the probability of winning a special symbol is 1/30, the probability of losing three consecutive times is approximately 90% (29/30 to the third power). Even if the short-term period is nine times, the probability that the special symbol will be lost nine times in a row is about 74% (29/30 to the 9th power), and the majority shifts to the “ream” state. Therefore, even if the player recognizes that there is a possibility that the player has become “probability big hit A” by gazing at the first specific winning opening 65a, it can be expected that a short time period is selected. . In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the short period of time spent before reaching the “probable big hit A” has been wasted (the “ream” state has been distant). Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, there is no case where 10 to 18 times are selected as the short time period of the normal symbol. Moreover, the ratio by which 19 times-27 times, 28 times-36 times, 37 times-45 times is selected as a short time period of a normal symbol is 5% each. That is, the ratios of “probable variation jackpot A10” to “probability variation jackpot A18”, “probability variation jackpot A19” to “probability variation jackpot A27”, and “probability variation jackpot A28” to “probability variation jackpot A36” are 5% each. . This is because the number of judgment values associated with these is nine each, which corresponds to 5% (9/180) of the 180 judgment values that are each “probability big hit A”.

  Thus, after the end of “probability big hit A”, even if the special symbol detachment continues nine times, if it does not shift to the “rengo state”, until the special symbol detachment continues at least 10 times ( In other words, there is no possibility of shifting to the “ream state” (from the end of “probable big hit A” until the detachment of the special symbol 19 times continues). Hereinafter, the range of the number of times in which there is no short-term / short-term distribution is referred to as “zone without distribution”. On the other hand, the range of the number of times of short- and short-term distribution (for example, 1 to 9 times) is called a “zone with distribution”.

  If the “no distribution zone” continues for a long time, the player may reduce motivation for the game at the stage when the player determines that the “zone with distribution” has shifted to the “zone without distribution”. is there. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the “zone without distribution” is limited to 17 times at the maximum (the zone of 46 times to 63 times described later). Therefore, even when entering the “no-assignment zone” when digesting the short time period of normal symbols, it will prevent the player's motivation for the game from being reduced, and the next “zone with the assignment” The game can be continued aiming at. In addition, even if a player quits the game due to the “no-assignment zone”, it makes other players try to play until the next “assigned zone”. be able to. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, there is no case where 46 to 63 times are selected as the short time period of the normal symbol (the “zone without distribution”). In addition, the ratio of 64 times to 72 times selected as the short time period of normal symbols is 15%. That is, the ratio of “probability variation jackpot A37” to “probability variation jackpot A45” is 15%. Since the determination values associated with “probability variation jackpot A37” to “probability variation jackpot A45” are in the range of “55 to 81” and the number of the determination values is 27, 180 determination values that become “probability variation jackpot A”. This is because it corresponds to 15% (27/180).

  This zone has a higher selected ratio than other “sorted zones”. By setting the zone immediately after the longest 46 to 63 times out of each “non-assigned zone” to a zone with a high ratio selected as a short-term period, until the player survives the “no-assigned zone” It is easy to keep the motivation to continue playing.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the ratio of selecting 73 times to 81 times and 82 times to 90 times as the short time period of the normal symbol is 5%, respectively. That is, the ratio of “probability variation jackpot A46” to “probability variation jackpot A54” and “probability variation jackpot A55” to “probability variation jackpot A63” is 5%, respectively. This is because the number of judgment values associated with these is nine each, which corresponds to 5% (9/180) of the 180 judgment values that are each “probability big hit A”.

  Moreover, there is no case where 91 times to 99 times are selected as a short time period of normal symbols (a zone without distribution). The fact that the zone has not been shifted to the “continuous state” means that 100 times is selected as the short time period of the normal symbol. In other words, it means that there are less than 10 remaining special symbols for shifting to the “renso” state. "The game is continued aiming at 100 times, which is a short period set later." That is, even if the rate at which this zone is selected is 0%, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is not affected. In addition, since the rate at which the short time period is allocated to the other zones can be increased, it is possible to add sharpness to each zone. Therefore, since it is possible for the player to play the game by taking into account the characteristics of each zone, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Further, as described above, the rate at which 100 times is selected as the short time period of the normal symbol is 50% when “probable big hit A”. In order to shift to the “rengo state” when 100 times are selected as the short-term period, it is necessary to repeat the special symbol detachment 100 times continuously, but the probability of this event occurring is about 3% (29/29). 30 to the 100th power), which is a very low probability. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an excessive shift to the “long-run state” by increasing the rate at which 100 short-term periods are selected (the probability variation big hit A64 is selected). Therefore, it can suppress producing a disadvantage with respect to a hall | hole.

  In this embodiment, when the special symbol is out of place and when it is “probable big hit A”, the variation effect mode is the same (a variation effect in which the same main symbol is not aligned is executed) You may comprise so that display effects, such as a change effect, may be performed in the aspect which can be easily recognized by the player that "probability big hit A". This allows the player to count the number of misses after becoming “probable big hit A”, and whether or not there is a high possibility of becoming a “spanning state” based on the number of misses and the proportion of zones with each distribution Can be predicted. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Further, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display the number of fluctuations after the big hit ends. Thereby, the player who is going to start a game can determine the number of detachment to the zone with the next distribution based on the number of fluctuations, and can be used as a material for determining whether to start the game. In addition, displaying the number of fluctuations is not limited to the 3rd symbol display device 81. For example, a signal indicating the start of the fluctuation effect or a signal indicating the big hit is output to the outside and provided outside the pachinko machine 10. The display device may be configured to display the number of changes from the end of jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not the player starts the game based on the number of times, in the same manner as displaying the number of times of variation on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the short time period is set by the distribution shown in FIG. 9B, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the time-short period from 1 time to 100 times may be selected equally. Thereby, since the zone without distribution can be abolished, it is possible to easily maintain the player's motivation for the game. Further, for example, after the “probability big hit A” is completed, it may be configured such that 100 short time periods are always set. Thereby, since it can suppress that it becomes "a consecutive resort state" excessively, it can suppress producing a disadvantage with respect to a hall | hole. Moreover, the upper limit for time and short-term is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily determined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the correspondence relationship between “probability variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6” and the first hit type counter C2 and the short time period given after each jackpot will be described.

  As described above, “probable jackpot C1” to “probable jackpot C6” are jackpot types that can be determined when a special symbol 2 lottery is made in the “Landou State”, and after each jackpot ends, the special symbols In addition to shifting to a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time period of regular symbols is given as many times as each jackpot type. Also, the given time saving period increases in the order of “probable variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6”, and is a minimum of 10 times (in the case of the probability variation jackpot C1) and a maximum of 100 times (in the case of the probability variation jackpot C6). A period is granted.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), “probability variation jackpot C1”, “probability variation jackpot C2”, “probability variation jackpot C3”, “probability variation jackpot C4”, and “probability variation jackpot C5” are respectively set to the first per category counter C2. “10”, “11”, “12”, “13”, “14” are associated as values. When each jackpot is completed, 10 times, 30 times, 50 times, 70 times, and 80 times are given as short time periods for normal symbols.

  Further, “15-19” is associated with “probability large hit C6” as the value of the first hit type counter C2. When this “probable big hit C6” is completed, 100 short time periods are given.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 (b), the ratio at which the short time period is selected for each number of fluctuations will be described. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the ratio of selecting the short time period of 10 times, 30 times, 50 times, 70 times, and 80 times is 10%. On the other hand, the rate at which 100 short time periods are selected is 50%. And it is comprised so that time-short periods other than the above may not be selected. As is clear from a comparison between FIG. 9B and FIG. 10B, when “probability big hit A” is reached, the ratio of selecting a short time period of 50 times or less is 25%. On the other hand, when “probability big hit C” is reached, the ratio of selecting the short time period of 50 times or less is 30%. In other words, when the jackpot that triggers the end of the “ream” state, a short time period is easily selected. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to shift to the “renzo state” again by passing a short period of time after the “renzo state” has ended. The game can be continued. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Note that time-to-short-term distribution is not limited to this mode. The same distribution as when the probability variation jackpot A is reached may be used. In other words, the probability variation jackpot C1 to the probability variation jackpot C64 may be provided, and each jackpot may be configured to be given the same number of times as the probability variation jackpots A1 to A64.

  Returning to FIG. 7A, the description will be continued. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11A) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored, and is acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal entrance 67. If the random number counter 2 per 2 matches the determination value defined in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. Details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 11A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 11A, the second random number table 202c defines a table for a low probability (ordinary symbol normal state) and a table for a high probability (normal symbol time short state). Has been.

  In the second random number table for the low probability (ordinary symbol normal state), 218 values of “5 to 222” are defined as the determination values for the normal symbol (FIG. 11A). )reference). Here, the second random number counter C4 is configured by a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 239. Of the 240 values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, there are 218 determination values that are winning, so in the normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol (second symbol) is about 91% (approximately 1 / 1.1).

  Further, “0 to 239” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 11A). That is, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit by all the values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 (the ball is determined to be 100% normal symbol by passing through the normal entrance 67).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by winning the special symbol 2 in the “renso” state. It becomes easier to win the “probability jackpot D” set in the “state”. This “ream state” is basically a state in which the normal symbol shifts after a short period of time has elapsed, and is specifically a special symbol probabilistic state and a normal symbol normal state. In this “ream” state, the player launches a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in order to make a special symbol 2 lottery. May be frustrated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol is in a normal state, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is a high probability of 90% or higher. This makes it easier for the player to enter the second entrance 640 because the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is easily opened in the “ream” state, It is possible to suppress frustration. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol (second symbol) changes in time when it is in the “ream” state (1 second) and the electric accessory 640a. Is configured to be long (1 second × 3 times). Accordingly, since it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 in the “rengo state”, it is possible for the player to play the game without stress during the “renja state”. .

  Returning to FIG. 7A, the description will be continued. The special figure variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11B) displays the determination value of the first variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation effect (variation pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. It is a data table prescribed | regulated for every aspect. Details of the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 11B and FIG.

  FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an outline of the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 11B, the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d is composed of three types of data tables. That is, it is composed of a special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1, a special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2, and a common probability change non-short time selection table 202d3.

  The special symbol 1 normal / probability change time selection table 202d1 includes the special symbol 1 in the low probability state (normal) of the special symbol, or the high probability state (probability change) of the special symbol, and the short time state (short time) of the normal symbol. It is a data table referred when lottery is performed. The special symbol 2 normal / probability change time selection table 202d2 is a special symbol in a low probability state (normal) of a special symbol, or a high probability state (probability change) of a special symbol, and in a short time state (short time) of a normal symbol. It is a data table referred when the lottery of 2 is performed. Further, the common probability variable non-short time selection table 202d3 is a lottery of the special symbol 1 in the high probability state (probability variation) of the special symbol and in the normal state (non-short time) of the normal symbol (that is, in the “continuous state”). Or a data table that is referred to when either of the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed. Details of the three types of data tables will be described with reference to FIG.

  12A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-described special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1, and FIG. 12B is the specified contents of the special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2. FIG. 12 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the common probability variation non-short-time selection table 202d3. As shown in FIG. 12, the three types of tables are data tables that define the types of variation patterns that can be selected for each stop type in association with the value of the first variation type counter CS1.

  First, with reference to FIG. 12A, the specified contents of the special figure 1 normal / probability changing time selection table 202d1 will be described. In the special figure 1 normal / probability changing time selection table 202d1, the variation pattern type and the value of the first variation type counter CS1 are defined in association with each stop type that is completely out of reach, out of reach, or jackpot. Yes. Specifically, when the stop type is completely out of the range, if the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98”, “short out” having a variation time of 7 seconds is selected. On the other hand, if the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “99 to 198”, “out of long” with a variation time of 10 seconds is selected.

  When the stop type is out of reach and the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, “normal reach” with a variation time of 15 seconds is selected. If the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “150 to 198”, “super reach” with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected. That is, “normal reach” having a short variation time is more easily selected than “super reach” having a long variation time. This is because, if only a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected, the player's discouragement will increase due to the deviation, and the player's interest may be impaired. It is.

  If the stop type is “probable big hit A” or “probable big hit B”, and if the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98”, the “normal reach for probability variation” is 7 seconds. Is selected. If the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “99 to 198”, “super-reach for probability variation” with a variation time of 10 seconds is selected. That is, when “probable big hit A” or “probable big hit B” is selected, the variation pattern type for which the variation effect of the same variation time is executed as when the stop type is completely out of the selection is selected.

  Although details will be described later, the variation pattern type selected by the main control device 110 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command. Based on the variation pattern command, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 performs the same display effect as “short deviation” having the same variation time when the variation pattern type is “normal reach for probability variation big hit A”. To control. In addition, when the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is “probable big hit super reach”, control is performed such that the same display effect as “out of long” having the same variation time is executed. This makes it difficult for the player to determine from the display effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 that it has become “probable big hit A” or “probable big hit B” for which it is difficult to obtain a winning ball. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed without obtaining a prize ball even though the jackpot is notified by the display effect. In addition, when “probable big hit A” or “probable big hit B” is reached, an effect as if the variable effect continues is executed as the display effect during the big hit. That is, the appearance of the display effect is configured so as not to be different from the normal time. Thereby, by winning “probability big hit A”, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the short time period has been reset. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player feels that the short period of time that the player has consumed is wasted, and that the player's motivation for the game is reduced.

  When the stop type is “ordinary big hit A” and the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98”, “normal reach for normal hit” with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is selected. Further, if the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “99 to 198”, “normal hit super reach” with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected. As described above, when selecting a variation pattern corresponding to “normal jackpot A” in which a winning ball can be easily obtained, a variation pattern type having a long variation time is easily selected as compared with a case where the stop type is “out of reach”. Thereby, when the player recognizes that the variation pattern type has a long variation time, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for obtaining a prize ball. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12B, the specified contents of the special figure 2 normal / probability changing time selection table 202d2 will be described. In the special figure 2 normal / probability changing time selection table 202d2, the variation pattern type that can be selected when the stop type is “completely out” is only “extra-long out” with a variation time of 300 seconds (5 minutes). That is, in the range where the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 198” (that is, all the values that the first variation type counter CS1 can take), “extra-long deviation” is selected.

  Further, when the stop type is “reach out”, the only variation pattern that can be selected is “out super long reach” with a variation time of 300 seconds. Further, when the stop type is “various jackpots”, only “hit super long reach” with a variation time of 300 seconds is selected. That is, if the special symbol 2 is executed in the low probability state (normal) of the special symbol, the high probability state (probability variation) of the special symbol, and the short time state (short time) of the normal symbol, the lottery result Regardless, the variation pattern type with a variation time of 300 seconds is selected.

  In this way, by configuring such that an extremely long variation pattern type is selected, once variation starts, it is disadvantageous that a special symbol lottery cannot be received for a long time until the variation ends. Since it can be in a state, the player can enter the second in a state other than the “ream state” (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a special symbol, and a short time state of a normal symbol). It is possible to make the user feel that the ball should not be hit at the ball opening 640. Therefore, the player is aimed at the first entrance 64 in a state other than the “ream state”, and the player aims at the second entrance 640 in the “ream state”. Can be launched. Since this pachinko machine 10 is designed assuming that only a special symbol 1 lottery is performed in a state other than the “renso state”, and only a special symbol 2 lottery is performed in the “renso state”. By preventing (suppressing) the player from aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state, the exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be brought close to the design value. Therefore, when a hall | hole performs sales prediction etc. from the design value of a payout rate, it can calculate more correctly.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the second entrance 640 from aiming and launching a ball in a state other than the “continuous state”, there are a plurality of other configurations. Is provided. For example, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the variation time of the normal symbol becomes extremely long (3 to 5 minutes) in a state other than the “continuous state”. Further, the opening period in which the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit is set to a short time (0.2 seconds × 1 time). As a result, even if it is possible to enter the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a is hardly opened (released at a frequency of 0.2 seconds in a few minutes). It is possible to prevent the player from launching a ball toward the second entrance 640 provided on the downstream side thereof.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the detour accessory 700 is provided on the upstream side of the second entrance 640, the ball reaches the second entrance 640 after launching the ball. It takes 7 or more hours to complete. Therefore, even if a ball is launched after recognizing that the electric accessory 640a is opened, the electric accessory 640a is closed before the ball reaches the second entrance 640 (0.2 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream state”.

  In addition, as described above, even if a ball can be entered into the second entrance 640, if the special symbol is changing, entering the second entrance 640 will hold the entrance. It is destroyed without That is, in a state other than the “ream” state, the fluctuation time becomes extremely long, and even if a ball is entered into the second entrance 640 during the fluctuation, a special symbol is based on the entry. No 2 lottery will be held. Therefore, in order to receive the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is necessary to make the ball enter the second entrance 640 again after the variation effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 is completed. In a state other than the “rengo” state, the variation pattern type of the variation time of 300 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol 2, so that the lottery can be received only every 300 seconds at the shortest. Accordingly, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated, so that it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “rendezvous state”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with various configurations that are disadvantageous to the player when the player enters the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state. As a result, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed even if it is not in the “ream” state, and it is prevented (suppressed) that a lot of prize balls are won by the player by winning the “probable big hit D”. it can.

  When a special symbol 2 lottery is performed in a state other than the “renso” state, a ball is launched aiming at the first entrance 64 in a 300-second variation effect performed based on the lottery. An effect of warning may be performed. This allows a player who is aiming at the second entrance 640 to quit the game method aimed at the second entrance 640 even though it is not in the “ream” state. . Also, by displaying a warning effect, the hall clerk is playing a game method different from normal (the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state). A player can be easily identified. Therefore, even if the player ignores the warning effect and continues the game method different from the normal one, the clerk of the hall who has confirmed the warning effect can directly pay attention. Therefore, it is possible to more surely suppress the gaming method of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream state”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12C, the specified contents of the common probability variation non-short time selection table 202d3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 12C, the variation pattern type that can be selected when the stop type is “completely out” is only “out” with a variation time of 1 second. That is, “out” is selected in the range where the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 198” (that is, all the values that the first variation type counter CS1 can take). Also, the variation pattern type that can be selected when the stop type is “reach out” is only “probability non-short-time use out normal reach” with a variation time of 2 seconds.

  Further, when the stop type is “various jackpots”, “normal reach per probability variation non-shortening use” with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected in the range of the value of the first variation type counter CS1 from “0 to 179”. On the other hand, in the range where the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is “180 to 198”, “super-reach per probability variation non-shortening” with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected.

  In this way, in the high probability state (probability change) of the special symbol and the normal state (non-temporal state) of the normal symbol (that is, in the “rengo state”), the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is selected. When executed, a variation pattern type having a relatively short variation time (1 to 5 seconds) is selected. This is because it is assumed that the player launches a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 where the entry is not suspended in the “ream” state. That is, by configuring so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the variation. Therefore, when the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the fluctuation, it makes the player feel that the lottery of the special symbol 2 has been wasted, and makes the player feel dissatisfied. Can be suppressed. Accordingly, the “ream” state that is advantageous to the player can be enjoyed without stress, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The variation time set in each state is not limited to the contents defined in FIGS. 12A to 12C, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the special figure 2 normal / probability change time selection table 202d2, a change effect (change pattern) having a longer change time such as 1 hour or 5 hours may be selected. As a result, even if it becomes a “probable big hit D” in which a lot of prize balls can be obtained by a lottery of the special symbol 2 in a state other than the “ream” state, the time until the lottery result is obtained is very long. can do. In other words, when performing a game method different from normal, the game efficiency can be extremely deteriorated, so even if a large amount of prize balls can be obtained when it becomes “probable big hit D”, You can make it feel that it is not worth it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game method that is different from the normal one. Further, for example, in the common probability variation non-short-time selection table 202d3, it may be configured such that only the variation pattern type of the variation time of 1 second is associated with all the variation types. Thereby, it can suppress more that a ball | bowl enters into the 2nd entrance 640 during the variation | production effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2, and that the thrown-in is discarded.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The normal variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 13A) displays the determination value of the second variation type counter CS2 for determining the display mode of the variation effect (variation pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol. It is a data table prescribed | regulated for every aspect. That is, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the normal symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on is defined. Note that the fluctuation time is the period when the “○” symbol and “×” symbol are alternately lit, and the stop symbol (“○” symbol for normal symbols, “x” symbol for off-time symbols). It means the total with the period when the symbol is stopped. Details of the normal variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 13A is a diagram showing an outline of the common map variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 13 (a), the common map variation pattern selection table 202e is composed of two types of data tables. In other words, it is composed of a normal map / probability changing time selection table 202e1 and a common figure changing / non-short time selection table 202e2.

  First, with reference to FIG. 13 (b), description will be given of the specified contents of the normal / normal change time selection table 202e1. In the normal figure normal / probability change time selection table 202e1, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 are defined in association with each number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Yes. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for entering the normal entrance 67 is 0, if the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the variation time is 180 seconds ( 3 minutes) variation pattern is selected. On the other hand, if the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “50 to 149”, a variation pattern with a variation time of 240 seconds (4 minutes) is selected, and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is “150 to In the range of “198”, a variation pattern having a variation time of 300 seconds (5 minutes) is selected.

  In this way, when the number of reserved balls is 0, a very long variation pattern of 3 to 5 minutes is selected, so that the second entrance 640 (and the normal entrance 67 on the upstream side) You can make it feel like you're losing when you aim. This is because the electric symbol 640a is not released during the variation of the normal symbol, so that the special symbol 2 cannot be drawn. Therefore, in a low probability state (normal) of a special symbol, a high probability state (probability change) of a special symbol, and a short time state (short time) of a normal symbol (that is, in a state other than the “long villa state”), the player It is possible to launch a ball aiming at the first entrance 64.

  In addition, since a plurality of types of variation times (3 minutes, 4 minutes, and 5 minutes) can be selected, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the regular symbol variation time ends. Therefore, in a state other than the “rengo state”, it is possible to prevent the player from launching a ball in anticipation of the timing at which the normal symbol fluctuation time ends (the timing at which the electric accessory 640a may be released) ( Suppression).

  In the present embodiment, the “O” symbol and the “X” symbol are simply changed alternately while the normal symbol (second symbol) is changing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time for switching from the “O” symbol to the “X” symbol and the time for switching from the “X” symbol to the “O” symbol may be changed randomly. As a result, during the change, the period from when the “○” symbol is displayed until it is switched to the “×” symbol becomes longer, and when the “○” symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. Can be difficult to distinguish (it can be difficult to determine whether or not it has been confirmed by the displayed symbol). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from striking the ball aiming at the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a in a state other than the “long-run state”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), when the number of reserved balls for entering the normal entrance 67 is 1 to 4, the variation varies regardless of the value of the second variation type counter CS2. A variation pattern with a time of 0.2 seconds is selected. That is, when the number of reserved balls starts to change when the number of held balls is 0, and the ball entering the normal symbol 67 is held during the change, the variation effect started when the number of held balls is set to 0 is short. The variation effect and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a are repeated during the period. And when a reservation ball | bowl is digested and a reservation becomes a state of 0, it is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation effect for 3 to 5 minutes may be performed again. This operation will be described in more detail. In the following description, the normal symbol time-short state (that is, the probability of winning the normal symbol is 100%) is assumed. That is, the description will be made on the assumption that the electric accessory 640a is always opened once for 0.2 seconds after the normal symbol variation effect. This is because the short time state of a normal symbol is a state in which the player stays for the longest time in the game.

  When a ball enters the normal entrance 67 in a state where the number of reserved balls with respect to the entrance to the normal entrance 67 is 0, a variation effect (variation pattern effect) of 3 to 5 minutes is executed. When a ball enters the normal entrance 67 during execution of this variation effect, the entrance is suspended up to four times. Here, it is assumed that the number of reserved balls becomes 4 during the fluctuation period. Since a variation pattern of a variation time of at least 3 minutes is set, if a player strikes a ball aiming at the normal entrance 67, the ball can easily enter the normal entrance 67 four times or more. This is because it can.

  When the variation period of the variation effect started when the number of reserved balls for entering the normal entrance 67 is 0, the electric accessory 640a is opened for 0.2 seconds and then closed. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is closed, a variation effect corresponding to the first reserved ball is started. Since the number of reserved balls is three at the time of starting this variation effect, the variation effect with a variation time of 0.2 seconds is executed, and the electric accessory 640a is released for 0.2 seconds. Similarly, with respect to the second holding ball and the third holding ball, the electric accessory 640 is released for 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation effect having the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds.

  Further, when the variation effect corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is executed, if the number of reserved balls is 0, the variation effect of 3 to 5 minutes is selected. Further, if a new holding ball is generated, a changing effect with a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds is executed, and when the holding ball becomes 0, a changing effect is executed for 3 to 5 minutes. And when a new entry to the normal entrance 67 is put on hold during the 3 to 5 minute variation production, the electric combination 640a is released for 0.2 seconds after the variation production is completed as described above. And the variation effect for 0.2 seconds is repeated.

  It should be noted that the time from the end of the first variation effect (the variation effect started when the number of reserved balls is 0) to the start of the variable effect corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is Since it is about 1.4 seconds (opening of the electric accessory 640a × 4 times + 0.2 seconds fluctuation × 3 times), a new holding ball is created at the time when the variation effect corresponding to the fourth holding ball is executed. The number is about two at most. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, there is a limit on the launch interval of the sphere, and it is configured so that only 100 spheres can be ejected per minute (that is, after firing one sphere, This is because only two balls can be launched in 1.4 seconds since the interval until the next ball is fired is 0.6 seconds or more).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the low probability state (normal) of the special symbol, the high probability state (probability variation) of the special symbol, and the short time state (short time) of the normal symbol (that is, “ When a ball is entered into the normal entrance 67 in a state other than the “ream villa state”, the normal entrance 67 put on hold during the change effect is executed after the change effect of a long change time is executed. The opening of the electric accessory 640a for 0.2 seconds and the fluctuation effect for 0.2 seconds are repeated as many times as the number of times the player enters the ball. That is, when the variation effect of the long variation time is completed, the opening of the electric accessory 640a and the variation effect corresponding to the reserved ball are repeated in about 1 second. Then, a variation effect with a long variation time is executed again.

  By executing the fluctuation corresponding to the entry to the normal entry hole 67 that has been put on hold in a short period (around 1 second), the electric accessory 640a is released based on the end of the fluctuation effect of the long fluctuation time. Even if the player launches the ball after confirming that the ball has reached the second entrance 640, a short fluctuation time (0.2 seconds) and after the fluctuation The opening of the electric accessory 640a can be terminated. This is because it takes 7 seconds or more to reach the second entrance 640 after launching the ball by passing the detour accessory 700. In addition, as described above, when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed in a state other than the “renso” state, a variation effect with a variation time of 300 seconds (5 minutes) is set regardless of the lottery result. It is comprised so that. Thereby, even if the ball can be entered into the second entrance 640, the fluctuating effect continues for 5 minutes. Moreover, since the entrance to the 2nd entrance 640 is not suspended, the lottery of the next special symbol 2 cannot be executed until the fluctuation for at least 5 minutes is completed.

  In this way, in a state other than the “ream” state, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes long, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit becomes short, so the second entry It becomes difficult to enter the mouth. In addition, since the time required for the ball to reach the second entrance 640 by the detour bonus 700 is increased, even if the normal symbol lottery is suspended, the variation of the normal symbol is completed. Even if the player launches a ball after the electric combination 640a is opened, it is difficult for the ball to reach the second entrance 640 while the electric combination 640a is opened. Further, even if the ball can be entered into the second entrance 640, the lottery time is long (it takes a long time until the lottery result is obtained), so that it becomes difficult to execute the lottery of the special symbol 2. Since these are related to each other, it is extremely disadvantageous for the player to hit the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state. Therefore, in a state other than the “rensou state”, the player can hit the ball aiming at the first entrance 64. Therefore, the ball exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be brought close to the design value.

  Next, with reference to FIG.13 (c), the prescription | regulation content of the selection table 202e2 for universal figure change non-shortening is demonstrated. Similarly to the normal figure normal / probability changing time selection table 202e1, the normal figure probability variable non-short time selection table 202e2 also changes the normal symbol (second symbol) variation time and the second variation type for each number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. The value of the counter CS2 is defined in association with it. As shown in FIG. 13 (c), in the universal figure probability variation non-short time selection table 202e2, a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected regardless of the number of held balls and the value of the second variation type counter CS2. It is configured. In addition, as described above, in the high probability state (probability change) of the special symbol to which this data table is referenced, and in the normal state (non-short time) of the normal symbol (that is, in the “continuous state”), the electric accessory 640a Since the opening time of the battery becomes longer (1 second × 3 times), the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is opened is significantly increased. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Furthermore, in this embodiment, each entrance is arranged so that the time until the ball that has passed through the normal entrance 67 reaches the second entrance 640 is about 1.2 seconds. Yes. As a result, in the “renso” state, the variation effect executed by entering the normal entrance 67 ends, and the timing of the variation effect is triggered when the electric accessory 640a is released. A ball (that is, a ball that has entered the normal entrance 67) is configured to reach the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the second entrance 640 to enter the ball in the “ream” state.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The state setting table 202f is a data table that is referred to in order to set a state after the end of the jackpot after the end of various jackpots. The state setting table 202f includes a special symbol state (whether the special symbol has a high probability state or a low probability state) after the jackpot is finished, a normal symbol state (a short time period of the normal symbol, and an electric role). An opening period of the object 640a) and a set fluctuation pattern table (which table is selected from the special figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202d) are defined at least.

  The state setting table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, “ordinary jackpot A” and “ordinary jackpot B” are associated with a “special symbol low probability state” as a special symbol state. Further, as the state of the normal symbol, “normal state of normal symbol” (ordinary symbol short time period 0 times) is associated, and a state in which the fluctuation time is long and the opening time of the electric accessory 640 a is short is associated. (That is, it is set so that the normal / probable change time reduction selection table 202e1 is selected). Further, as a table to be referred to for selecting the variation pattern type, a special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 and a special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2 are associated. Furthermore, “off” is associated as the state of the advantageous state flag 203i.

  Therefore, at the end of the “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B”, the state setting table 202f is referred to, and the special symbol is set to the low probability state (the probability variation flag 203f is turned off), and the normal symbol normal state ( The value of the hour / medium counter 203g is set to 0), and the fluctuation pattern tables to be selected after the end of the jackpot are set in the special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 and the special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2. The advantageous state flag 203i is set to “off”.

  On the other hand, “high probability state of special symbol” is associated with “probability big hit A1” as a special symbol state. In addition, as the state of the normal symbol, the “short time state of the normal symbol” with one short time period is associated, and the state in which the fluctuation time is long and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is short (that is, Normal table / normal change time selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 13B) is set to be selected). Further, as a table to be referred to in order to select a variation pattern type, a special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 12A) and a special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2 (FIG. 12). (B) is associated. Further, based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is performed once (based on the end of the short time period of the normal symbol), the common probability variable non-short time selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 12C) is selected. Is set as follows. As a result, when the special symbol 2 is drawn after the short time period (once) of the normal symbol is finished, the variation pattern type having a short variation time (1 to 5 seconds) can be selected. it can. Therefore, since the lottery of the special symbol 2 is smoothly performed during the “renso” state, the “renso” state game can be performed without causing the player to feel stress.

  Therefore, at the end of “probability big hit A1”, this state setting table 202f is referred to, a special symbol is set to a high probability state (probability variable flag 203f is turned on), and a short time period (short time) of a normal symbol with one short time period. The value of the intermediate counter 203g is set to 1), and as the variation pattern table selected after the big hit, the special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 and the special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2 are set. The value of the advantageous state flag 203i is set to “off”.

  It should be noted that the “probability variation jackpot A2” to “probability variation jackpot A64” and “probability variation jackpot C” are also associated with other data that is associated only with a different number of times as a short time period of the normal symbol. Is the same as “Probability jackpot A1”.

  “Probability variation jackpot B” and “probability variation jackpot D” are associated with “high probability state of special symbol” as the state of the special symbol. In addition, as the state of the normal symbol, “normal state of normal symbol” (normal symbol short time period 0 times) is associated, and a state in which the fluctuation time is short and the open time of the electric accessory 640a is associated. (That is, it is set so that the common figure change / non-short-time selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 13C) is selected). In addition, a common probability variation non-short-time selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 12C) is associated as a table to be referenced for selecting the variation pattern type.

  Therefore, at the end of “probability big hit B” or “probability big hit D”, this state setting table 202f is referred to, and the special symbol is set to a high probability state (probability variation flag 203f is turned on), and the normal state of the normal symbol ( The value of the hour / short counter 203g is set to 0), the variation pattern table selected after the jackpot is finished is set to the common probability variation non-short time selection table 202d3, and the advantageous state flag 203i is set to “ON”.

  “Probability big hit C1” is associated with “high probability state of special symbol” as the state of the special symbol. In addition, as a state of the normal symbol, a “short time state of the normal symbol” having a short time period of 10 times is associated with a state in which the variation time is long and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is short (that is, Normal table / normal change time selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 13B) is set to be selected). Further, as a table to be referred to in order to select a variation pattern type, a special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 12A) and a special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2 (FIG. 12). (B) is associated. Further, the common probability variable non-short time selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 12C) is selected based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times (based on the end of the normal symbol time-short period). Is set as follows. As a result, when the special symbol 2 is drawn after the short time period of the normal symbol is finished, the variation pattern type having a short variation time (1 to 5 seconds) can be selected. Therefore, since the lottery of the special symbol 2 is smoothly performed during the “renso” state, the “renso” state game can be performed without causing the player to feel stress.

  Therefore, at the end of “probability big hit C1”, this state setting table 202f is referred to, a special symbol high probability state (probability variable flag 203f is set to ON), and a normal symbol time reduction state (time reduction) with 10 time reduction periods. The value of the intermediate counter 203g is set to 10), and the fluctuation pattern table selected after the jackpot is set in the special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 and the special figure 2 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d2. The value of the advantageous state flag 203i is set to “off”.

  Note that “probability variation jackpot C2” to “probability variation jackpot C6” are merely associated with different numbers of short time periods of normal symbols, and the other data associated with them is “probability variation jackpot C1”. Are the same.

  As described above, since the setting for each jackpot type is defined in the state setting table 202f, setting of various states (described later) can be performed only by executing a simple process of reading the setting value from the state setting table 202f at the end of the jackpot. Setting of the probability variation flag 203f, the hour / medium counter 203g, the advantageous state flag 203i, etc.) can be accurately performed.

  Next, how the gaming state changes during the actual game by setting the state after the jackpot based on the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG. .

  FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the transition conditions to other states for each state that the pachinko machine 10 can take in the present embodiment. First, the “normal state” (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) that is set when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized when the power is turned on will be described. The “normal state” is shown on the upper side of FIG. As shown in FIG. 15, in order to shift from this “normal state” to another state, it is necessary to win a special symbol. As described above, the probability that the special symbol is a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1 / 37.5.

  When the special symbol is a jackpot, the state of transition after the jackpot is different according to the jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 15, in the low probability state of the special symbol, when it becomes the “ordinary jackpot A” that is won in 5% of the case where the big symbol is won by the lottery of the special symbol 1, the special game state with one round is After being assigned, the state again shifts to the normal state (see the upper left side of FIG. 15). Although it is possible to obtain a prize ball, the player shifts again to the “normal state” which is difficult to be in the “ream” state, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  In addition, if it becomes “probable jackpot B”, which is won in 5% of the case where it is a jackpot due to the special symbol 1 lottery, after the special game state with 4 rounds is given, It shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol (see the upper right side of FIG. 15). As described above, this “ream” state is advantageous to the player because it is likely to be a “probable big hit D” in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. As described above, when “probability big hit B” is reached, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened only for a maximum of 0.2 seconds in each round, making it difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball. .

  Also, when the special symbol 1 lottery results in a “probable bonus jackpot A” (any of “probable jackpot A1” to “probable jackpot A64”), after a special game state with 4 rounds is given, The state shifts to a “probability short state” (a high probability state of a special symbol and a short state of a normal symbol) (see the upper center in FIG. 15). As described above, the number of times corresponding to the jackpot type is set for the short time period of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A). In “normal state”, “probable jackpot B” could not be entered unless “winning promising jackpot B” was won. Even when the time saving state ends, the state shifts to the “village state”, and therefore, the shift to the “village state” is easier than the “normal state”. Therefore, the shift to the “probability change short state” is advantageous to the player over the “normal state”. As described above, when “probability big hit A” is reached, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened only for a maximum of 0.2 seconds in each round, making it difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball. .

  As described above, the “normal state” is a state in which it is difficult to shift to the “continuous state” and is the most disadvantageous state for the player. As described above, the normal state shifts when the initial setting is performed (set to the initial state) when the power is turned on. For example, when the hall newly introduces the pachinko machine 10 (the pachinko machine in the initial state) 10 is installed), all the introduced pachinko machines 10 can be started from a normal state which is disadvantageous for the player. That is, it is possible to prevent starting from a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall by starting all pachinko machines 10 from an advantageous state when the hall is opened.

  In addition, the “normal state” is a state in which it is difficult to shift to the “continuous state”, but if it is a promising big hit B when it is a big hit, the “long state” is not passed through a short time period of normal symbols. Can be moved to. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with the expectation that the player will directly shift to the “ream” state by winning the probability variation jackpot B, so that motivation for the game can be maintained.

  Next, the “probability short time state” (high probability state of a special symbol and the short time state of a normal symbol) shown in the center part of FIG. 15 will be described. As shown in the center part of FIG. 15, in order to shift from this “probability short time state” to another state, a special symbol jackpot or a normal symbol transitioning after the end of “probability jackpot A” It is necessary to digest a short period (digest the prescribed number of times). As described above, the probability of winning the special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/30.

  First, in the “probability change short state”, when “probability change jackpot A” is won in 90% of the big win in the special symbol 1 lottery, the “probability change short state” will be entered after the jackpot ends in the same way as the “normal state”. (See the center left side of FIG. 15). In other words, the same state (“probability change short state”) is looped. Even if “probable jackpot A” is won, it is difficult for the player to get a prize ball, so if you continue to win “probable jackpot A” (continue to loop “probability short-time state”), it will be disadvantageous for the player. Become.

  Further, when “normal jackpot A” is won in 5% of the case where the special symbol 1 is won, the game shifts to the “normal state” after the jackpot ends (see the lower left part of the center in FIG. 15). That is, it becomes a disadvantageous state after the jackpot ends. And if it becomes “probable big hit B”, which is won in 5% of the big win in the special symbol 1 lottery, it shifts to the “resort state” after the jackpot ends (see the lower center of FIG. 15) ). As described above, this “renso” state is advantageous to the player because it is easy to win the “probability big hit D” that can obtain a large amount of prize balls.

  Furthermore, before the special symbol is a big hit, when the short-time state of the normal symbol is finished (if the special symbol is continuously out of the special time for a set short-time period), it will become the “adult state” that is most advantageous for the player. Transition (refer to the center right side of FIG. 15).

  Next, the “continuous state” shown in the lower part of FIG. 15 (a high probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 15, in order to shift from this “village state” to another state, it is necessary to win a special symbol. As described above, the probability of winning the special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/30.

  In “Landou State”, when “Normal Bonus B” is won in 5% of the case where a big win is won by lottery of Special Symbol 2, the game shifts to “Normal State” after a special game state of 1 round is given. (Refer to the lower left side of FIG. 15). In other words, the “rendezvous state” advantageous to the player is ended, and the player is disadvantaged (“normal state”).

  In addition, when it becomes “probability big hit C”, which is won in 5% of the case where it is a big win by the special symbol 2 lottery, after the special game state of 1 round is given, it shifts to the “probability short time state” (FIG. 15). See bottom left). That is, in this case as well, the “rendezvous state” advantageous to the player ends, and the player is disadvantaged (“probable change time short state”). As described above, different values are set for the short time period of the normal symbol set after the end of the jackpot depending on the jackpot type (“probable variation jackpot C1” to “probability variation jackpot C6”) (FIG. 10A). reference).

  In addition, when the special symbol 2 lottery results in a “probable jackpot D”, which is won in 90% of the case where the jackpot is won, a special game state of four rounds is given, and then the state shifts again to the “rengo state” (see FIG. (See the lower right of 15). In other words, a “ream” state that is advantageous to the player loops. As described above, when “probability big hit D” is reached, the second specific prize opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed or 5 balls have won) in each round. A large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the “probable change time short state”, the normal symbol time-short state is terminated (by continuously falling out of the special symbol only for the set short-time period), It is possible to shift to the “ream” state. Therefore, as the special symbols are removed, the player can feel as if they are in the “ream” state, so the player has a novel gameplay that is different from general gaming machines. Can be provided. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, once in the “renso state”, 90% of the case where the jackpot is won, a large amount of prize balls can be acquired, and the “spanning state” is set again after the jackpot is finished. It becomes. That is, it becomes a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with the expectation that the player will shift to the “rengo state” and loop the “renja state” more times. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 16, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a first variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the random symbol counter C4 is used for the normal symbol lottery, the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the second variation is selected for the variation pattern selection. A type counter CS2 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 40). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the mouth 64, respectively. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 2 execution area 203b. The random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type according to the timing of entering the second entrance 640. Each value of the selection counter C3 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the two entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 40).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the random number counter C1 of the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, as described above, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability that a special symbol is a big hit from the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for probabilities (a period in which a special symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 7B). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 199), After reaching the maximum value (199), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed mode is the one when the special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per-random number counter C1, there are eight random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number values are “5, 52, 78, 119, 138, 201, 262, 291”. Is stored in the first random number table for low probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 8 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 37.5”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 249, 270” is a high probability. It is stored in the first random number table for time. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/30”.

  In this embodiment, the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first per random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first per random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. Then, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, according to the value of the first hit type counter C2, “normal big hit A”, “normal big hit B”, “probability big hit A1” to “probable big change”. Out of the 74 jackpot types of "Big jackpot A64", "Probable variation jackpot B", "Probability variation jackpot C1" to "Probability variation jackpot C6", "Probability variation jackpot D", one of the jackpot types is selected as a large value type for special figure 1 It is selected from the table 202b1 (see FIG. 8A) or the special type 2 hit type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 8B).

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching occurs, the “stop reach” (for example, the final stop symbol is disengaged) (for example, 90 to 99) and “stop completely” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not generate reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “outreach reach” becomes as narrow as 90 to 99, and it is difficult to select “outreach reach”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “out of reach” is as wide as 80 to 99, and “out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done.

  The first variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern type from the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11B). For example, the first variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example. After reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), it returns to 0. Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the first variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the first variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are displayed. It is determined. The value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 11A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit if it matches the value of the random number set in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11A). In addition, as described above, the second random number table 202c is used for a normal symbol with a low probability (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability that a normal symbol is more likely to be hit than the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for time (period in which the normal symbol is in a short time state), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 40).

  The second variation type counter CS2 is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern type from the ordinary variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 13A). For example, the second variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example. After reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), it returns to 0. The variation time of the variation effect indicating the normal symbol lottery result is determined by the second variation type counter CS2. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 16, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 40), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (see FIG. 39) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, The figure holding ball number counter 203e, the probability change flag 203f, the hour / short time counter 203g, the pre-reading probability change flag 203h, and the advantageous state flag 203i are provided.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter. Each value of C1, first hit type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when lottery of special symbol 1 is performed in main controller 110, each value of each counter C1-C3 stored in the reserved first area of special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  The special symbol 2 execution area 203b is a storage area for temporarily storing (storing) each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning). Based on the counter values stored in the special symbol 2 execution area 203b, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed. In addition, since the entrance to the 2nd entrance 640 is not reserved as mentioned above, unlike the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, the reservation area is not provided.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding number 1). Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. As in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in other reserved areas are stored. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (the third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance into the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. 1 is added (see S404 in FIG. 34). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 32).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 32 and S405 in FIG. 34). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, it is possible to correct the deviation by the next reserved ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and displays a hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls whenever the number of held balls changes. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 36).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S703 in FIG. 37: No).

  The probability variation flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the probability variation flag 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. If the value of the probability variation flag 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (the low probability state of the special symbol). The initial state of the probability variation flag 203f is set to off, a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and the probability variation flag 203f is set to on at the end of any one of “probability variation big hit A” to “probability variation big hit D”. The Further, it is set to OFF when “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B” ends.

  When the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 33) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process, the state of the probability variation flag 203f is referred to. If the state is ON, the special symbol 1f random number table (see FIG. 7B) for high probability is used. On the other hand, if the state of the probability variation flag 203f is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the low probability first random number table (see FIG. 7B) (S303 in FIG. 33). , S304). Similarly, in the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 35), if the probability variation flag 203f is turned on, the special symbol 2 based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 7B) is used. On the other hand, if the state of the probability variation flag 203f is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the low probability first random number table (see FIG. 7B) (S507 in FIG. 35). , S508).

  The hour / minute counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203g is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and when the “probable variation jackpot A” or “probability variation jackpot C” ends, the jackpot type is determined. The corresponding value is set. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is finished until the value of the hour / minute counter 203g becomes 0 (S215 in FIG. 32).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the second random number table for high probability (see FIG. 11A). On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery 203g is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table (see FIG. 11 (a)) for low probability. A lottery is performed (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 36).

  The pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is used when the pachinko machine 10 pre-reads the lottery result of the special symbol based on the winning data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired according to the start winning. Whether the winning data should be analyzed as being in a probable state (high probability state of special symbol), or the winning data is analyzed as if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbol (low probability state of special symbol) It is a flag that indicates what should be done.

  When the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is on, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched. On the other hand, when the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is off, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. The pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is initialized to OFF when the RAM is initially set (see S915 in FIG. 39), and it is determined that the prefetched lottery results are “probability big hit A” to “probable big hit D”. (See S410 in FIG. 34 and S513 in FIG. 35). Each time the pre-read lottery result is determined to be “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B”, the lottery result is set to OFF (see S411 in FIG. 34 and S514 in FIG. 35).

  If the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is turned on when the pre-reading of the lottery in the special symbol is performed, the first per random number table for the high probability time, the stop type selection table for the high probability time, and the first per hit Each table of the type selection table is compared with winning data acquired according to the start winning. On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is OFF, the first per-random number table for the low probability time, the stop type selection table for the low probability time, and the first per-type selection table, and the start winning prize Are compared with the winning data obtained.

  The advantageous state flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the above-described “long-run state” is most advantageous for the player. A table corresponding to the gaming state is selected from the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d and the normal figure variation pattern selection table 202e in accordance with the state of the advantageous state flag 203i. This advantageous state flag 203i is turned on when the state is in the “ream” state (that is, when the short time period set after the end of the jackpot ends, and when the “probable variation jackpot B” or “probability variation jackpot D” ends). (See S217 in FIG. 32). Further, it is set to OFF at the end of “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B”, “probable variation jackpot A”, and “probability variation jackpot C” that do not become the “ream” state after the jackpot ends.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a, a back setting table 222b, and a continuous notice determination table 222c. The variation pattern table 222a is a data table for setting a detailed aspect of the variation effect based on the rough variation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 by the variation pattern command. In this variation pattern table 222a, variation effect modes corresponding to all variation pattern types that can be notified by the variation pattern command are defined.

  The back setting table 222b is a data table referred to for setting a back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, seven types of rear surfaces A to G are selectable, and according to the set type of the rear surface, whether the state is in the “village state”. It is configured to indicate whether or not, the remaining short time period, etc.

  The rear surface A is a rear image (wilderness stage) in which wilderness is displayed on the rear surface (see FIG. 23A). This back A is a back type that is likely to be set when the short time period of the normal symbol is 20 or more or when the special symbol has a low probability state. The back B is a back image (river stage) in which a river is displayed on the back, and is a back type that is easily set when the short time period of the normal symbol is less than 20 (see FIG. 23B). The back C is a back image (forest stage) in which forest is displayed on the back, and is a back type that is easily set when the short time period of the normal symbol is less than 10 times (see FIG. 24A). . Further, the back D is a back image (cave stage) in which a cave is displayed on the back, and is a back surface type set in the case of a “village state” (see FIG. 27A).

  The back E to the back G are used to indicate to the player that the short period of the normal symbol may end (that is, when there is a possibility of transition to the “long-story state”). The rear type (ceiling notification stage) (see FIG. 26A). The back E to the back G are set when the short time period of the normal symbol ends with the backs A to C being set, respectively.

  In this way, the player can be made to predict the state from the back image by changing the back surface type according to the state and the remaining time in a short time. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, details of the back setting table 222b will be described with reference to FIGS. The back surface setting table 202b is a data table in which each of the above-described back surface types is defined in association with a value of a ceiling number counter 223e described later and a value of a back surface determination counter 223h. When the special symbol lottery is executed or when the jackpot ends, it is determined whether or not to change the back surface type with reference to the back surface setting table 222b. Although the details will be described later, the ceiling number counter 223e is a counter that counts the remaining short time period, and the back surface determination counter 223h is 0 to 127 each time the main process (see FIG. 44) is executed by the MPU 221. It is a loop counter updated in the range of.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the back setting table 222b is composed of six types of data tables with different prescribed contents. Specifically, the back A time setting table 222b1 referred to when the back A is set, the back B time setting table 222b2 referred to when the back B is set, and the back C are set. Based on the fact that the rear C time setting table 222b3 that is referred to when the time period is short, the notification time setting table 222b4 for switching to the rear surface that notifies that fact, and a big hit In addition, the ceiling reset time setting table 222b5 that is referred to when the short time period of the normal symbol is reset and the back surface (rear surface EG) that suggests the end of the short time period have been set, but the short time period has not ended. And a notification back side setting table 222b6 referred to in the case (when the change of the back side is a fake).

  First, with reference to FIG. 17B, the back A setting table 222b1, which is one of the data tables constituting the back setting table 222b, will be described. As described above, this back A time setting table 222b1 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change the back surface type when the back surface A (wilderness stage) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 10 in the back A hour setting table 222b1, the back side A (wilderness stage) is in the range of “0 to 13” of the back determination counter 223h. ) Are associated. Further, the back C is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “14 to 127”. That is, when the remaining short time period is 10 times with the back surface A, if the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is in the range of “14 to 127”, the back surface type is changed to the back surface C, and the back surface determination counter 223h If the value is in the range of “0 to 13”, the back surface type remains unchanged as the back surface A. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that can be taken by the ceiling number counter 223e, the value corresponding to the change to the back surface C is 114 that is "14 to 127". The probability of changing to C is about 89% (114/128).

  When the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 20, the back A (wilderness stage) is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “0 to 13”. Further, the back B is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “14 to 127”. That is, when the remaining short time period is 20 times with the back surface A, if the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is in the range of “14 to 127”, the back surface type is changed to the back surface B, and the back surface determination counter 223h If the value is in the range of “0 to 13”, the back surface type remains unchanged as the back surface A. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that the ceiling number counter 223e can take, the value corresponding to the change to the back surface B is 114 that is “14 to 127”. The probability of changing to B is about 89% (114/128).

  Furthermore, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 to 99, the back surface A (wilderness stage) is associated with the range where the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is “0 to 125”. Further, the back surface B is associated with the value “126” of the back surface determination counter 223h. Then, the rear surface C is associated with the value “127” of the rear surface determination counter 223h. Of the 128 values 0 to 127 that the ceiling number counter 223e can take, only one value is changed to the back surface B and only one value is changed to the back surface C. Therefore, the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is In the case of 21 or more, the probability of changing to back B and back C is about 0.8% (1/128), respectively.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 9 times or less and in the range of 11 times to 19 times, the back image is not changed regardless of the value of the back surface determination counter 223h (back surface A It is configured so that it will remain.

  Further, the selection method of the back surface type in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is the same as the case where the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 to 99. That is, the back surface B is associated with the value “126” of the back surface determination counter 223h, and the back surface C is associated with the value “127” of the back surface determination counter 223h. Thereby, it can be made difficult to determine from the effect whether the current state is the “normal state” or the state in which the short time period of the normal symbol remains 21 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the “normal state” is the most disadvantageous for the player, and to quit the game at that time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is improved. Can do.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e becomes 20 (that is, when the remaining short time period becomes 20 times), the ceiling number counter 223e is easily changed to the back surface B. When the value of 10 becomes 10 (that is, when the remaining short time period becomes 10 times), the rear surface B is easily changed. Further, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 or more (when the remaining short time period is 21 or more), it is difficult to change to another back surface type. Thereby, since it is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining short time period is likely to be 20 times by changing to the back B, the special symbol lottery will be performed after the back is changed. The game can be made to continue until at least 20 times. In addition, by changing to the back C, it can be recognized that there is a high possibility that the remaining short time period is 10 times, until the special symbol lottery is performed at least 10 times from the change of the back side You can make them want to continue playing. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17C, the back B time setting table 222b2, which is one of the data tables constituting the back setting table 222b, will be described. As described above, the rear B time setting table 222b2 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change the rear surface type when the rear surface B (river stage) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (c), when the value of the ceiling counter 223e is 10 in the back B time setting table 222b3, the back B (river stage) is within the range of “0 to 13” of the back determination counter 223h. ) Are associated. Further, the back C is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “14 to 127”. That is, when the remaining short time period of the back B is 10 times, if the value of the back determination counter 223h is in the range of “14 to 127”, the back type is changed to the back C, and the back determination counter 223h If the value is in the range of “0 to 13”, the back surface type remains the back surface B and is not changed. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that can be taken by the ceiling number counter 223e, the value corresponding to the change to the back surface C is 114 that is "14 to 127". The probability of changing to C is about 89% (114/128).

  On the other hand, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 to 99, the back surface A (wilderness stage) is associated with the range where the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is “0 to 13”. Further, the back B is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “14 to 126”. Then, the rear surface C is associated with the value “127” of the rear surface determination counter 223h. Of the 128 values 0 to 127 that the ceiling number counter 223e can take, the value that is changed to the back surface A is 14, so the value is changed to the back surface A when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 or more. The probability is about 11% (14/128). Further, since only one value is changed to the back C, the probability of changing to the back C when the value of the ceiling counter 223e is 21 or more is about 0.8% (1/128).

  Further, the selection method of the back surface type in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is the same as the case where the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 to 99. That is, the back A is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “0 to 13”, and the back C is associated with the value “127” of the back determination counter 223h. Thereby, it can be made difficult to determine from the effect whether the current state is the “normal state” or the state in which the short time period of the normal symbol remains 21 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the “normal state” is the most disadvantageous for the player, and to quit the game at that time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is improved. Can do.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e becomes 10 (that is, when the remaining short time period becomes 10 times), the back surface B is easily changed to the back surface C. Yes. Further, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 or more (when the remaining short time period is 21 or more), it is easily changed from the back B to the back A (about 11%). Thereby, even if the value of the ceiling number counter 222b1 is 21 to 99 on the back surface A, even if the value is changed to the back surface B, it can be changed to the back surface A again with a relatively short number of fluctuations. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the back surface B from being continued for a long time even though the short time period is 21 times or more. In other words, the longer the back surface B continues, the more likely the remaining short time period is within 20 times. Therefore, the remaining short time period can be predicted more accurately by making the player refer to the back surface.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18A, the back C time setting table 222b3, which is one of the data tables constituting the back setting table 222b, will be described. As described above, the back C time setting table 222b3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change the back surface type when the back surface C (forest stage) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 11 or more in the back C hour setting table 222b3, the back A (wilderness) is within the range of “0 to 26” of the back determination counter 223h. Stage). Further, the back C is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “27 to 127”. That is, when the remaining short time period is 11 times or more, the back surface type is changed to the back surface A in the range where the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is “0 to 26”, and the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is “27 to 127”. In the range of “”, the back surface type remains the back surface C and is not changed. Of the 128 values from 0 to 127 that can be taken by the ceiling number counter 223e, the value corresponding to the change to the back surface A is 27 from “0 to 26”, so the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 11 or more. The probability of changing to back A is about 21% (27/128).

  Further, the selection method of the back surface type in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is the same as the case where the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 11 to 99. That is, the back surface A is associated with the range of “0 to 26” of the back surface determination counter 223h, and the back surface C is associated with the range of “27 to 127” of the back surface determination counter 223h. This makes it difficult to determine from the effect whether the current state is the “normal state” or the state in which the short time period of the normal symbol remains 11 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the “normal state” is the most disadvantageous for the player, and to quit the game at that time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is improved. Can do.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 10 or less, the back surface C is not changed to another back surface type (back surface A or back surface B). Further, when the value of the changed ceiling number counter 223e is 11 or more (that is, when the remaining short time period becomes 10 times), it is easily changed from the back C to the back A (about 21%). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the back surface C from being continued for a long time even though the short-time period is 11 times or more. In other words, the longer the back surface C is, the more likely the remaining short time period is within 10 times, so the remaining short time period can be predicted more accurately by making the player refer to the back surface.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18B, the notification time switching table 222b4, which is one of the data tables constituting the back setting table 222b, will be described. As described above, the notification time switching table 222b4 is a table that is referred to when switching to the back surface that notifies that when there is a high possibility that the short time period has elapsed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the short time period elapses, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the “ream home state” where it is easy to enter the second entrance 640. As described above, this “rensou state” is advantageous to the player because it becomes a “probable big hit D” in which a large amount of prize balls can be easily obtained when a big win is won by the special symbol 2 lottery. However, even in this “ream” state, it is not impeded that the ball enters the first entrance 64. Also, when the special symbol 1 is won by lottery, as described above, it is easy to win the “probable jackpot A” that becomes a short time state of the normal symbol after the jackpot ends. Therefore, if the player keeps hitting the ball aiming at the first entrance 64 without noticing that it has entered the “rengo state”, despite the transition to the “renja state”, “ Winning “probable big hit A” may end the “ream” state.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to change to the rear surface type (refer to FIG. 26) that suggests that the state is in the “continuous villa state” based on the passage of the short time period. In addition, the change of the back surface type is performed when it is determined that the time-short period elapses by pre-reading (that is, when the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls is executed, the state shifts to the “ream villa state”). Done. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from launching a ball aiming at the first entrance 64 after the rear surface type is changed. It can be suppressed that the lottery is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, when it is determined that the time-short period elapses in the state where the back surface A is set, the back surface E is changed regardless of the value of the back surface determination counter 223e. This back E displays a back image that imaged the wilderness like the back A, and further, there is a possibility that the short time period may end, so that it is a game to stop the injection of the ball to the first entrance 64 A notification image (see FIG. 26A) prompting the user is displayed.

  Similarly, when it is determined that the short time period has elapsed in the state where the rear surface B is set, the rear surface determination counter 223e is changed to the rear surface F regardless of the value. Further, when it is determined that the time-short period elapses in the state where the rear surface C is set, the rear surface is changed to the rear surface G regardless of the value of the rear surface determination counter 223e.

  Even if the short time period does not elapse, if a continuous notice effect (story effect executed over a plurality of fluctuating effects) to be described later is executed, it is changed to this back E. It is configured. As a result, even if a notification image (see FIG. 26A) is displayed, it is not possible to determine whether or not to shift to the “continuous state” until the result of the continuous notice effect is confirmed. Therefore, the display effect performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be more enjoyed with respect to a player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19A, the ceiling reset setting table 222b5 which is one of the data tables constituting the back setting table 222b will be described. As described above, the ceiling reset time setting table 222b5 has a special symbol jackpot so that when the short time period is newly set (or the normal state of the normal symbol is set), after the jackpot ends. It is a data table referred in order to select a back image according to the state of.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, in the ceiling reset time setting table 222b5, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 1 to 10 or more (when the short time period given after the end of jackpot is 10 times or less), The back surface A (wilderness stage) is associated with the range where the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is “0 to 13”. Further, the back C is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “14 to 127”. That is, when the short time period given after the jackpot is 10 times or less, the back surface type is set to “Back A” in the range of “0 to 13” of the back surface determination counter 223h, and the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is In the range of “14 to 127”, the back surface type is set to the back surface C.

  Further, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 11 to 20 (when the short time period given after the end of the jackpot is 11 to 20 times), the value of the back face determination counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 13”. The back A (wilderness stage) is associated. Further, the back B is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “14 to 127”. That is, when the short time period given after the jackpot is 11 to 20 times, the back surface type is set to the back surface A in the range of the value of the back surface determination counter 223h from “0 to 13”, and the back surface determination counter 223h If the value is in the range of “14 to 127”, the back surface type is set to the back surface B.

  When the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 to 99 (when the short time period given after the end of the jackpot is 21 times or more), the value of the back surface determination counter 223h is within the range of “0 to 89”. (Wilderness stage) is associated. Further, the back B is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “90 to 114”. Further, the back C is associated with the range where the value of the back determination counter 223h is “115 to 127”. That is, when the short time period given after the jackpot is 21 times or more, the back surface type is set to the back surface A in the range of the back surface determination counter 223h in the range of “0 to 89”, and the back surface determination counter 223h value is The back surface type is set to the back surface B in the range of “90 to 114”, and the back surface type is set to the back surface C in the range of the value of the back surface determination counter 223h of “115 to 127”.

  When the special symbol is set to the low probability state (normal state), the back image is selected at the same ratio as that when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 to 99. That is, the back side A is associated with the range where the back side determination counter 223h is “0 to 89”, the back side B is associated with the range where the back side determination counter 223h is “90 to 114”, and the back side determination counter 223h. Is associated with the range of “115 to 127”. Thereby, it can be made difficult to determine from the effect whether the current state is the “normal state” or the state in which the short time period of the normal symbol remains 21 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the “normal state” is the most disadvantageous for the player, and to quit the game at that time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is improved. Can do.

  As described above, the types of the rear images that are easily selected according to the short time given after the end of the jackpot are made different. Specifically, the rear surface C is easily selected when the short time period is 10 times or less. Further, the back surface B is easily selected when the short time period is 11 to 20 times, and the back surface A is easily selected when the short time period is 21 times or more. Furthermore, since there is a possibility that the back A is selected even when the short time period is short (within 20 times), even if the back time A is set after the jackpot is finished, it is assumed that the short time period is selected 21 times or more. Cannot be determined. Therefore, even if a short time period of 21 times or more is selected, it can be felt that there is a possibility that a short time period is set, so that the game can be continued for the player. In addition, when the low probability state (normal state) of a special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot, the back A is set. In addition, when the “continuous state” is set after the end of the jackpot, the back D is set.

  In addition, the aspect which suggests the remaining short time period is not restricted to this. For example, the character's clothes may be changed according to the remaining time in a short period, or the character itself may be changed to a different character (for example, a girl character). Moreover, you may comprise so that the display mode of a 3rd pattern may be changed according to the remaining time and a short time, a sound effect, a music, etc. may be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19B, a notification rear side setting table 222b6, which is one of the data tables constituting the above, will be described. As described above, the notification back side setting table 222b6 finishes setting the back side E to the back side G when the back side E to the back side G are set and the time reduction state does not end. ~ Data table referred to return to back C). Thereby, it is possible to cause the player who has stopped launching the ball by displaying the back surface E to the back surface G to fire the ball again aiming at the first entrance 64.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, the back side setting table 222b6 for notification defines the back side type to be set in association with the value of the continuous notice counter 223i. In addition, although mentioned later for details, the continuous notice counter 223i is a counter for discriminating the number of productions of the continuous notice effect executed over five fluctuation effects. The continuous notice counter 223i is set to 4 at the start of the continuous notice effect, the variable effect is executed, and is subtracted by 1 each time the effect progresses.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, when the currently set back surface is the back surface E, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 0 (that is, the variation effect executed last in the continuous notice effect). Switch to back A). On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 1 to 4 (that is, in the middle of the continuous notice effect), the rear E is not changed.

  Further, when the currently set back side is the back side F, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 0 (that is, in the case of the variable effect executed last in the continuous notice effect), the back side B is reached. Can be switched. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 1 to 4 (that is, in the middle of the continuous notice effect), it is not changed from the rear face F.

  Further, when the currently set back surface is the back surface E, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 0 (that is, in the case of the variable effect executed last in the continuous notice effect), the back surface A is displayed. Can be switched. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 1 to 4 (that is, in the middle of the continuous notice effect), it is not changed from the back E.

  In this manner, the back image is returned from the back type for notification (back E to back G) to the normal back type (back A to back C) in the variable effect executed at the end of the continuous notice effect. Has been. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player who has stopped launching the ball according to the back type for notification (back E to back G) to launch the ball again.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The continuous notice determination table 222c is a data table used to determine whether or not to set a continuous notice effect (an effect with a story that is executed over a plurality of fluctuating effects). Details of the continuous notice determination table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 19C is a diagram showing the specified contents of the continuous notice determination table 222c. In the continuous notice determination table 222c, the determination value of the notice determination counter 223j when it is determined that the continuous notice is set is defined in association with the value of the ceiling number counter 223e. Although details will be described later, the notice determination counter 223j is a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 127 every time the main process (see FIG. 44) is executed by the MPU 221. The continuous notice effect set here is a so-called gasse effect, and does not shift to the “long-run state” even if the continuous notice effect ends.

  As shown in FIG. 19C, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is in the range of 1 to 5, there is no value of the notice discrimination counter 223j that is judged to set the continuous notice effect. In addition, when the short time period is 5 times remaining, a continuous notice effect that shifts to the “ream state” (not a frustration) is set.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is in the range of 6 to 10, it is determined that the continuous notification effect is set in the range of the notification determination counter 223j of “0 to 6”. Further, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is in the range of 11 to 20, it is determined that the continuous notification effect is set in the range of the notification determination counter 223j of “0 to 13”. Further, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 21 or more, it is determined that the continuous notification effect is set in the range where the value of the notification determination counter 223j is “0 to 2”.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is difficult to set the continuous notice effect when the remaining short time period is 21 or more, and the continuous notice effect is set when the remaining short time period is 11 to 20 times. It is configured to be easy. This makes it possible for the player to think that there is a possibility that the short-term period is 20 times or less even if the state is not in the consecutive resort state after the end of the continuous notice effect, so motivation to continue the game Can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a ceiling number counter 223e, and a villa state flag 223f are stored. And a back flag 223g, a back determination counter 223h, a continuous notice counter 223i, and a notice determination counter 223j.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. In addition, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1608 in FIG. 46). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1603 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2102 in FIG. 51). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2107 in FIG. 51). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is determined to be set as it is.

  As described above, the ceiling number counter 223e is a counter used to determine the remaining number of times in a short period of time set after the end of the jackpot. Based on the value of the ceiling number counter 223e, a rear image is changed, a continuous notice effect is set, and the like. The ceiling number counter 223e is set to a value according to the jackpot type when the jackpot variation pattern is notified from the main controller 110 by a variation pattern command (see S1705 and S1708 in FIG. 47). In addition, every time a variation pattern indicating a deviation of the special symbol is notified by the variation pattern command, 1 is subtracted (see S1802 in FIG. 48).

  The renzo state flag 223f is a flag that indicates whether or not it is a period during which the “rendezvous state” effect is executed. If the state is on, an effect corresponding to the “rendezvous state” is currently executed. To do. Specifically, the back D is set as the back image. Further, if the extended game state flag 223f is off, a normal effect is set. The continuous state flag 223f indicates that the variation type notified by the variation pattern command is a variation effect corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D (see S1710 in FIG. 47), or the time shortened state of the normal symbol. When it is determined that the processing has been completed (see S1804 in FIG. 48), it is set to ON. Further, when the variation type notified by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot A, a normal jackpot B, a probability variation jackpot A, or a probability variation jackpot C (see S1706 and S1709 in FIG. 47).

  The back flag 223g is a flag indicating the currently set back image type. This back flag is composed of 1 byte, for example. Then, 00H to 06H are associated as values corresponding to the back surface A to the back surface G, respectively. For example, when the back C is set, 02H (0010B in binary notation) is set. The value of the back flag 223g is changed whenever the type of the back image is changed (see S1504, S1508, S1512 in FIG. 45, and S1810, S1815 in FIG. 48).

  The back surface determination counter 223h is a counter referred to for determining whether or not to change the back surface type. Whether or not to change the back surface type is determined based on the value of the back surface determination counter 223h and the specified contents of the back surface setting table 222b. The back side determination counter 223h is composed of a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 127, and is updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 44).

  The continuous notice counter 223i is a counter indicating how many times the variable effect is executed when the continuous notice effect set over the five variable effects is executed. In accordance with the value of the continuous notice counter 223i, a mode of a variation effect executed during the continuous notice effect is set, or a back image is set. The continuous notice counter 223i is set to 4 when the continuous notice effect is set (see S1906 in FIG. 49), and is decremented by 1 every time the start of the change effect is notified by the change pattern command during the continuous notice effect. (See S1903 in FIG. 49).

  The notice determination counter 223j is a counter referred to for determining whether or not to set a continuous notice effect. Whether or not to set the continuous notice effect is determined based on the value of the notice determination counter 223j and the specified contents of the continuous notice determination table 222c. The notice determination counter 223j is composed of a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 127, and is updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 44).

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  The MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (such as characters) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 52) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 54B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2203 and S2204 in FIG. 52).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 21, a power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 21 shows that the display controller 114 turns on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to turn on the main power-on main shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 21 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 21 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on A power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and 21 (c) are alternately displayed in the third symbol display device. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 so as to be displayed at 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back image and the back image will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the seven types of back images and the range of back images stored for each back image in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. FIG. 22B shows a rear surface B corresponding to the “river stage”, a rear surface C corresponding to the “forest stage”, a rear surface D corresponding to the “cave stage”, and a rear surface A corresponding to the “wilderness stage”. It is shown with respect to the back surface E-back surface G corresponding to each ceiling alerting | reporting stage, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A to G are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to G (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured so that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the back surface type is changed based on the back surface setting table, the MPU 231 first sets the position between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area, and the image at the initial position is the third pattern. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 22A, the rear surface A corresponding to the wilderness stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. By making all the image data of the back A corresponding to the wilderness stage, which is the initial stage, reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 is reduced. can do.

  On the other hand, the back B corresponding to the river stage, the back C corresponding to the forest stage, the back D corresponding to the cave stage, and the back E to the back G corresponding to the ceiling notification stage, as shown in FIG. Only a part of the back surface, that is, image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the back image when the change of the back image is determined, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the back images. is there. However, with this configuration, a very large capacity RAM must be used as the resident video RAM 235, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ′, and the position from the position a including the initial position is set. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the stage is changed even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. In this case, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the back B and the back C can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the scroll display can be changed with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B to the back surface G, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Further, the rear B to the rear G are displayed from the initial position image, and then the range from the position a to the position b is set from left to right using image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Note that, in the back B to the back G, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 20) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Next, a specific example of the rear image actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a specific example during the continuous notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 23A is a diagram illustrating an example of the back surface A (wilderness stage) described above. As shown in FIG. 23A, when the back A (wilderness stage) is set, an image of an adventurer character 801 carrying a sword and a shield walking in the wilderness full of Iwayama is a back image. Is displayed. The character 801 is configured to suggest a degree of expectation that is a big hit or an expectation that a short time period ends by performing various actions with various effects performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, the back surface A (wilderness stage) is a back surface type that is likely to be displayed when the short time period of the normal symbol is 21 or more or when the special symbol has a low probability state (normal state). Therefore, based on the display of the back surface A, the remaining short time period until the short time period ends can be predicted.

  FIG. 23B is a diagram illustrating a display example of the back surface B (river stage) described above. When this back B (river stage) is set, a display image in which the character 801 rides on the raft and goes down the river is displayed as a back image. This back surface B (river stage) is a back surface type that is easily displayed when the short time period of the normal symbol is 11 to 20 times. Based on the display of this back B (river stage), it is possible to think that there is a high possibility that the short-term period is less than 20 times. Can be made to look at the situation until is executed 20 times. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  FIG. 24A is a diagram illustrating a display example of the back surface C (forest stage) described above. When this back C (forest stage) is set, a display image in which the character 801 advances through the forest with trees is displayed as a back image. This back C (Mori stage) is a back type that is easily displayed when the short time period of the normal symbol is less than 10 times. Based on the display of this back C (Mori stage), it can be considered that there is a high possibility that the short-term period is less than 10 times. Can be seen to see how it is executed 10 times. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG.24 (b), FIG.25, and FIG.26, the display aspect of the continuous notice effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is demonstrated. As described above, this continuous notice effect is an effect in which an effect with a story is executed over five variable effects. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as this continuous notice effect, an effect of fighting the monster 802 that protects the entrance of the cave 803 where the treasure is hidden is executed over five variable effects. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is suggested whether or not to shift to the “continuous state” based on whether or not to destroy the monster 802.

  This continuous notice effect is configured so that it is always set when there are five remaining time reduction periods, and an effect of destroying the monster 802 is executed by the continuous notice effect. In addition, after the continuous notice effect is completed (that is, when the time-shortening period becomes zero), it is configured to shift to the “spanning state”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the short time period is five or more remaining, or in the case of the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol, the continuous notice effect is set when setting the variation effect mode. There is. In this case, the effect that the character 801 is defeated by the monster 802 is executed in the fifth variation effect from the start of the continuous notice effect. Thereby, it can be made to recognize with respect to a player that it has not changed to a "renso state".

  FIG. 24B is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the continuous notice effect is executed in the state set to the back C (forest stage). . When the start of the continuous notice effect is determined at the start of the change, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), the effect that the cave 803 and the monster 802 that protects the entrance of the cave 803 appear in the traveling direction of the character 801 is displayed. The Then, as shown in FIG. 25A, an effect in which the character 801 and the monster 802 stare is displayed. These display effects are displayed during the fluctuating effects set to start the continuous notice effect. Although not shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a forest is displayed in the back even when the character 801 and the monster 802 are staring at each other or during a battle. Has been. Similarly, when a continuous notice effect is started in the wilderness stage or the river stage, the character 801 and the monster 802 are configured to battle each other against the background of the wilderness or river.

  In addition, when the hold ball corresponding to the number of changes until the end of the continuous notice effect is put on hold during the execution of the change effect, a notification image 804 shown in FIG. 25B is displayed (the back image is a ceiling notification). Switch to the back for). Specifically, when the entry to the first entrance 64 corresponding to the variation effect executed for the fifth time of the variation effect is put on hold, it corresponds to the held entry on the small area Ds1. A reserved ball number symbol (fourth reserved ball number symbol) to be displayed is displayed, and a notification image 804 is displayed. In the example of FIG. 25 (b), since it is the first time of the continuous notice effect, the notification image 804 is controlled to be displayed when the fourth reserved ball number symbol is displayed. The number of reserved balls on which the notification image 804 is displayed varies depending on the number of changes after the setting. That is, if the continuous notice effect is changing for the second time, the third reserved ball number symbol is displayed and the notification image 804 is displayed. Also, if the third change of the continuous notice effect is in progress, the second reserved ball number symbol is displayed and the notification image 804 is displayed. If the fourth change is in progress, the first hold ball is displayed. Control is performed so that several images are displayed and a notification image 804 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (b), the notification image 804 displays characters such as “Ceiling! Please support without hitting the ball!”. By displaying these characters, it is possible to prompt the player to stop the launch of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of held balls exceeding the number of fluctuations executed during the continuous notice effect from being held during the continuous notice effect. Therefore, although the transition to the “spanning state” is made after the end of the continuous notice effect, the “sitting state” state is in progress based on the entry to the first entrance 64 held during the continuous notice effect. The lottery of the special symbol 1 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the “renzo state” is ended by the lottery of the special symbol 1 during the “renso state” and the “renso state” is terminated. You can fully enjoy the "state".

  This notification image 804 is configured to be displayed even when the short time period does not end after the end of the continuous notice effect (that is, when the continuous notice effect of the gusset is displayed). That is, the notification image 804 is displayed when the holding ball corresponding to the number of fluctuations until the end of the continuous notice effect is put on hold, regardless of whether or not the result of the continuous notice effect is shifted to “continuous state”. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether or not the “continuous state” state is to be transitioned to after the end of the continuous notice effect by simply displaying the notification image 804, so that the player can confirm the result of the continuous notice effect more interestingly. be able to. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  A plurality of aspects of the notification image 804 may be provided. In addition, a mode that is set only when the “continuous state state” is set after the end of the continuous notice effect (for example, a mode in which “Let's support the ceiling without hitting the ball! ) And a mode that can be set regardless of the result of the continuous notice effect (for example, a mode in which characters such as “Ceiling ?! Please support without hitting the ball!”) Are provided. . Thereby, the player can be pleased by displaying the mode in which the transition to the “rengo state” is confirmed. Therefore, since attention can be paid not only to the contents of the effect of the continuous notice effect but also to the mode of the notification image 804, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  FIG. 26A shows an example of display contents when the fourth variation effect of the continuous notice effect is set in a state where the notification image 804 is displayed. In the fourth continuous notice effect, an effect in which the character 801 attacks the monster 802 is displayed. When a change effect corresponding to the fifth continuous effect is executed after this effect is displayed, the monster 802 falls and a victory notification image 805 (win !!!! left) indicating that the character 801 has won the monster 802. Either an effect in which the characters “Stop hitting!” Are displayed (see FIG. 26B) or an effect in which the monster 802 fights back and the character 801 is defeated. It is configured as follows. Thereby, the player can easily recognize whether or not to shift to the “rengo state”.

  Further, in the fifth effect of the continuous notice effect, the battle result between the character 801 and the monster 802 is displayed immediately after the start of fluctuation. In other words, when the state is shifted to the “village state”, the display content shown in FIG. 26B is displayed immediately after the start of the change. As a result, even if the fourth variation effect of the continuous notice effect is finished in a state where there is no holding ball, and the fifth change effect of the continuous notice effect is started based on a new start winning prize after that, It is possible to prevent the winning at the first entrance 64 being suspended during the fluctuating effect. This is because by confirming the victory notification image 805, it is possible to make the player recognize that the ball will be lost if the ball is launched to the left side of the board surface 13 (left-handed). Therefore, even when the fourth variation effect is ended without holding the holding ball corresponding to the number of times of change until the end of the continuous notification effect (that is, when the notification image 804 cannot be displayed), the continuous notification effect is generated. The lottery of the special symbol 1 can be prevented from being executed during the “ream” state based on the entry to the first entrance 64 held during the fifth variation effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the “renzo state” is ended by the lottery of the special symbol 1 during the “renso state” and the “renso state” is terminated. You can fully enjoy the "state".

  Note that the mode of the continuous notice effect is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined as long as it can indicate whether or not the player is in an advantageous state. For example, the adventurer's character 801 performs an effect of climbing a high tower, and suggests whether or not it will be in a “village state” depending on whether it can climb the tower without losing the obstruction of the monster 801 or the like. May be.

  Further, the method for suppressing the number of held balls exceeding the number of fluctuations executed during the continuous notice effect is not limited to displaying the notification image 804. For example, when the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured with a touch panel, and the reserved balls for the number of fluctuations executed during the continuous notice effect are accumulated, two distant locations in the 3rd symbol display device 81 are played. You may encourage them to touch each other with their hands. Thereby, since a player's hand can be separated from the handle | steering-wheel 51, it can suppress that a player launches a ball | bowl. Therefore, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the “renzo state” is ended by the lottery of the special symbol 1 during the “renso state” and the “renso state” is terminated. Can fully entertain.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the back D (cave stage), which is the back type set in the “continuous state”, will be described. As shown in FIG. 27A, when the back surface D is set, a back image in which the character 801 searches the cave is displayed. In the display area 806 provided in the lower part of the third symbol display device 81, characters “cave search mode” are displayed. In addition, characters “right-handed” are displayed on the left and right of the character. Here, as described above, in the “ream” state, it is easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 by launching the ball toward the right side of the game board 13. Also, a special symbol 2 lottery is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, and if it is a big win, it is configured to have a “probability big hit D” with a probability of 90%. . This “probable big hit D” is able to win a large amount of prize balls, and after the jackpot is over, the “renso state” is set again (a high probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol are set) Jackpot) and the most advantageous jackpot for the player. Therefore, in order to make the lottery of the special symbol 2 that is likely to become “probability big hit D” in the “renso” state, the character “right-handed” is displayed in the display area 806 and the right side of the game board 13 is displayed. The player is encouraged to launch a ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from being shot out by mistake aiming at the first entrance 64 in the “rengo state”, so that the “renja state” can be more enjoyed.

  FIG. 27 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display effects in the case where the rear face D is set (“continuous state”) and the big symbol is won by lottery of the special symbol 2. As shown in FIG. 27B, when the variation effect corresponding to the jackpot is executed in a state where the back surface D is set, the variation effect in which the same main symbols are arranged in the small area Ds2 is executed, and the character An effect is performed in which 801 finds the treasure box 807. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, after a change effect is performed in the small area | region Ds2 and a stop symbol is displayed, it is comprised so that a stop symbol may be largely stopped and displayed with respect to the main display area Dm (refer FIG.5 (b)). . Thereby, the player can confirm a stop symbol clearly. This stop display state continues for at least 1 second. Then, when the next variation effect is started or the demonstration effect is started, the stop display state is ended.

  Note that the effect in the case of performing the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot is not limited to the effect of finding the treasure box 807. Any mode that suggests that the player is in an advantageous state (a state in which a prize ball can be obtained) can be arbitrarily determined. Moreover, it is not necessary to perform the same effect for all jackpot types. For example, if “normal jackpot B” or “probable jackpot C”, which is a jackpot type in which the “renja state” ends after the jackpot ends, it is suggested that the jackpot is not desirable for the player. An effect may be executed in a manner. For example, an effect may be executed in which the cave collapses and the character 801 escapes from the cave. By performing the effect of the character 801 escaping from the cave, the player can easily recognize that the “cave stage” has ended (that is, the “rengo state” has ended).

  Further, in the “renso state”, it may be configured to suggest whether or not the “renso state” continues after the jackpot ends due to the effect of the jackpot. Specifically, for example, in the variable effect for informing the jackpot, an effect of finding the closed treasure chest 807 is executed, and the effect of opening the treasure chest 807 in the subsequent jackpot effect is executed. You may comprise. And if a treasure is in the treasure box 807, it will be in the “ream” state even after the jackpot ends. Further, it may be configured to suggest that the “rensou state” ends after the jackpot ends.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a predetermined sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If the jackpot is one of the jackpots C, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, when “probability jackpot A” and “probability jackpot B” (a jackpot that makes it difficult to win a prize ball), it is difficult to recognize that the player has won a jackpot. The above effects are executed. That is, in the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect, the display effect is executed as if the changing effect for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is continued (executed before the jackpot) The execution period of the variation effect to be performed and the effect periods of the respective effects performed during the jackpot are connected to execute one variation effect). For this reason, in the data table storage area 233b, “probability big hit A” and “probability big hit B” (hits that are difficult to win a prize ball as data tables corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect) ) A dedicated data table and a data table corresponding to a jackpot that allows players other than these to win prize balls are stored, and a display data table corresponding to the jackpot type is set. This makes it difficult to recognize that it has been a big hit that makes it difficult to win a prize ball, and even if the big hit is announced, the big hit ends without getting the prize ball, and the player is discouraged. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type is the back surface A to the stage selected by the player (any one of “wilderness stage”, “river stage”, “forest stage”, “cave stage”, and “ceiling notification stage”). Information for specifying which of G is displayed is described.

  The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the specified stage among the rear surfaces A to G as the drawing target when the rear surface type specifies that any one of the rear surfaces A to G is displayed. The range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time passes.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 28). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 29 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 29).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2205 in FIG. 52). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3805 in FIG. 63 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2501 in FIG. 54B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 54B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 54B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Step S2509 in FIG. 54B is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 55 to 59) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3701 in FIG. 63A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 63B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 30) to be described later describing the contents of image drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 54B). ) (See S2503)), pointer update processing (see S3405 in FIG. 60) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list (FIG. 30) and the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is obtained. Add to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As illustrated in FIG. Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 54B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3407 in FIG. 60). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2202 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3913 in FIG. 64). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “off” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3914 in FIG. 64). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4002 in FIG. 65).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 54B) is executed (see S4002 in FIG. 65).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 31 to 41. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 299, 199, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 ( S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 40) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol 1 lottery is performed on the first symbol display device 37, and a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variation display based on the lottery result is executed (S208). The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S209: No), the display mode of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is updated (S210), and this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 1 variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. Thus, it is determined whether the normal jackpot B, the probability variation jackpot A, or the probability variation jackpot B.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the lighting aspect of several LED provided in the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 may be changed according to jackpot classification. Each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S212). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S213), and the process proceeds to S218. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S213, if the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 40) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and an opening command is set. (See S1102 in FIG. 41). In the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S212, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1. When it is determined that it is not above (that is, 0) (S214: No), the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S214, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S214: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is decremented by one (S215).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the short time counter 203g after subtraction has become 0 (S216), and if it is 0 (S216: Yes), the short time period ends due to the variation effect of the special symbol this time. This means that the symbol shifts to the normal state (that is, shifts to the “ream” state), so that the advantageous state flag 203i is set to ON to indicate the “ream state” (S217). The process proceeds to S218.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is not 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command for stopping the variation of the third symbol is set in the third symbol display device (S218), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S208). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 32) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are selected. It is a process for determining the production pattern (fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed in step S2.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random-number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203f of the RAM 203 is on (S302). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203f is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol high probability state (probability variation state). Therefore, based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first per-random number table for high probability (see FIG. 7B), whether or not the special symbol is a big hit The lottery result is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random numbers stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 7B). As described above, ten random numbers corresponding to the special symbol, “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270”, are set. When the value of the counter C1 matches the random number value that is a hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the probability variation flag 203f is 0 (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 And a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 7B) (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random number values stored in the first random number table for low probability. As random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, eight values of “5, 52, 78, 119, 138, 201, 262, and 291” are set. Is determined to be a jackpot of a special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S305). : Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the hit type selection table 202b1 for special figure 1, and the big hit of 66 kinds of special symbols Of the normal jackpot A, the probability variation jackpot A1 to the probability variation jackpot A64, the probability variation jackpot B, it is determined what the jackpot type is (see FIG. 8A).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (normal jackpot A, probability variation jackpot A1 to probability variation jackpot A64, probability variation jackpot B). The In addition, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, this jackpot type (normal jackpot A, probability variation jackpot A1 to probability variation jackpot A64, probability variation jackpot B) is set as the stop category. Is done.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the special figure 1 normal / accuracy change time selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 12A). Based on the above, the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined.

  If it is determined in S305 that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on the above, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as either front-rear outreach, reach other than front-rear out, or complete disengagement.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 Based on the above, the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined.

  When the processing of S307 or S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 40). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first ball inlet 64 and the second ball inlet 640. When there is a start winning, a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and a prefetch of a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of lottery hold in the special symbol 1) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S403: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) described later executed by the MPU 201, the voice It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, based on the state of the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h in the RAM 203 and the various counter values stored in the process of S406, whether or not the lottery is a special symbol (whether it is a big win) and its stop type (in the case of a big win) Is a jackpot type) and its fluctuation pattern is predicted (S408). Here, if the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is on, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S406 and the first per-random number table for high probability. It is determined by comparing each of 10 random values (winning values) stored in (see FIG. 7B) one by one. As described above, ten random numbers corresponding to the special symbol, “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270”, are set. When the value of the counter C1 matches the random number value that is a hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is off, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the first per-random number table for low probability ( It is determined by comparing each of the 8 random values (winning values) stored in FIG. 7 (b). As described above, eight random numbers “5, 52, 78, 119, 138, 201, 262, 291” are set as the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. Are determined to be a big hit of the special symbol.

  When it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b. The jackpot type is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is out, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is the outreach reach. It is determined whether it is present or not completely.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is obtained from the special lottery pattern selection table 202d stored in the ROM 202 (see FIGS. 11B and 12), the predicted lottery result, and the predicted stop type. The variation pattern is selected according to the type of jackpot in the case of jackpot.

  If the process of S407 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, a stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and a variation pattern, then the predicted lottery is predicted, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408).

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) to be described later executed by the MPU 201, an audio lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  After the winning information command is set by the processing of S409, it is determined whether or not the lottery predicted in the processing of S408 is a special symbol jackpot (S409). When the lottery result predicted in the process of S407 is any one of “probable big hit A” to “probable big hit D” (S409: Yes), the pre-reading probable changing flag 203h is set to ON (S410), and S413. Move on to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result predicted in the process of S407 is not “probable big hit A” to “probable big hit D” (S409: No), the predicted lottery result is “normal big hit A” or “normal It is determined whether or not the jackpot B "(S411). If it is determined that the value is either “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B”, the pre-reading probability changing flag 203h is set to OFF (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, in the process of S411, when it is determined that it is not “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B” (that is, the lottery result is out of the special symbol), the process of S412 is skipped and the process of S413 is performed. Migrate to In the process of S413, the special symbol 2 winning process for setting the start of the variation effect is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 (S413), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the special symbol 2 winning process (S413) described above will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol 2 winning process (S413) is a process for setting the start of the variation effect based on the ball entering the second entrance 640. In this special symbol 2 winning process, it is first determined whether or not a ball entering the second entrance 640 has been detected (S501). In the process of S501, when the entrance of the sphere into the second entrance 640 is not detected (S501: No), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if a ball entering the second entrance 640 is detected by the processing of S501 (S501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a changing effect is being executed (S502). If the variation effect is being executed (S502: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the ball entering the second entrance 640 is discarded without being held.

  If the variation effect is not being executed in the process of S502 (S502: No), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504), and it is determined that it is not 0 (that is, the variation effect in the special symbol 1 is held). If so (S504: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: Yes), the first random number counter C1 and the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above Each value of the winning type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the special symbol 2 execution area 203b of the RAM 203, thereby controlling the special symbol 2 to be selected.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current state is a high probability state of a special symbol by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203f is on (S506). If the probability variation flag 203f is on, the processing of S505 is performed. The stored value of the first random number counter C1 and the 10 random number values (hit values) stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 7B) one by one. By comparing, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S507), and the process proceeds to S509. As described above, ten random numbers corresponding to the special symbol, “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270”, are set. When the value of the counter C1 matches the random number value that is a hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S506, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203f is off (S506: No), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the process of S505 and the first for low probability are used. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit by comparing each of the eight random number values (hit values) stored in the hit random number table (see FIG. 7B) (S508), The process proceeds to S509. As described above, eight random numbers “5, 52, 78, 119, 138, 201, 262, 291” are set as the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. Are determined to be a big hit of the special symbol.

  In the processing of S509 executed after the completion of S507 or S508, it is determined whether or not the determination result by the processing of S507 or S508 is a special symbol jackpot (S509), and if it is a special symbol jackpot (S509) : Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S505 (S510). In the process of S510, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type. In addition, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S511). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of S511, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the table to be referred to according to the gaming state (whether or not it is the “ream” state) (one of the special figure 2 normal / accuracy variable time reduction selection table 202d2 or the common probability variable non-short time selection table 202d3) ) And confirm the selected table and the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203. Based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, normal reach, super reach, and super long Determine the fluctuation time of the design fluctuation such as reach. As described above, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by the special figure variation pattern selection table 202d.

  When the processing of S511 is completed, it is then determined whether the jackpot type is any one of “probability variation jackpot A” to “probability variation jackpot D” (S512), and “probability variation jackpot A” to “probability variation jackpot D” is determined. If it is any (S512: Yes), the prefetching probability change flag 203f is set to ON (S513), and the process proceeds to S517. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not “probable variation jackpot A” to “probability variation jackpot D” (that is, “normal jackpot A” or “normal jackpot B”) (S512: No), the prefetching probability variation flag 203f. Is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S517.

  In the process of S509, when it is determined that the special symbol is off (S509: No), the display mode at the time of the off is set (S515). In the process of S515, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on the above, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S516). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. Specifically, the table to be referred to according to the gaming state (whether or not it is the “ream” state) (one of the special figure 2 normal / accuracy variable time reduction selection table 202d2 or the common probability variable non-short time selection table 202d3) ) And the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super long reach is determined based on the selected table and the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the processing of S513, S514, or S516 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S511 or S516 is set (S517). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S510 or S515 is set (S518). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 40). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S518 ends, the process returns to the start winning process. By this special symbol 2 winning process (S413), the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be executed only when the variation effect is not executed and the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 does not exist.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 31), and is accompanied by the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203g in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). Note that the hour / short counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 11A), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). ). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability (see FIG. 11A). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 239”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. That is, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol in the entire range that the value of the second random number counter C4 can take (see FIG. 11A).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low probability Based on the second random number table for time, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability (see FIG. 11A). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-222”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 223-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbols (see FIG. 11A).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state flag 203i is on (i.e., the "long-run state") (S614). If it is on (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit with a special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 3 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the advantageous state flag 203i is off (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set. In addition to setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S612 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state flag 203i is turned on (S619). If the advantageous state flag 203i is turned on (S619: Yes), the universal figure certain change non-short-time selection table 202e2, Based on the value of the 2 fluctuation type counter CS2, the fluctuation display fluctuation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the advantageous state flag 203i is off (S619: No), the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is based on the universal chart normal / probability changing time selection table 202e1 and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. Is set (S621), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the “renso state”, compared to the special symbol low probability state (normal state), special symbol high probability state (probability change), and normal symbol time short state (short time), Since the time of the fluctuation display becomes very short as “1 second” and the release period of the second entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 3 times”. 2 The ball enters the entrance 640 easily.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 40) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 40) is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance 67, and if a sphere has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: No), or the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is less than 4 even though the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 If not (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter One is added to the value (M) of 203e (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S913 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and it is determined whether the calculated RAM determination value is normal (S907). If it is determined in step S907 that the RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data is destroyed. In this case, the process proceeds to S913. As will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. 40, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S914, S915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, based on the state of the probability variation flag 203f and the value of the hour / minute counter 203g, a state command for notifying the sound lamp controller 113 of the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of start-up is generated, The sound is output to the sound lamp controller 113. Since the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are not backed up, the stored contents are lost when the power is turned off. For this reason, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state of a special symbol or a short time period of a normal symbol based on the state command output from the main controller 110) ) And various effects are set based on the determined gaming state. Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during business hours, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that an effect that contradicts the actual gaming state is executed after the power is restored. Although the details will be described later, the status command output by the processing of S901 is performed by the MPU of the sound lamp control device 113 during the startup processing (see FIG. 42) (see FIG. 43). The various flags are updated based on the gaming state notified by the state command.

  When the processing of S910 ends, an effect permission command is then transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S911). Next, an interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the start-up process (see FIG. 39) ends will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device ( External output processing to be transmitted to the peripheral control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 31) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) or the start winning process (see FIG. 34) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 34) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 41) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated (S1002). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. To do. Then, the updated values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then the special symbol jackpot state is reached. In this case, the jackpot control process for executing the jackpot effect or opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol 1 variation start processing (see FIG. 33), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol. Start on display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol 1 variation start processing (see FIG. 33) is completed, the first symbol display is displayed. The variation display being executed in the device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 33). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S620 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 36) or the processing of S621, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 36), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36) ( (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). When it is determined that the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the first variation type counter CS1, and the second variation type counter CS2 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 38 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area backed up in the RAM 203 and the work area.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 40). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) S213 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this processing is terminated.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1103). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1103, if the special symbol is a big hit (1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is selected according to the jackpot type. A round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1104 (S1104: No), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. It is determined whether or not the closing condition is satisfied (S1107). Specifically, when the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened, the closing condition is set when 0.2 seconds have elapsed or when five balls have been won. It is determined that it has been established. Further, when the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when 30 seconds have elapsed or five balls have been won. .

  In the processing of S1107, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the first The specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (S1108), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not satisfied (S1107: No), the ending effect is displayed. It is determined whether it is a start timing (S1109). Specifically, when the final round of the special gaming state is completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  In the process of S1109, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending command is set (S1110), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1109 that it is not the ending start timing (S1109: No), it is then determined whether or not it is a jackpot end timing (S1111). Specifically, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect, it is determined that it is a jackpot end timing. If it is determined that the jackpot end timing is reached (S1111: Yes), the state setting table 202f is read (S1112), and the current jackpot type and after the jackpot end specified in the state setting table 202f are read. Based on the setting, the probability change flag 203f, the hour / middle counter 203g, the free state flag 203i, etc. of the RAM 203 are updated (S1113), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1111 that it is not the jackpot end timing (S1111: No), this processing is ended as it is.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42 to FIG. 51, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 42, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1419 (see FIG. 44) depends on whether the current start-up process is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 44, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1416 in FIG. 44), it executes a power-off process in S1419. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1419 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1318 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1418 in FIG. 44). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1419 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1419 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210).

  When the process of S1210 is completed, a state command process for determining the state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed based on a state command (see S910 in FIG. 39) output from the main controller 110 when the power is turned on (see FIG. 39). S1211), interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1208 is performed via the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the state command process is performed. Execute (S1211), set the interrupt permission (S1212), and proceed to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the state command process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the startup process (see FIG. 42) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. This status command processing (S1211) is a status command output to the sound lamp control device 113 in order to notify the gaming status at the time of power recovery in the startup processing (see FIG. 39) in the main control device 110. This is a process performed to accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 based on the above.

  In this state command process (S1211), first, it is determined whether or not the state notified by the state command is a special symbol high probability state (S1301), and is not a special symbol high probability state (ie, a special symbol). (S1301: No), the value of the ceiling number counter 223e corresponding to the remaining short time is set to 0, and whether or not it is in the “continuous state” is determined. The consecutive resort state flag 223f shown is set to OFF (S1302), and this process is terminated. By the process of S1302, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can determine that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol low-probability state (normal state) in subsequent processes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that an effect corresponding to the “rensou state” is erroneously executed and the player misidentifies the state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the special symbol is in a high probability state (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the short time period notified by the state command is 0 (S1303). . If it is determined that the short time period is 0 (S1303: Yes), the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is set to 0, and the extended villa state flag 223f is set to ON (S1304). finish. By the process of S1304, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can determine that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “continuous state” in the processes executed thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that an effect corresponding to a state other than the “renso state” is erroneously executed, and the player quits the game despite the “renso state”.

  In the process of S1303, when it is determined that the short time period notified by the status command is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1303: No), the notified short time period is set to the value of the ceiling number counter 223e. At the same time, the consecutive resort state flag 223f is set to OFF (S1305), and this process is terminated. Through the processing of S1305, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can determine that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of a special symbol and a short-time state of a normal symbol in subsequent processing. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that an effect corresponding to the “rengo state” is mistakenly executed, and that the player misidentifies the “renso state”.

  As described above, by executing the state command process, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that it is possible to prevent the player from misinterpreting the state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the start of the main process or the previous process of S1401 (S1401). If not (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1412 without performing S1402 to S1411. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1402 to S1411 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1412, the change display setting process of S1413, and the process of updating the counter values of S1414 and S1415 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1412 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1413 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1413 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1402). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1408 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1404). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1407). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1407 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1408), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1409, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1409 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. When the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1410) is completed, a rear and rear face setting process is executed (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. This hit / rear back setting process (S1411) is a process for setting a rear image after the big hit is completed. Details of the rear and rear face setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1412, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1412). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1413). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1413 is completed, the rear determination counter 223h used for determining whether or not to change the rear image is updated (S1414). Specifically, the value of the back face determination counter 223h is read from the RAM 223, 1 is added to the value, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (127 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the back surface determination counter 223h is stored in the back surface determination counter 223h.

  Next, the notice determination counter 223j used for determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect is updated (S1415). Specifically, the value of the notice determination counter 223j is read from the RAM 223, 1 is added to the value, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (127 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the notice determination counter 223j is stored in the notice determination counter 223j.

  When the processing of S1415 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1416). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1416 (S1416: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1418), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1419). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1420), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1416: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1417), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1417: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1317: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the rear and rear face setting process (S1411) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the rear and rear face setting process. The winning five back setting process (S1411) is a process for setting the back type at the end of the jackpot.

  In the hit / rear back setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit end timing (S1501). The jackpot end timing specifically means the end of the ending effect. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the case of a big hit (probable big hit A and probable big hit B) where the first specific winning opening 65a is difficult to obtain, the same effect during the big hit is the same as during normal times. Is executed. Therefore, even during the ending effect, the effect as if the normal variation effect is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the big hit that is difficult to obtain a prize ball is won, and therefore it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the short time period is reset based on the fact that the big hit is A. Therefore, since it can be difficult to accurately determine the remaining short time period, the remaining short time period can be predicted by the player from the back image or the like. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the process of S1501, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot end timing (S1501: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot end timing is reached (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot to be ended is a normal jackpot A (S1502), and if it is a normal jackpot A (S1502: Yes), a display rear image change command corresponding to the rear surface A is set (S1503), a value corresponding to the rear surface A is set to “00H” for the rear surface flag 223g (S1504), and this processing is ended. To do. The display rear image change command set by the process of S1503 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. Among them, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot to be ended is not the normal jackpot A (S1502), it is then determined whether the jackpot type is either the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D (S1505). When it is determined by the processing of S1505 that the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D is satisfied (that is, “the villa state is set” after the jackpot is ended) (S1505: Yes), this corresponds to “the villa state”. In order to set the back type D back (cave stage), a display rear image change command corresponding to the back D is set (S1506), and “03H” corresponding to the back D is set to the back flag 223g. After setting (S1507), this process is terminated. The display rear image change command set by the processing of S1506 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the command output processing (S1402) of the main processing (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. Among them, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1505 that the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D is not one (either the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot C) (S1505: No), the time set newly at the end of the jackpot In order to set the back image based on the period, the ceiling number counter 223e and the ceiling reset time setting table 222b5 (see FIG. 19A) are read (S1508). Although details will be described later, the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is updated in a short period of time corresponding to the jackpot when the fluctuation pattern command indicating the jackpot is received. Therefore, in this process, by referring to the ceiling number counter 223e, it is possible to set the back image according to the short time set at the end of the jackpot.

  When the process of S1508 is completed, the value of the back face determination counter 223h is then read, and the back face type to be set after the big hit ends based on the ceiling reset time setting table 222b5 read in the process of S1508 and the value of the ceiling number counter 223e. Specify (S1509). For example, when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 5 (that is, the short time period given after the end of the jackpot is 5 times) and the value of the back face determination counter 223h is “85”, The back C (forest stage) is selected (see FIG. 19A).

  After the processing in S1509, a display rear image variation command corresponding to the specified back surface type is set (S1510), a value corresponding to the specified back surface type is set in the back surface flag 223g, and this processing ends. The display rear image change command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image in the third symbol display device 81.

  By executing this hitting rear face setting process (S1411), it is possible to switch to the appropriate rear face type according to the short time period or state after the end of each jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the command determination process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1412). This command determination processing (S1412) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Process.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the variation pattern is processing for extracting the variation pattern type from the received variation pattern command. The selection process is executed (S1603), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 51) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 51) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (special The number N1) of the variable display hold in the symbol is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). In the process of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1608 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected or each time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is set to the number of the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1608. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of drawing a special symbol, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1608 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1607, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1607: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1609). If the winning information command is received (S1609: Yes), the ceiling notification process is executed (S1610), and the process returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110. Then, the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original lottery is obtained from each acquired value of each counter C1 to C3 separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various kinds of information obtained when the above is performed is prefetched (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning information command including various information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The ceiling notification process is a process of switching to a notification rear type (back E to rear G) based on the prefetch result. Details of the ceiling notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the winning information command is not received in the processing of S1609 (S1609: No), it is then determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1611). If an opening command is received (S1611: Yes), a display opening command is set (S1612), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221, the display control device. Sent to 114. When receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the opening command has not been received in the processing of S1611 (S1611), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1613). When the round number command is received (S1613: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1614), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1615), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1613 (S1613: No), it is then determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1616). If an ending command is received (S1616: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1617), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the first specific winning opening 65a is a big hit (probable big hit A and probable big hit B) that makes it difficult to obtain a winning ball, it seems as if a normal variation effect is being executed during the ending effect. Production is performed. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the big hit that is difficult to obtain a prize ball is won, and therefore it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the short time period is reset based on the fact that the big hit is A. Therefore, since it can be difficult to accurately determine the remaining short time period, the remaining short time period can be predicted by the player from the back image or the like. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S1616 (S1616: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1618). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process. This variation pattern selection process (S1603) is a process for extracting a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In this variation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot variation pattern that is notified by the variation pattern command (S1701). If it is determined (S1701), a rear-side back setting process for determining whether or not to change the back image is executed (S1702). Next, a continuous notice setting process for setting the start of the continuous notice effect is executed (S1703), and this process ends. Note that details of the rear-side rear setting process (S1702) and the continuous notice setting process (S1703) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49, respectively.

  If it is determined in the process of S1701 that the variation pattern is a big hit (S1701: Yes), it is then determined whether the normal big hit A or the normal big hit B is notified by the variation pattern command (step S1701: Yes). S1704). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot type that shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol and shifts to the normal state of the normal symbol (the short time state of the normal symbol is not given) after the jackpot ends. If it is determined that the normal jackpot A or the normal jackpot B (S1704: Yes), the value of the ceiling counter 223e is set to 0 (S1705). Then, the extended resort state flag 223f is set to OFF (S1706), and the process proceeds to S1712.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1704 that the normal jackpot A is not the normal jackpot B (S1704: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot C (S1707). . That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot is finished. If it is determined in the processing of S1707 that the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot C (S1707), the short time period given after the jackpot is ended is set as the value of the ceiling number counter 223e (S1708). The resort state flag 223f is set to OFF (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1712.

  In the processing of S1707, when it is determined that neither the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot C is in effect (that is, the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot D) (S1707: No), after the jackpot is ended, the “rendezvous state” Therefore, the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is set to 0 (S1710), the consecutive house state flag 223f is set to ON (S1711), and the process proceeds to S1712.

  In the process of S1712 that is shifted to after the process of S1706, S1709, or S1711, the corresponding fluctuation pattern is extracted from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command notified from the main controller 110 (S1712), and this process is performed. finish. Based on the variation pattern extracted here, a variation pattern command for display is set by variation display setting processing (see FIG. 51).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the rear back side setting process (S1702) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. This off-rear side setting process (S1702) is executed in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 47) as described above, and is a process for determining whether or not to change the back image.

  In the rear face setting process, it is first determined whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is greater than 0 (S1801). If it is greater than 0 (S1801: Yes), the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is decremented by 1 ( S1802). Since the value of the ceiling number counter 223e indicates the remaining short time period, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the counter value every time a variation pattern command corresponding to a special symbol outage is received, thereby reducing the short time period. Can be grasped accurately.

  When the processing of S1802 is completed, the back flag 223g is then read (S1803), and the table corresponding to the back surface type specified by the read back flag 223g value is read from the back setting table 222b (S1804). Specifically, if the current time is the back A (the value of the back flag 223g is “00H”), the back A setting table 222b1 is read, and if the current is the back B (the value of the back flag 223g is If “01H”, the rear B time setting table 222b2 is read. If the current time is the rear C (if the value of the rear flag 223g is “02H”), the rear C time setting table 222b3 is read. Also, if the current back surface type is the back surface type E to back surface G (that is, the value of the back surface flag 223g is “04H” to “06H”), the notification back time setting table 222b6 is read.

  Next, based on the data table read out in step S1804 and the value of the ceiling number counter 223e, the back surface type is specified (S1805), and it is determined whether the back image needs to be changed as a result of the specification. (S1806). If it is determined that the rear image needs to be changed (S1806: Yes), a display rear image change command corresponding to the changed back surface is set (S1807), and the value corresponding to the changed back surface is set. The back flag 223f is set (S1808), and the process proceeds to S1809. The display rear image change command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1805 that there is no need to change the back image (the current back surface type and the back surface type specified by the processing of S1804 are the same) (S1805: No), S1807, S1808. The process is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1809.

  In the processing of S1809, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter 223e has become 0 as a result of subtracting 1 in the processing of S1802 (S1809). If it is 0 (S1809: Yes), the short time period elapses. (That is, “the villa state” is set), the villa state flag 223f is set to ON (S1810), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is not 0 (1 or more) by the process of S1809 (S1809: No), the process of S1810 is skipped and this process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S1801, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S1801), it is then determined whether or not the extended game state flag 223f is on. However, if it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S1811: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the consecutive resort state flag 223f is on (that is, “connected resort state”) (S1811: Yes), then the rear flag 223e is read (S1812), and whether or not the current rear surface type is the rear D. Is discriminated (S1813).

  In the process of S1813, when it is determined that the current back surface type is the back surface D (S1813: Yes), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the back surface type is not the back surface D (S1813: No), the first time when the change pattern command corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is received after becoming the “ream” state, This means that the back setting process (S1702) has been executed. Therefore, by setting a display rear image change command corresponding to the back D, a change to the back of the cave stage corresponding to the “rengo state” is set (S1814), and the value corresponding to the back D is “ “03H” is set in the back flag 223f (S1815), and this process is terminated.

  Thus, by performing the back side setting process (S1702) at the time of detachment, it is possible to determine whether or not to change the back image according to the remaining time and short period. Therefore, since the player can be given pleasure to predict the remaining short time period from the type of the back image, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the continuous notice setting process (S1703) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. This continuous notice setting process (S1703) is executed in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 47) and is a process for determining whether or not to set a continuous notice effect.

  In the continuous notice determination process (S1703), first, the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is read (S1901), and it is determined whether or not the value is 0 (S1902). If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is not 0 (that is, one of 1 to 4) (S1902: No), the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is decremented by 1 (S1903), and the subtraction is performed. Based on the value of the subsequent continuous notice counter 223i and the variation pattern table 222a, the variation pattern mode is extracted (S1904). Based on the variation pattern extracted here, a variation pattern command for display is set by variation display setting processing (see FIG. 51).

  In the variation pattern table 222a, selectable variation pattern types are defined for each variation time notified by the variation pattern command. In addition, with respect to one variation time, a variation pattern effect that can be selected in a normal time (when the continuous notice effect is not set), a variation pattern effect that can be selected in the first variation effect of the continuous notice effect, Variation pattern effects that can be selected in the second variation effect of the continuous notice effect, variation pattern effects that can be selected in the third variation effect of the continuous notice effect, and variations that can be selected in the fourth variation effect of the continuous notice effect Selectable when the last variation in the short-time state of a normal symbol is executed with the pattern effect, the variation pattern effect selectable in the fifth variation effect of the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice effect not set At least a variation pattern effect (a variation pattern effect corresponding to a ceiling notification notice) is defined. In the process of S1904, the corresponding variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern table 222a according to the value of the continuous notice counter 223i.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1902 that the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is 0 (S1902: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 4 (S1903). 4 is determined (S1903: Yes), the remaining short time period is 5 times (the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is updated before the start of change, so the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is By setting the continuous notice effect, it is possible to shift to the “long villa state” along with the end of the continuous notice effect. Therefore, in this case, the value of the continuous notice counter 223i is set to 4 (S1906), and the variation pattern modes that can be selected in the first variation effect of the continuous notice effect are extracted from the variation pattern table 222a (S1907). This process is terminated.

  In the processing of S1905, when it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is not 4 (5 or more or 3 or less) (S1905: No), next, whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is greater than 4 (S1908), and if it is greater than 4 (S1908: Yes), whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect based on the value of the notice determination counter 223j and the continuous notice determination table 222c (see FIG. 19C). Is determined (S1909). In addition, in the continuous notice effect, the effect is executed over five fluctuating effects. Therefore, even if the continuous notice effect is set when the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is larger than 4, “renso” There is no transition to the “state” (this is a so-called gassing effect).

  If it is determined by the process of S1910 that the continuous notice effect is to be executed (S1910: Yes), the process of S1906 and S1907 described above is executed to set the start of the continuous notice effect, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1910, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is not executed (S1910: No), the variation pattern effect for normal time corresponding to the variation time notified by the variation pattern command is obtained from the variation pattern table 222a. After extracting (S1911), this process is terminated.

  In the process of S1908, when it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is not larger than 4 (3 or less) (S1908: No), the remaining short time period is 4 times in a state where the continuous notice effect is not set. Since this means that the following has occurred, it is next determined whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 0 (S1912). That is, it is determined whether or not the short time period of the normal symbol ends due to the current fluctuation.

  When it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is not 0 by the processing of S1912 (S1912: No), the fluctuation pattern effect for normal time corresponding to the fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command is extracted ( S1911), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 0 (S1912: Yes), the variation pattern effect (selectable when the last variation in the short time state of the normal symbol is executed from the variation pattern table 222a ( The fluctuation pattern effect corresponding to the ceiling notification notice) is extracted, and this processing is terminated.

  By this continuous notice setting process (S1703), a continuous notice effect can be set. Therefore, when a continuous notice effect that is easy to be set when the state is a “long-run state” is set, “ It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the “ream” state.

  Next, the ceiling notification process (S1610) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the ceiling notification process (S1610). This ceiling notification process determines whether or not to shift to the “rengo state” based on the look-ahead result notified by the winning information command, and at the stage when it is determined that the “rensou state” is to be entered. This is a process for informing the person to stop the launch of the ball.

  In this ceiling notification process, first, it is determined whether or not the pre-read result notified by the winning information command is winning information indicating a jackpot (S2001), and if it is a jackpot (S2001: Yes), the short time period is reset. Therefore, this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the pre-read result is out of the special symbol (S2001: No), the value (A) of the ceiling number counter 223e is read (S2002), and it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is zero. (S2003).

  Then, if the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is 0 (S2003: Yes), since the time of the normal symbol is not short, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter 223e is not 0 (1 or more) (S2003: No), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S2004), and the ceiling number counter It is determined whether or not the difference between the value (A) of 223e and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 0 (S2005). That is, it is determined whether or not the short time state of the normal symbol is finished when the fluctuating effect for the number of reserved balls is executed.

  In the process of S2005, when it is determined that the difference between the value (A) of the ceiling number counter 223e and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is not 0 (S2005: No), the number of reserved balls Since the short time period does not end even when the fluctuating effect is executed, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference between the value (A) of the ceiling number counter 223e and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 0 (S2005: Yes), the back flag 223g is read ( S2006), the notification back type corresponding to the current back is specified from the notification setting table 222b4 (see FIG. 18B) (S2007).

  Next, a display rear image change command corresponding to the specified back surface type is set (S2008), a value corresponding to the background type after the change is set in the back surface flag 223g (S2009), and this process ends. The display rear image change command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image in the third symbol display device 81.

  By executing this ceiling notification process, it is possible to prompt the stop of the ball launch when the time-saving state of the normal symbol ends by executing the entry to the reserved first entrance 64. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of reserved balls exceeding the remaining short time period from being held. It is possible to suppress the lottery of the special symbol 1 from being executed during the “ream” state based on the entry to the first entrance 64 held during the short time state of the symbol. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the fact that the “renzo state” ends up being a big hit with the special symbol 1 lottery during the “renso state”. You can entertain "state".

  Note that the notification back type is not limited to the case where the short time period has elapsed. For example, even when the continuous notice effect of the gaze is set, it may be configured to change to the back type for notification by receiving a winning command corresponding to the last variation effect of the continuous notice effect. . This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect is a frustration, so that the player can be more interested in confirming the continuous notice effect to the end.

  Also, when a winning information command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B is received, it may be changed to the back type for notification. When it becomes a probable jackpot B, it will be in the “rengo state” after the jackpot is over, so by prompting the player to stop launching the ball to the first entrance 64, the “renja state” was played. The special symbol 1 is drawn with the holding ball, and it is possible to prevent the “ream state” from ending by winning the normal jackpot A or the probable jackpot A.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the variable display setting process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1413). This variable display setting process (S1413) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, is off) (S2101: No), the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S2106. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S2102), and then the process of S1712 of the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 47), or In the processing of S1907, S1911, and S1913 of the continuous notice setting processing (see FIG. 49), the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2104). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S2105). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2106.

  In the processing of S2106, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2106). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, is off) (S2106: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus this change display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2106: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S2107), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2108).

  Next, in order to set the extracted stop type (stop type notified from the main control device 110), a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is displayed. Settings are made for transmission to the device 114 (S2109). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 65, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2301.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2302, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2302, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2303). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 52). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 52) (S2305), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  Thus, by executing the boot process (S2201), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. Are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 53, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2302 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2303 to S2305 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2301 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, the process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently setting the head address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2301. In addition, the processing of S2303 to S2305 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2302.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2303 to S2305 without performing the processes of S2301 and S2302. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2203, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2204, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2205). As a result, when the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 63A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S3702 in FIG. 63A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B), the simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 21 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2508 in FIG. 54B) and simple display setting processing (see S2509 in FIG. 54B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. In the case of being via the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 21B and 21C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2205, interrupt permission is set (S2206). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 30) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 54B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2501: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2502) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2503) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2502), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2503), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502) or the like, the third symbol display device 81 should display one frame to be displayed next. The content of the image is specified specifically. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2504). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2503) or the simple display setting process (S2509). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2505) are used. 30 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2507). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when reception of a display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, a stop corresponding to the stop type (various jackpots, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / back outreach, complete out) indicated by the display stop type command The type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2508) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2509) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, details of the above-described command determination process (S2502), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 55, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2601: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2602), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S2603).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S2604). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2604: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2605), the process returns to S2601.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 56A, details of the variation pattern command processing (S2605) will be described. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Of the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2701 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2703, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2706), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2705 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2702. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2704, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2604 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2606). If there is a display variation type command (S2606: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2607), and the processing returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2607) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (any one of the big hits, front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / back out of reach, or complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2801). The change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is compared between the stop type table and the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B) is executed. A stop symbol after production is finally set (S2802).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2802 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S2803), and this process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2802 is described. In the task process (S2504) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2803, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2802.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2606 that there is no display stop type command (S2606: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2608). If there is a command opening command (S2608: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2609), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S2609) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2905), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2904, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901, The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of one frame image to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2902. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required after the opening effect is finished until the round effect is started. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for one round or four rounds). Since the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, the ending effect is started after the round effect is finished. There was a lot of waiting time, and there was a fear that the player might feel uneasy about whether the operation stopped or feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a display opening command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that point, and until the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. As a result, when the opening effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for five rounds) can be started. ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect ends before the variation effect that is a big hit ends in the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, when the variation effect that becomes a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is finished, the opening effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so the player is concerned that the operation has not stopped. And it does not make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2608 that there is no display opening command (S2608: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2610). If there is a round number command for use (S2610: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2611), and the processing returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2611) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. The table buffer 233d is set (S3001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3002).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3005), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2610 that there is no display round number command (S2610: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2612). If there is an ending command for use (S2612: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S2613), and the processing returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2613) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3102). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S3101 is turned on, Data table determination flags corresponding to other ending display data tables are set to OFF (S3103). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of which ending effect corresponds to by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3103. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3104), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3105). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3106), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2612 that there is no display ending command (S2612: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2614). If there is a change command (S2614: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2615), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2615) will be described. FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag is set to ON (S3201). When the rear image change flag is on, it is determined that the rear image needs to be changed in response to the reception of the rear image change command in the normal image transfer setting process (S3703). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to G), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3202), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64), when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3201 is turned on, the back surface after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3202. Specify the image type. When the specified back image type is back B to back G, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to these back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that when the rear image type after the change is the rear A, since all the image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235c, the image is not transferred.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the backs A to G is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S3202 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S3202, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2614 that there is no rear image change command (S2614: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2616), and there is an error command. If this is the case (S2616: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2617), and processing returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2617) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3301). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3302). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3301, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3302 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3302 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2616 that there is no error command (S2616: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2618), and the processing returns to S2601.

  In the process of S2601, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes). ), The processing of S2602 to S2618 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2601 to S2618 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2601 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2509) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 56 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 56 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 56A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2701. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2702, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2503), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 60, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3401). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3401: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3402 to S3404 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3405. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3401: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S3402), and S3403 to S3404. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3403). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3403: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3404).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3501).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3501, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3502), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3404) or in the process of S3403, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3403: No), the process proceeds to S3405.

  In S3405, pointer update processing is executed (S3405). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3601). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3601, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3602). As a result, if it is End information (S3602: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3603), and if it is a demo display data table (S3603: Yes), the display data table buffer Time data corresponding to the production time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3604), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3605), this processing is terminated, and the display is completed. Return to the setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3603: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3606). ), This process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which End information is written is set. Since the drawn contents are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3602, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3602: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3406). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3406 together with the warning image previously expanded and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3407), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3408). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3408: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3408: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3409).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3409: Yes), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet, and the confirmed display effect is at the timing of performing the confirmed display. Therefore, first, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3410), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3411). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3412), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3413). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3414), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3415), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S3415 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task process (S2504), until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started, the previous stop change determination flag set in S3415 is specified and the stop effect of the change effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3409, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3409: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3416). If the demo display flag is off (S3416: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S3417), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3418). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3419). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3420), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3421), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set to be displayed.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3416: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2509) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 21B and 21C) be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2505), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3701, that is, if it is off (S3701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3702), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3702).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3801), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3801: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3802). In the process of S3802, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3802 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3802: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3802: Yes), the process proceeds to S3803. Also, as a result of the process of S3801, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3801: No), the process proceeds to S3803.

  In the process of S3803, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3803). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S3803: No), that A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3803 (S3803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3805), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 54B) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 54B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 55 to 59) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) (see S3701: No in FIG. 63A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3703), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3703).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3405) of the display setting process (S2503) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3902). If it is transfer data information (S3902: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3903) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3905.

  In the process of S3902, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3902: No), the processes of S3903 and S3904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3905. In the process of S3905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3906).

  In the process of S3906, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process in S3906 (S3906: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3906: Yes), the process proceeds to S3907. Also, as a result of the process of S3905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3905: No), the process proceeds to S3907.

  In the process of S3907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3907). If the transfer start flag is on (S3907: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3908), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3903 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3907: No), it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3909: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3910), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3911). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3912), and the process proceeds to S3913.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3911, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3913, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913). The determination in the process of S3913 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3913 (S3913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3913 (S3913: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3914). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3914, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3915), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2506), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the drawing list shown in FIG. 30 is generated (S4001). That is, in the process of S4001, the storage RAM type and address for storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S4002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes, as the drawing target buffer information, information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4002, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S4003). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 54B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, two types of entrances, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, are provided as entrances that trigger the lottery of special symbols. It is possible to win a large amount of prize balls by winning a lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640, so that it is easy to win a jackpot type (probable bonus jackpot D) advantageous to the player It is configured. In addition, in a low probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol, the ball is configured to be difficult to enter the second entrance 640 and the entrance to the first entrance 64 When a special symbol jackpot is won in the lottery based on the, it is difficult to get a prize ball, and it is easy to win the jackpot (probable variation jackpot A) that shifts to the short time state of the normal symbol after the jackpot ends Yes. That is, it is configured such that a state where it is difficult to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 is easily repeated. Then, by ending the short-time state of the normal symbol, it is configured to shift to a state where the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 (“continuous state”). By being “probable jackpot D”, after the jackpot is over, it is configured to shift again to the “rensou state”.

  For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the “ream” state. Here, in order to end the normal symbol short-term period and shift to the “ream” state, the special symbol will be removed continuously for the same number of times as the normal symbol short-term period set after the end of probability variation jackpot A. It is necessary to become. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the “ream villa state” is approaching as the special symbol continues to deviate, so even if the special symbol deviates continuously, the player's motivation for the game Can be maintained.

  In a general pachinko machine, a player plays a game with the main purpose of being a big hit, so there is no merit for the continuation of special symbols. Therefore, there is a risk that the motivation for the player's game will decrease as the detachment continues. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the closer to the special symbol, the closer to the “resort state” that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a novel game that can be played.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, 64 types of “probable variation jackpot A1” to “probability variation jackpot A64” are given as the jackpot types to which the short time period of the normal symbol is given when the special symbol 1 is won by lottery. The jackpot type is provided. These 64 types of jackpots are different in the short time period of the normal symbol to be given, so the ease of transition to the “long-run state” varies depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, even if the player recognizes that it has been a big hit (the short time period has been reset), the short time period that has passed so far is suppressed from being thought to be wasted, and the short hit time Can be expected. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from being shot at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes extremely long. (It will be 3 to 5 minutes). Further, the opening period in which the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit is set to a short time (0.2 seconds × 1 time). As a result, even if it is possible to enter the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a is hardly opened (released at a frequency of 0.2 seconds in a few minutes). It is possible to prevent the player from launching a ball toward the second entrance 640 provided on the downstream side thereof. In other words, the player intentionally enters the second entrance 640 with the aim of winning the “probable jackpot D” that can obtain a large amount of prize balls even though it is not in the “ream” state. It is possible to suppress the playing of a game method to try to make a ball.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the detour accessory 700 is provided on the upstream side of the second entrance 640, the ball reaches the second entrance 640 after launching the ball. It takes more than 7 seconds to complete. Therefore, even if a ball is launched after recognizing that the electric accessory 640a is opened, the electric accessory 640a is closed before the ball reaches the second entrance 640 (0.2 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream state”. Furthermore, when there is an ordinary symbol holding ball, the fluctuation time is shortened. Therefore, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol held for about one second after the completion of one fluctuation, and the opening of the electric accessory 640a. Is configured to end. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a ball from entering the second entrance 640 when the ball is launched after the electric accessory 640a is opened, regardless of whether or not there is an ordinary symbol holding ball. Can do.

  Further, as described above, even if a ball can be entered into the second entrance 640, if the special symbol is changing, the entry is discarded without being suspended. That is, in a state other than the “ream” state, the fluctuation time becomes extremely long, and even if a ball is entered into the second entrance 640 during the fluctuation, a special symbol is based on the entry. No 2 lottery will be held. Therefore, in order to receive the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is necessary to make the ball enter the second entrance 640 again after the variation effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 is completed. In a state other than the “rengo” state, the variation pattern type of the variation time of 300 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol 2, so that the lottery can be received only every 300 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, the game efficiency will be extremely deteriorated, so that even if it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls when “probable big hit D”, the player will feel that it is not worth it. Can do. Therefore, it can suppress that a player plays a game aiming at the 2nd entrance 640 in states other than a "rengo state".

  As described above, in a state other than the “ream villa state”, the player is prevented from launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 (that is, the ball is launched at the first entrance 64). In the “renso state”, since the ball can be launched aiming at the second entrance 640, the “probable big hit D” is won in a state other than the “renso state”, and a large number of prize balls are played. Can be prevented from being acquired by a person. In addition, only the special symbol 1 lottery is performed in a state other than the “renso state”, and only the special symbol 2 lottery is performed in the “renso state”. The ball exit rate can be brought close to the design value. Therefore, when a hall | hole performs sales prediction etc. from the design value of a payout rate, it can calculate more correctly.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the short time period of a normal symbol may be suggested by the classification of a back image. Specifically, if the back A (wilderness stage) is displayed, there is a high possibility that the remaining short time period is 21 or more, and if the back B (river stage) is displayed, the remaining short time is short. The possibility that the period is 20 times or less is high, and if the back surface C (Mori stage) is displayed, the possibility that the remaining short time period is 10 times or less is high. Thereby, since the remaining short time period can be predicted from the type of the back image, the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be confirmed more interestingly to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the time-short period has elapsed due to the prefetching (that is, when the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls is executed, the state shifts to the “resort state”). It is informed to stop the launch of the ball to the 1 entrance 64. Thereby, it can suppress that the number of reservation balls more than the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation until it transfers to a "rengo state" are accumulate | stored. That is, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the special symbol 1 from being executed on the basis of the reserved ball corresponding to the ball entering the first ball slot 64 after the transition to the “ream” state. Therefore, after becoming the “renso” state, the special jackpot 1 lottery results in a normal jackpot A or a probable jackpot A, and the “renso state” ends without receiving any benefits of the “renso state”. Can be suppressed. Therefore, when the state shifts to the “renzo state”, the player can sufficiently enjoy the “renso state”.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In the above embodiment, the rear image is changed at the start of the variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rear image may be changed at the end of the change. Thereby, since the process which performs a fluctuation pattern, and the process which changes a back image can be performed at a different timing, the processing load by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the special symbol 2 is drawn and a big hit is made, the same is true if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the “ream” state. The jackpot type is selected, but a different jackpot type may be selected depending on whether or not it is in the “ream” state. If the state is not a “ream” state (ie, a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, or a high probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol) The jackpot type that is more disadvantageous to the user may be selected.

  As a disadvantageous jackpot, for example, if a special symbol 2 draws a lottery in a low probability state (non-probability change) of a special symbol or a short time state (probability change short time) of a normal symbol, a winning ball is obtained. It may be configured such that only jackpot types that are difficult to select are selected. In other words, in each round of jackpots, only the jackpot for which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 0.2 seconds elapses or five balls are won) is selected. May be. More specifically, for example, 5% of cases where a special symbol 2 is won in a lottery, the special symbol can be shifted to a low probability state (non-probability change) after winning the jackpot, and a prize ball can be obtained. It is configured to be a difficult normal jackpot C, and 95% of the bonuses in the special symbol 2 lottery are set, and after the jackpot is over, the short time period of the normal symbol is set 100 times, and a prize ball can be obtained. It may be configured to have a difficult probability variation jackpot E.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that no merit is produced for the player even if the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery. Therefore, although it is not in the “reaming state”, it is possible to make the gaming method that attempts to obtain a large number of prize balls by entering the balls into the second entrance 640 can be basically disabled. Since this pachinko machine 10 is designed assuming that only a special symbol 1 lottery is performed in a state other than the “renso state”, and only a special symbol 2 lottery is performed in the “renso state”. By preventing the player from aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state, the exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be brought close to the design value. Therefore, when a hall | hole performs sales prediction etc. from the design value of a payout rate, it can calculate more correctly.

  In the above embodiment, in a state other than the “rengo state”, the ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. In a state other than “”, when a ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640, a notification may be given by a display image, voice, or the like so as to aim at the first entrance 64. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state. In addition, when a ball is launched at the first entrance 64 in the “ream” state, it may be notified that the ball is launched at the second entrance 640. As a result, it is possible to prevent the “Longsou state” from ending due to a normal jackpot A or a probabilistic jackpot A due to the lottery of the special symbol 1 in spite of the transition to the “Spansole state”. Can do. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from winning the “probable big hit D” in a state other than the “rengo” state and acquiring a large amount of prize balls by the player. The pachinko machine 10 is designed on the assumption that only the special symbol 1 lottery is performed in a state other than the “rengo state”, and only the special symbol 2 lottery is performed in the “renso state”. Therefore, by preventing the player from aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the “ream” state, the exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be brought close to the design value. Therefore, when a hall | hole performs sales prediction etc. from the design value of a payout rate, it can calculate more correctly.

  As a trigger for notification, for example, sensor means capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided for the opening 710 of the detouring accessory 700, and the passage of the sphere is detected by the sensor means in a state other than the “ream” state. The notification may be executed when the error is detected. Further, the notification may be executed when the entrance to the normal entrance 67 is detected in a state other than the “ream state”. This is because the normal entrance 67 is on the upstream side of the second entrance 640, so that it is easier for the ball to enter the normal entrance 67 by launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640. . Thereby, since it is not necessary to provide a sensor means newly, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. As control for executing notification when a ball enters the normal entrance 67, the free state flag 203i is turned off in S614 or S619 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36). (S614: No, or S619: No), it may be configured to set a command for causing the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to perform notification. That is, a command is set to alert the player who has launched a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 even though it is not in the “ream” state, using a warning image or warning sound. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may output to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 in the external output process (S1001) in the main process (refer FIG. 40) of the control apparatus 110. FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the remaining time-short period until the villa state is reached is suggested depending on the type of the back image, but the suggesting method is not limited to this. For example, the character's clothes may be changed according to the remaining time in a short period, or the character itself may be changed to a different character (for example, a girl character). Moreover, you may comprise so that the display mode of a 3rd pattern may be changed according to the remaining time and a short time, a sound effect, a music, etc. may be changed. In addition, for example, the remaining short time standard may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with numerals or the like. In this case, it may be configured to display numbers less than the actual short time period with a certain probability (so-called gas display). In addition, in the case where the gusset display is performed, for example, when the continuous notice effect is failed, the number suggesting the remaining short time period may be increased and changed to a value corresponding to the actual short time period.

  In the present embodiment, the rear D (cave stage) is always displayed when in the “ream” state, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rear image may be changed from the back A to the back C with a low probability every time the fluctuating effect is executed even in the “ream” state. Further, in the “ream” state, when the back surface A to the back surface C are obtained, it may be configured to determine whether or not to return to the back surface D every time the changing effect is executed. In addition, when the “normal jackpot B” or “probable jackpot C”, which is a jackpot type that ends the “renso” state, is reached, the first specific winning a prize opening 65a is set for a predetermined time (maximum 0.2 seconds). ) It may be configured to be a jackpot that is opened, and may be configured to execute an effect similar to that in a normal time as an effect during the jackpot. In other words, even if “normal jackpot B” or “probability jackpot C” is set, it may be configured such that it is difficult for the player to notice that the jackpot has been won. Thereby, even if the back image is changed from the back D to any of the back A to the back C, whether the back type has been changed by satisfying the change condition of the back type during the “village state”, It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the rear face type has been changed based on the fact that “normal jackpot B” or “probable variation jackpot C” has been won and the “rensou state” has ended. Therefore, even if the back type is changed from the back D, the player can be made to think that the “rengo state” may still be continued. Even if it is, the game can be continued. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the first specific winning port 65a is opened when the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B is reached, but the first specific winning port 65a is opened in addition to the jackpot. You may comprise. For example, it is possible to provide a small hit that does not change after completion even if the winning is made, and the first specific winning opening 65a may be opened four times (four rounds) even if the winning is won. As a result, even if the operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is seen, it is not possible to determine whether it has won the small win or the probable big hit A or the probable big win B, so whether or not the short-term period has been reset. Can be harder to understand.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that when the number of reserved balls is digested by pre-reading, the state shifts to the “ream” state, the notification display is performed so as to stop the launch of the ball to the first entrance 64. In addition to this, when it is determined that the state shifts to the “ream villa state” by prefetching, the variation time until the suspension is digested is determined. An effect that suggests a “village state” may be set. Thereby, since various display effects can be performed, the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the “ream villa state”, the normal bonanza B or the probability variation jackpot C is configured so as not to end until the win is made, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if an upper limit (for example, 15 times) is set for the number of consecutive special symbol high probability states, and the special symbol high probability state is 15 times or more, the special symbol is low regardless of the type of jackpot. You may comprise so that it may transfer to a probability state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the “ream villa state” from continuing for a long time, and thus it is possible to suppress giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Characteristics A group> (Gameability for canceling the number of games with pachinko machines)
A entrance where a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the entrance, and a game ball that is less likely to enter the entrance than the first position. Variable means variable to two positions, passing means through which a game ball can pass, lottery means for executing a lottery based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and a predetermined lottery result by the lottery means Based on the fact that the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, then the variable is executed one or more times to change from the first position to the second position. The control unit and the mode from when the game ball passes through the passing unit to the end of the control by the variable control unit are set as the first mode until the specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition is satisfied. Based on the second mode different from the first mode A setting means and a disadvantageous state that is disadvantageous to the player when the first aspect is set by the aspect setting means, and the player is compared with the disadvantageous state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied And a state setting means for setting an advantageous state advantageous to the game machine A1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, No. 2514417).

  However, since the above-described conventional gaming machine cannot enjoy the winning game as long as it continues to be out of the lottery, the player's motivation for the game may decrease as the player continues to be out of the lottery. In other words, the long-awaited situation has caused the player to want to quit the game, and the operating rate of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first position where the game ball can enter the entrance, and the second position where the game ball can enter the entrance more easily than the first position. The variable means is varied. A lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position based on a predetermined lottery result by the lottery means. Control that is changed from the first position to the second position after being changed for a predetermined period is executed one or more times by the variable control means. The mode from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the control by the variable control means ends is set to the first mode by the mode setting means until the specific condition is satisfied. On the other hand, based on the establishment of the specific condition, the mode setting means sets the second mode different from the first mode. When the first mode is set by the mode setting means, an unfavorable state that is disadvantageous to the player is set by the state setting unit, while the specific condition is established, so that the player is compared with the unfavorable state. An advantageous advantageous state is set by the state setting means.

  Thereby, during the game, by checking whether the variable means is controlled in the first mode or the second mode, it is determined whether the advantageous state is set or the disadvantaged state is set. A player can play a game while predicting. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the state, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the aspect setting means sets the probability that the predetermined lottery result is the first lottery probability as the first aspect until the specific condition is satisfied, based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, as the second aspect, the probability of the predetermined lottery result is set to a second lottery probability higher than the first lottery probability.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the probability that a predetermined lottery result is set as the first probability is set by the mode setting means as the first mode until the specific condition is satisfied. On the other hand, based on the establishment of the specific condition, as the second mode, the mode setting means sets the second lottery probability that is higher than the first lottery probability by the predetermined lottery result.

  Thus, until the specific condition is satisfied, the first lottery probability that is likely to be a predetermined lottery result is set by the lottery means, which is advantageous to the player, while the state setting means sets the disadvantaged state. On the other hand, after the specific condition is satisfied, a second lottery probability that is unlikely to be a predetermined lottery result is set by the lottery means, which is disadvantageous for the player, while the state setting means sets the advantageous state. That is, in both cases, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which an advantageous aspect and an unfavorable aspect are set to coexist, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine A2, a specific lottery means that can execute a lottery based on a game ball entering the entrance, and a player determines a predetermined lottery based on a specific lottery result by the specific lottery means. Bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game that can acquire the game value of the game, a first bonus game as the bonus game to be given by the bonus game granting means, and a player than the first bonus game has the game value A bonus game selection means capable of selecting at least a second bonus game that is likely to be obtained in a large amount, and the mode setting means sets a probability that the predetermined lottery result is obtained based on completion of the first bonus game. Based on the fact that the first lottery probability is set, and the first lottery probability is set, the second lottery result is different from the specific lottery result by the specific lottery means continuously for a predetermined number of times. The state setting means sets the disadvantageous state based on the end of the first privilege game, and the specific lottery continues for the predetermined number of times after the disadvantageous state is set. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the advantageous state is set based on the result of the winning lottery result by means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the lottery is executed by the specific lottery means based on the game ball entering the entrance, and the player obtains a predetermined game value based on the specific lottery result by the specific lottery means. Possible privilege games are awarded by the privilege game granting means. The privilege game selection unit selects the first privilege game as the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting unit, and the second privilege game where the player can easily obtain more game value than the first privilege game. The probability of a predetermined lottery result based on the end of the first privilege game is set as the first lottery probability by the aspect setting means. In addition, the second lottery probability is set by the aspect setting unit based on the fact that the specific lottery means results in a lottery result different from the specific lottery result a predetermined number of times after the first lottery probability is set. The disadvantageous state is set to the disadvantageous state by the state setting means based on the end of the first privilege game. Further, the advantageous state is set by the state setting means based on the fact that the specific lottery means and the lottery result is obtained continuously for a predetermined number of times after the disadvantaged state is set.

  Thereby, even if it is set in a disadvantageous state based on the first privilege game being granted, it can be shifted to the advantageous state if the losing lottery result can be continued a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in a disadvantageous state, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in the hope that the result of losing lottery will be continued, so that it is possible to provide novel gaming characteristics.

  In the gaming machine A3, the first bonus game is the off lottery until the second lottery probability is set after the first lottery probability is set by the mode setting means after the end of the first bonus game. The bonus game selection means is configured as a bonus game given by the bonus game granting means as a bonus game given by the bonus game selection means. A gaming machine A4, which is capable of selecting one award game.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first privilege game has a plurality of types in which the number of consecutive lottery results differs from the first lottery probability set by the mode setting means to the second lottery probability after the first privilege game ends. Among the plurality of types of first privilege games, one of the first privilege games is selected by the privilege game selection means as the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means.

  Thereby, even if a disadvantageous state is set by providing the first privilege game, the first privilege game of a type with a small number of consecutive lottery results until an advantageous state is set for the player. Can be expected to be selected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointed that the number of consecutive lottery results has been interrupted and disappointing the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, when the first lottery probability is set, the variable control means sets the second lottery probability during a period in which the variable means is changed to the first position. In such a case, the game machine A5 is set so as to be shorter than a period during which the variable means is changed to the first position.

  According to gaming machine A5, when the first lottery probability is set, the period for changing the variable means to the first position is changed, and when the second lottery probability is set, the variable means is changed to the first position. Since it is set by the variable control means so as to be shorter than the period, even if the second lottery probability is set, the game ball can easily enter the entrance. Therefore, since the lottery by the specific lottery means is not executed in spite of the advantageous state and the situation that the second privilege game is not granted can be suppressed for a long time, the player is in an advantageous state for the player. There is an effect that the game can be enjoyed without stress.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, period setting means for setting a period from when the predetermined lottery means results in the predetermined lottery result until the variable means is changed to the first position by the variable control means The period setting means sets a longer period when the first lottery probability is set than when the second lottery probability is set. .

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the period setting means sets the period from when the lottery means makes a predetermined lottery result until the variable control means changes the variable means to the first position. Further, when the first lottery probability is set, the period setting means sets a longer period than when the second lottery probability is set.

  Thereby, even if the second lottery probability is set, the game ball can easily enter the entrance. Therefore, since the lottery by the specific lottery means is not executed in spite of the advantageous state and the situation that the second privilege game is not granted can be suppressed for a long time, the player is in an advantageous state for the player. There is an effect that the game can be enjoyed without stress.

<Characteristic B group> (Do not turn Special Figure 2 at normal times)
A first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, a first entrance port provided in the first flow path and into which a game ball can enter, A lottery is made based on the second entrance provided in the second flow path and into which the game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. A lottery means to execute, a bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a lottery result obtained by the lottery means being a predetermined lottery result, and at least the second flow path during the predetermined period And a suppressing means for making it difficult for a lottery result of the lottery executed by the lottery means to be produced by flowing the game ball down to the first flow path as compared with the case of flowing the game ball down to the first flow path. A gaming machine B1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a case where a gaming method for intentionally generating a hit type having a lot of game value that can be acquired is executed, and there is a risk of causing unexpected damage to the hall. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the first entrance is provided in the first flow path, and the second entrance is provided in the second flow path different from the first flow path. A lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance, and the game is based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a predetermined lottery result. A privilege game advantageous to the user is granted by the privilege game giving means. The lottery result of the lottery executed by the lottery means as compared with the case where the game ball is caused to flow down to the first flow path by the suppression means by flowing the game ball down to the second flow path at least during a predetermined period Is hard to come out.

  Thereby, it can be made to feel that the 1st flow path wants to flow down rather than letting a game ball flow down with respect to the 2nd flow path where a lottery result is hard to come out at least for a predetermined period. Therefore, since the flow path through which the game ball flows down can be changed with respect to the player according to the period, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of striking the direction in which the game ball is launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B1, a first position at which a game ball can enter the second entrance, and a second position at which the game ball is less likely to enter the second entrance than the first position. Variable means variable to,
Passing means through which the game ball can pass, specific lottery means for executing a lottery based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and the variable means based on a specific lottery result by the specific lottery means Variable control means for performing control one or more times to change from the first position to the second position after changing the second position from the second position to the first position, And when changing the variable means to the first position during the predetermined period, the variable means is controlled to be in the first position during the first period, and the variable means is controlled outside the predetermined period. When changing to the first position, the variable means is controlled to be in the first position for a second period longer than the first period, and the suppressing means is the second flow path. Game balls that flowed down The time to reach to the second ball entrance port, a game machine, characterized in that it comprises a flow-down delay means for longer than the first period B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the lottery is executed by the specific lottery means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and the game ball is unlikely to enter the variable means based on the specific lottery result obtained by the specific lottery means. The variable control means executes control one or more times by changing from the first position to the second position after changing the position from the position to the first position where the game ball can enter. When changing the variable means to the first position during the predetermined period, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is in the first position during the first period. On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the first position outside the predetermined period, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is in the first position for a second period longer than the first period. In the suppression means, the period until the game ball that has flowed down to the second flow path reaches the second entrance is longer than the first period by the flow-down delay means.

  As a result, when the player launches a game ball into the second flow path after confirming that the variable means has been changed to the first position during the predetermined period, the game ball enters the second entrance. , So that the player can aim the first flow path for a predetermined period. Therefore, since the flow path through which the game ball flows down can be changed with respect to the player according to the period, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of striking the direction in which the game ball is launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game in which the player can easily obtain more game value than the first privilege game are selected as the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means. Possible bonus game selection means, wherein the bonus game selection means has a predetermined lottery result by a lottery executed based on a game ball entering the second entrance In addition, it is easier to select the second privilege game than the predetermined lottery result obtained by the lottery executed based on entering the first entrance. B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the player can easily obtain more game value than the first privilege game are selected by the privilege game selection device as the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means. The Here, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained by a lottery executed based on the game ball entering the second entrance, the game ball enters the first entrance. It becomes easier for the bonus game selection means to select the second bonus game than when the lottery executed based on the lottery results in a predetermined lottery result.

  Thereby, it can control that a game is aimed at the 2nd entrance during a predetermined period, and only the 2nd privilege game continues. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

  In the gaming machine B3, the first variable state setting means for setting the variable means to a first variable state in which the variable control means is not easily changed to the first position by the variable control means during the predetermined period, and the predetermined period ends. Based on the first variable state, the second variable state setting means for setting the variable means to a second variable state that is more likely to be changed to the first position than the first variable state. The game machine B4 is characterized in that the game ball is easier to enter the second entrance when compared to the first variable state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, during the predetermined period, the variable means is set by the first variable state setting means to the first variable state that is not easily changed to the first position. Based on the end of the predetermined period, the variable means is set to the second variable state that is more likely to be changed to the first position than the first variable state by the second variable state setting means. Further, in the second variable state, when the ball is launched into the second flow path, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second entrance than in the first variable state.

  Accordingly, during the predetermined period, the variable means is not easily changed to the first position, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance, so that the second flow is caused by flowing down the first flow path. You can make it seem more profitable than letting down the road. On the other hand, when the predetermined period is over, the variable means is easily changed to the first position, and it is easy to make the ball enter the second entrance, so that the second channel is made to flow down by flowing down the second flow path. A game can be performed with the aim of giving a bonus game. Therefore, since the flow path through which the game ball flows down according to the period can be divided, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, an acquisition unit that acquires information based on a game ball passing through the passing unit, and whether or not to change the variable unit to the first position based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit And a first period as a period from when it is determined that the variable means is changed to the first position until the variable means is set to the first position by the variable setting means. A period setting means capable of setting at least a second period shorter than the first period; and setting the variable means to the first position by the variable setting means, then ending the first position, Variable period setting means capable of setting at least a first variable period and a second variable period shorter than the first variable period as a period until returning to the first variable period, and the period setting means includes the second variable state In which the second period is easier to set than the first variable state, and the variable period setting means is more likely to set the second variable period in the second variable state than in the first variable state. And the time from when the game ball passes through the passing means until it reaches the entrance is longer than the sum of the second period and the second variable period. Machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, information is acquired by the acquiring means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and the determining means determines whether or not the variable means is changed to the first position based on the information acquired by the acquiring means. Is done. As a period from when it is determined that the variable position is changed to the first position by the determining means until the variable means is set to the first position by the variable setting means, there are a first period and a second period shorter than the first period. At least set by the period setting means. Here, in the second variable state, the second variable period is more easily set by the variable period setting means than in the first variable state. The time from when the game ball passes through the passing means until it reaches the entrance is longer than the sum of the second period and the second variable period.

  As a result, even if the game ball is caused to flow down to the second flow path after confirming that the variable means has been changed to the first position, the game ball will not reach the second entrance. The variable means can be reliably changed to the second position. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the second privilege game from being given when the player causes the game ball to flow down to the second flow path during the predetermined period.

  The gaming machine B5 includes launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game board at an interval not falling below a predetermined lower limit period, wherein the second variable period is shorter than the lower limit period. A gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced. That is, a game ball is fired onto the game board by the launching means at intervals that do not fall below a predetermined lower limit period. Here, the second variable period is set to be shorter than the lower limit period.

  Thereby, even if game balls are continuously fired in a predetermined period, the number of game balls that reach the second entrance during the second variable period can be limited to one. Therefore, there is an effect that a plurality of game balls can be prevented from entering the second entrance in the second variable period.

  In any one of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the second variable state setting unit is configured to change the second variable state so that a period during which the variable unit is set to the second position is shorter than the first variable state. A gaming machine B7, which is for setting a state.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the second variable state is set such that the period during which the variable means is set to the second position is shorter than the first variable state. Since it is set by the second variable state setting means, it is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the second entrance in a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more surely prevent the player from flowing down the game ball to the second flow path aiming at becoming the second privilege game in the predetermined period.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the restraining means is a result of the lottery after the lottery means starts the lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance during the predetermined period. The gaming machine B8 is characterized by comprising a lottery period varying means for varying a period until the time is reached so that it becomes longer than after the predetermined period ends.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B7, the result of the lottery after the lottery starts based on the fact that the ball enters the second entrance during the predetermined period. Since the period until the game starts is varied by the lottery period variable means so as to be longer than after the predetermined period is completed, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance in the predetermined period. It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second entrance after the period ends. Therefore, it is possible not to aim at the second flow path during the predetermined period but to launch the sphere aiming at the second flow path after the end of the predetermined period. Therefore, since the method of launching the game ball can be changed according to the period, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B8, the lottery period varying means determines whether the lottery result after the lottery means starts the lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance after the predetermined period ends. The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that a time period until leaving is shorter than a case where a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the first entrance.

  According to the gaming machine B9, after the predetermined period is over, the lottery period from when the lottery based on the fact that the ball enters the second entrance is started by the lottery means is the lottery period. Since the variable means is changed so as to be shorter than the case where the lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the first entrance, the game ball is placed in the first flow path for a predetermined period. It is possible to increase the game efficiency when it is made to flow down. Therefore, the game ball can flow down to the first flow path until the predetermined period elapses, and the game ball can flow down to the second flow path after the predetermined period elapses. Therefore, since the method of launching the game ball can be changed according to the period, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic C group> (Production when canceling the number of games)
A entrance where a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the entrance, and a game ball that is less likely to enter the entrance than the first position. Variable means variable to two positions, passing means through which a game ball can pass, lottery means for executing a lottery based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and a predetermined lottery result by the lottery means Based on the fact that the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, then the variable is executed one or more times to change from the first position to the second position. The control unit and the mode from when the game ball passes through the passing unit to the end of the control by the variable control unit are set as the first mode until the specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition is satisfied. Based on the second mode different from the first mode It is characterized by comprising setting means and effect setting means for setting a game effect that makes it difficult to determine from the game effect that the mode setting means has set the first mode. Game machine C1.

  Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is a win, the game shifts to a win state, and after the jackpot ends, There are things that shift to a state that is advantageous to the player, such as a probability variation state. Among such gaming machines, there is one that notifies whether the gaming machine is in an advantageous state or an unfavorable state for a player (for example, JP-A-2004-24830).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since it is possible to easily detect whether or not the player is in a disadvantaged state, the player who senses the disadvantaged state may easily quit the game. It was. In addition, there is a case where a player who tries to start a game refrains from playing a game on a gaming machine in an unfavorable state. That is, there is a possibility that the operating rate of the gaming machine is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the variable control means makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the entrance from the first position where the game ball can enter the entrance, and from the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position. A lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Thereafter, the control for changing from the first position to the second position is executed one or more times by the variable control means. As a mode from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the control by the variable control means ends, the mode setting means sets the first mode until the specific condition is satisfied. Further, based on the specific condition being satisfied, the mode setting means sets the second mode different from the first mode. Here, the effect setting means sets a game effect that makes it difficult to determine from the game effect that the first setting is set by the mode setting means.

  This makes it difficult for the player to determine from the effect whether the first mode is set or the second mode is set, so whether the first mode is set for the player, The game can be performed while predicting whether the second mode is set. Therefore, since the player can feel the enjoyment of predicting the mode, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, a special lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition, and a special game that allows a player to acquire a predetermined game value based on a specific lottery result obtained by the specific lottery means. As a privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means to be given and the privilege game given by the privilege game granting means, the third privilege game, the second privilege game, and the third privilege game can be easily obtained in comparison with the second privilege game. Based on the privilege game selecting means capable of selecting at least a privilege game and the first privilege game being granted by the privilege game granting means, the privilege game selecting means is unlikely to select the third privilege game, Based on the fact that the second condition game is set to the first state in which the specific condition is difficult to be established, the third reward game is less likely to be selected, and the special condition is more than the first state. Set to a second state in which the condition is likely to be established, and set to a third state in which the third privilege game is more easily selected than the first state and the second state based on the establishment of the specific condition. State setting means, wherein the aspect setting means sets the first aspect based on the fact that the second privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means, and the effect setting means includes: A gaming machine C2 that sets a game effect that makes it difficult to determine from the game effect that the second privilege game has been granted.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a special lottery is executed by the specific lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and a special game that allows the player to acquire a predetermined game value based on the specific lottery result is given a special game. By means. As the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means, the first privilege game, the second privilege game, and the third privilege game that easily obtains the game value compared to the second privilege game are provided by the privilege game selection means. At least selected. Based on the provision of the first privilege game by the privilege game granting means, the state setting means sets the first state in which the third privilege game is not easily selected by the privilege game selection means and the privilege condition is difficult to be established. Further, based on the fact that the second privilege game is given, the third privilege game is hardly selected, and the state setting means sets the second state in which the specific condition is more easily established than in the first state. Further, the state setting unit sets the third state in which the third privilege game is easily selected as compared with the first state and the second state based on the establishment of the specific condition. The first mode is set by the mode setting unit based on the second bonus game being granted by the privilege game granting unit. A game effect that makes it difficult to determine from the game effect that the second privilege game has been granted is set by the effect setting means.

  Thereby, it can be made difficult to determine from the game effect whether the current state is the first state or the second state. That is, it can be difficult to determine whether or not the specific condition is easily established. Therefore, it can be determined that the current state is the first state in which the specific condition is less likely to be established than the second state, and the player can be prevented from quitting the game at that time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult to quit the game and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path that is different from the first flow path and is provided with the entrance, and the first A specific entrance that is provided in the flow path and into which a game ball can enter, and the specific lottery means is based on the game ball entering the entrance or the specific entrance The lottery is executed, and the bonus game selection means is configured to enter the specific entrance when the specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery executed based on entering the entrance. It is easier to select the third award game than the specific lottery result by the lottery executed based on entering the ball, and the mode setting means, as the first mode, If the probability of a lottery result is high and the predetermined lottery result is reached, the variable A mode in which the period during which the stage is changed to the first position is set short, and as the second mode, the probability of the predetermined lottery result is lower than that in the first mode, and the predetermined lottery result is The predetermined lottery is based on the fact that the variable period of time when the variable means is changed to the first position is longer than that of the first mode and the first privilege game is given. The probability that the result is lower than that of the first aspect, and the period during which the variable means is changed to the first position when the predetermined lottery result is reached is equal to or shorter than the length of the first aspect. The game machine C3 is set to three modes, and in the second mode, the game ball is easier to enter the entrance than in the first mode.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, a specific entrance that allows a game ball to enter is provided in the first flow path, and the entrance is provided in a second flow path different from the first flow path. The lottery is executed by the specific lottery means based on the game ball entering the specific entrance or the entrance. When a lottery executed based on entering the entrance gate results in a specific lottery result, a lottery executed based on entering the entrance into the specific entrance gate results in a specific lottery result It becomes easier for the third privilege game to be selected by the privilege game selection means. As the first mode, the mode setting unit sets a mode in which the probability that a predetermined lottery result is high and the variable unit is changed to the first position when the predetermined lottery result is short is set. Further, as a second mode, the probability that the predetermined lottery result is lower than that of the first mode, and when the predetermined lottery result is reached, the period during which the variable means is changed to the first position is the first mode. A comparatively long aspect is set by the aspect setting means. Further, the probability that a predetermined lottery result is obtained based on the first bonus game being given is lower than that in the first mode, and the variable means is changed to the first position when the predetermined lottery result is obtained. Is set to the third mode in which the period is equal to or shorter than the first mode. Here, in the second mode, it becomes easier for a game ball to enter the entrance than in the first mode.

  As a result, when the second mode in which the game ball can easily enter the entrance is set, the game ball is caused to flow down with respect to the second flow path, and the first mode and the third mode are set. If it is, the game ball can flow down with respect to the first flow path. Therefore, the pleasure which changes the flow path made to flow down according to the aspect set with respect to the player can be given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C3, based on the determination means that can determine whether or not the specific condition is satisfied before the specific condition is satisfied, and the determination means that the specific condition is satisfied, the game A gaming machine C4, comprising: an informing means for informing the player to stop the game ball from flowing down to the first flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, whether or not the specific condition is satisfied is determined by the determining means before the specific condition is satisfied, and it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the determining means. Based on this, the notification means notifies the player to stop the game ball from flowing down to the first flow path.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the lottery based on the entrance to a specific entrance is performed by the specific lottery means after specific conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it can suppress that the 1st privilege game or the 2nd privilege game is given by becoming a specific lottery result by the lottery by this specific lottery means, and the 1st mode or the 3rd mode is set up. . Therefore, after the specific condition is established, there is an effect that it is possible to sufficiently entertain the second mode in which the player can easily enter the game ball into the entrance.

  In the gaming machine C4, the lottery by the specific lottery means obtains information for acquiring lottery information by the specific lottery means based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the information obtained by the acquisition means. A storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit, and a prediction means capable of predicting a lottery result by the specific lottery means based on information being acquired by the acquisition means. The setting means sets the first mode until the predetermined lottery result is different from the specific lottery result continuously by the specific lottery means based on the given second bonus game being given. The second mode is set based on the fact that the specific lottery means results in the losing lottery result for the predetermined number of times after the second bonus game is granted. The discriminating unit discriminates whether or not the result of the lottery result is the predetermined number of times continuously based on the prediction result by the prediction unit, and the informing unit continuously performs the predetermined number of times by the discriminating unit. The game is characterized in that the player is informed to stop the flow of the game ball to the first flow path based on the fact that it is determined that the off lottery result is obtained. Machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, information for executing the lottery by the specific lottery means is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition means is predetermined until the lottery by the specific lottery means is performed. Are stored by the storage means. The lottery result by the specific lottery means is predicted by the prediction means based on the information being acquired by the acquisition means. The first mode is set by the mode setting unit until the predetermined lottery result is different from the specific lottery result continuously by the specific lottery unit based on the given second privilege game being given. In addition, the second mode is set by the mode setting unit based on the fact that the lottery means continuously loses the predetermined number of times after the second privilege game is given and results in the lottery result. Based on the prediction result by the prediction means, it is determined by the determination means whether or not a predetermined lottery result is obtained. Based on the fact that the discriminating means discriminates that the result is a lottery result for a predetermined number of times, the informing means informs the player to stop the game ball from flowing down to the first flow path.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the lottery with respect to the entrance into a specific entrance is performed by the specific lottery means based on the information memorize | stored by the memory | storage means after the 1st aspect is complete | finished. Therefore, it can suppress that the 1st privilege game or the 2nd privilege game is given by becoming a specific lottery result by the lottery by this specific lottery means, and the 1st mode or the 3rd mode is set up. . Therefore, after the specific condition is established, there is an effect that it is possible to sufficiently entertain the second mode in which the player can easily enter the game ball into the entrance.

  In the gaming machine C5, based on the number of times discriminating means for discriminating the number of consecutive times of the outlier lottery result after the end of the second privilege game, the number of consecutive times discriminated by the number of times discriminating means, and the predetermined number of times A gaming machine C6, comprising: an effect mode setting means for setting an aspect of the game effect executed by the effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of consecutive losing lottery results after the end of the second award game is determined by the number determining means, and the effect executing means is executed based on the continuous number determined by the number determining means and the predetermined number of times. The aspect of the game effect is set by the effect mode setting means.

  Thereby, the player can be provided with the pleasure of predicting the remaining number of times up to a predetermined number of times based on the aspect of the game effect set by the effect mode setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C5 or C6, the effect setting means includes dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the specific lottery means, and the effect setting means indicates the second privilege game. As the identification information, the same identification information as the identification information indicating the losing lottery result can be set as the identification information indicating the lottery result, and the gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5 or C6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the effect setting means, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the specific lottery means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means. As the identification information indicating the second privilege game, the same identification information as the identification information indicating the off lottery result is set by the effect setting means as the identification information indicating the lottery result.

  Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that it has become the second privilege game in which the game value is less likely to be obtained than the third privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because it is difficult to obtain the game value.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, when the third mode is set by the state setting unit, the effect setting unit is the case where the first mode and the second state are set A gaming machine C8, which sets different game effects.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, when the first mode and the second state are set when the third mode is set by the state setting means Since the aspect of the game effect different from that is set by the effect setting means, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that it is an advantageous state that is likely to become the third privilege game.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B9, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B9, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B9, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, ,
Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, since the conventional gaming machine described above cannot enjoy the winning game as long as it continues to be out of the lottery, there is a risk that the motivation for the player's game will decrease as the player continues to be out of the lottery.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is provided in a first flow path through which a game ball can flow, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first flow path. A first entrance through which a game ball can enter, a second entrance through which the game ball can enter and provided in the second flow path, the first entrance, or the second entrance. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on a game ball entering a ball opening, and a privilege for giving a special game advantageous to a player based on a lottery result obtained by the lottery means being a predetermined lottery result This is executed by the lottery means in comparison with the case where the game ball is caused to flow down to the first flow path by flowing the game ball down to the second flow path at least during a predetermined period. Suppression means for making it difficult for a lottery result to be obtained.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein a first position at which a gaming ball can enter the second entrance and the second entrance than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the mouth, a passing means through which the game ball can pass, and a specification that executes a lottery based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means From the first position to the second position after changing the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the lottery means and a specific lottery result by the specific lottery means Variable control means for executing the variable control one or more times, and when the variable control means changes the variable means to the first position in the predetermined period, the variable means is controlled in the first period. During the predetermined period And when the variable means is changed to the first position, the variable means is controlled to be in the first position for a second period longer than the first period. And a flow delay means for making a period until the game ball flowed down to the second flow path reaches the second entrance is longer than the first period.
The gaming machine of Technical Thought 3 is a gaming machine according to Technical Thought 1 or 2, wherein the bonus game given by the bonus game granting means is a player than the first bonus game and the first bonus game. A bonus game selection means capable of selecting at least a second bonus game that is easy to obtain a lot of game value, and the bonus game selection means is based on a game ball entering the second entrance. When the predetermined lottery result is obtained by the lottery executed, the second privilege is more than the predetermined lottery result obtained by the lottery executed based on entering the first entrance. It is easy to select a game.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first entrance is provided in the first flow path, and the second entrance is provided in the second flow path different from the first flow path. A lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance, and the game is based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a predetermined lottery result. A privilege game advantageous to the user is granted by the privilege game giving means. The lottery result of the lottery executed by the lottery means as compared with the case where the game ball is caused to flow down to the first flow path by the suppression means by flowing the game ball down to the second flow path at least during a predetermined period Is hard to come out.
Thereby, it can be made to feel that the 1st flow path wants to flow down rather than letting a game ball flow down with respect to the 2nd flow path with which a lottery result is hard to come out at least for a predetermined period. Therefore, since the flow path through which the game ball flows down can be changed with respect to the player according to the period, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of striking the direction in which the game ball is launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the lottery is executed by the specific lottery means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and the game ball is unlikely to enter the variable means based on the specific lottery result obtained by the specific lottery means. The variable control means executes control one or more times by changing from the first position to the second position after changing the position from the position to the first position where the game ball can enter. When changing the variable means to the first position during the predetermined period, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is in the first position during the first period. On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the first position outside the predetermined period, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is in the first position for a second period longer than the first period. In the suppression means, the period until the game ball that has flowed down to the second flow path reaches the second entrance is longer than the first period by the flow-down delay means.
As a result, when the player launches the game ball into the second flow path after confirming that the variable means has been changed to the first position during the predetermined period, the game ball is moved to the second entrance. , So that the player can aim the first flow path for a predetermined period. Therefore, since the flow path through which the game ball flows down can be changed with respect to the player according to the period, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of striking the direction in which the game ball is launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the player can easily obtain more game value than the first privilege game are selected by the privilege game selection device as the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means. The Here, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained by a lottery executed based on the game ball entering the second entrance, the game ball enters the first entrance. It becomes easier for the bonus game selection means to select the second bonus game than when the lottery executed based on the lottery results in a predetermined lottery result.
Thereby, it can suppress that a game is played aiming at a 2nd entrance during a predetermined period, and only the 2nd privilege game continues. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
67 Normal entrance (passage means)
64 1st entrance (1st entrance)
640 Second entrance (second entrance)
640a Electric accessories (variable means)
700 Detouring part (part of suppression measures)
S106 Variable control means S213 Bonus game grant means S303, S304 Part of lottery means S507, S508 Part of lottery means S610, S611 Particular lottery means S617, S621 Part of suppression means

Claims (3)

A first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path,
A first entrance opening provided in the first flow path and into which a game ball can enter;
A second entry port provided in the second flow path and into which a game ball can enter;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance;
Bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined lottery result;
The lottery result of the lottery executed by the lottery means is compared with the case where the game ball is caused to flow down to the first channel by flowing the game ball down to the second channel at least during a predetermined period. A gaming machine comprising a suppressing means that makes it difficult to exit. A variable that can be varied between a first position at which the game ball can enter the second entrance and a second position at which the game ball is less likely to enter the second entrance than the first position. Means,
Passing means through which game balls can pass;
Specific lottery means for executing a lottery based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means;
Control that varies the variable means from the second position to the first position after the specific lottery means produces a specific lottery result, and then changes the variable means from the first position to the second position. Variable control means that executes one or more times,
The variable control means controls the variable means so as to be in the first position during the first period when the variable means is changed to the first position in the predetermined period, and outside the predetermined period. When changing the variable means to the first position, the variable means is controlled to be in the first position for a second period longer than the first period,
The suppression means includes a flow delay means that makes a period until the game ball that has flowed down to the second flow path reaches the second entrance, longer than the first period. The gaming machine according to claim 1. Special game selection means capable of selecting at least a first special game and a second special game that allows the player to easily obtain more game value than the first special game as the special game granted by the special game granting means; With
The privilege game selection means enters the first entrance when the predetermined lottery result is obtained by a lottery executed based on a game ball entering the second entrance. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the second privilege game is easier to select than the predetermined lottery result obtained by a lottery executed based on a ball.

Images